WO2020221117A1 - Coefficient indication method for constructing precoding matrix, and communication apparatus - Google Patents

Coefficient indication method for constructing precoding matrix, and communication apparatus Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2020221117A1
WO2020221117A1 PCT/CN2020/086593 CN2020086593W WO2020221117A1 WO 2020221117 A1 WO2020221117 A1 WO 2020221117A1 CN 2020086593 W CN2020086593 W CN 2020086593W WO 2020221117 A1 WO2020221117 A1 WO 2020221117A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
weighting coefficients
csi report
indication
bits
reported
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2020/086593
Other languages
French (fr)
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
王潇涵
金黄平
毕晓艳
Original Assignee
华为技术有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 华为技术有限公司 filed Critical 华为技术有限公司
Publication of WO2020221117A1 publication Critical patent/WO2020221117A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04BTRANSMISSION
    • H04B7/00Radio transmission systems, i.e. using radiation field
    • H04B7/02Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas
    • H04B7/04Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas
    • H04B7/0413MIMO systems
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04BTRANSMISSION
    • H04B7/00Radio transmission systems, i.e. using radiation field
    • H04B7/02Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas
    • H04B7/04Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas
    • H04B7/0413MIMO systems
    • H04B7/0456Selection of precoding matrices or codebooks, e.g. using matrices antenna weighting
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04BTRANSMISSION
    • H04B7/00Radio transmission systems, i.e. using radiation field
    • H04B7/02Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas
    • H04B7/04Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas
    • H04B7/06Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas at the transmitting station
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04BTRANSMISSION
    • H04B7/00Radio transmission systems, i.e. using radiation field
    • H04B7/02Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas
    • H04B7/04Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas
    • H04B7/06Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas at the transmitting station
    • H04B7/0613Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas at the transmitting station using simultaneous transmission
    • H04B7/0615Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas at the transmitting station using simultaneous transmission of weighted versions of same signal
    • H04B7/0619Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas at the transmitting station using simultaneous transmission of weighted versions of same signal using feedback from receiving side
    • H04B7/0621Feedback content
    • H04B7/0626Channel coefficients, e.g. channel state information [CSI]

Definitions

  • This application relates to the field of communications, and more specifically, to a coefficient indicating method and communication device for constructing a precoding matrix.
  • Massive MIMO massive multiple-input multiple output
  • network equipment can reduce interference between multiple users and interference between multiple signal streams of the same user through precoding technology. Thereby improving signal quality, realizing space division multiplexing, and improving spectrum utilization.
  • the terminal device may determine the precoding vector by means of channel measurement, for example, and hopes that through feedback, the network device can obtain the same or similar precoding vector as the precoding vector determined by the terminal device. In order to obtain higher feedback accuracy, the terminal device can fit the precoding vector determined by the channel measurement through multiple beam weighting methods. The terminal device may feed back the beam used for weighting and the weighting coefficient to the network device, so that the network device constructs a precoding matrix based on the feedback of the terminal device.
  • the channel state information (CSI) report reported by the terminal device may not necessarily include all the information to be fed back determined by channel measurement.
  • the weighting coefficient reported by the terminal device may be a part of all weighting coefficients with a non-zero amplitude.
  • the network device cannot know in advance what information the terminal device reports, it may not be able to accurately estimate the cost of the second part of the CSI report, and it may not be able to decode it correctly. Therefore, the network device may not be able to accurately obtain the information in the CSI report, thereby affecting the system transmission performance.
  • This application provides a coefficient indicating method and communication device for constructing a precoding matrix, in order to clarify how to indicate the number of weighting coefficients in a CSI report.
  • a coefficient indicating method for constructing a precoding matrix includes: the terminal device generates a channel state information CSI report, the CSI report including quantization information of K 1 weighting coefficients and first indication information; wherein the K 1 weighting coefficients are weighting coefficients with a non-zero amplitude, The K 1 weighting coefficients are used to construct a precoding matrix corresponding to one or more frequency domain units; the first indication information is used to indicate whether the K 1 weighting coefficients are reported by the terminal device based on the pre-configured weighting coefficients.
  • All weighting coefficients with non-zero amplitudes determined by the number K 0 is K 2 , K 1 ⁇ K 2 ⁇ K 0 , K 0 , K 1 and K 2 are both positive integers; the terminal device sends the CSI report.
  • this method may be executed by a terminal device, or may also be executed by a chip configured in the terminal device. This application does not limit this.
  • the terminal device carries the first indication information in the CSI report to indicate whether the weighting coefficient reported by the terminal device is all non-zero weighting coefficients determined by the terminal device based on K 0 and channel measurement , So that the network equipment can determine the K 1 weighting coefficients reported by the terminal equipment based on the CSI report, and determine whether the reported weighting coefficients are all non-zero weighting coefficients determined by the terminal equipment based on K 0 and channel measurement. Based on this, the network device can parse the first part of the CSI report according to the predefined CSI report format, and estimate the length of the second part of the CSI report, so as to complete the correct decoding of the second part of the CSI report. Therefore, the network device can determine the precoding matrix used for data transmission based on the information in the CSI report, which is beneficial to improve the system transmission performance.
  • the network device has learned whether the terminal device has discarded the weighting coefficient, and can consider allocating more physical uplink resources for the terminal device in the next scheduling to transmit the CSI report. On the contrary, if the network device does not know that the terminal device discards part of the weighting coefficients with a non-zero amplitude when reporting the CSI report, the network device will not infer that the physical uplink resources allocated to the terminal device during this scheduling are insufficient. In the next scheduling, the terminal device may still be allocated resources of the same size, and the terminal device may discard a part of the weighting coefficients with a non-zero amplitude each time it reports. This may seriously affect the feedback accuracy and is not conducive to improving the data transmission performance.
  • the network device can determine whether the physical uplink resources allocated to the terminal device in the previous scheduling are sufficient according to the first indication information, and can also be based on the information obtained in the previous scheduling in the next scheduling, such as K 2. Allocate appropriate physical uplink resources for terminal equipment. Therefore, it is beneficial to improve the feedback accuracy and the transmission performance.
  • the method further includes: the terminal device receives second indication information, where the second indication information is used to indicate the number of weighting coefficients configured for the terminal device to report. K 0 .
  • the number of weighting coefficient reports pre-configured by the network device for the terminal device that is, the maximum number of weighting coefficients reported by the terminal device, or in other words, the maximum number of weighting coefficients reported.
  • the network equipment can pre-instruct the maximum number of weighting coefficients to be reported for the terminal equipment through high-level signaling.
  • a coefficient indication method for constructing a precoding matrix includes: the network device receives a channel state information CSI report, the CSI report including quantization information of K 1 weighting coefficients and first indication information; wherein, the K 1 weighting coefficients are weighting coefficients with a non-zero amplitude, The K 1 weighting coefficients are used to construct a precoding matrix corresponding to one or more frequency domain units; the first indication information is used to indicate whether the K 1 weighting coefficients are the number reported by the terminal device based on the pre-configured weighting coefficients All amplitude weighting coefficients K 0 determined non-zero, the terminal device based on the number of all non-zero amplitude weighting coefficient K 0 is determined as K 2, K 1 ⁇ K 2 ⁇ K 0, K 0, K 1 And K 2 are both positive integers; the network device determines according to the CSI report whether the K 1 weighting coefficients and the K 1 weighting coefficients are all the amplitudes determined by the
  • this method may be executed by a network device, or may also be executed by a chip configured in the network device. This application does not limit this.
  • the terminal device carries the first indication information in the CSI report to indicate whether the weighting coefficient reported by the terminal device is all non-zero weighting coefficients determined by the terminal device based on K 0 and channel measurement , So that the network equipment can determine the K 1 weighting coefficients reported by the terminal equipment based on the CSI report, and determine whether the reported weighting coefficients are all non-zero weighting coefficients determined by the terminal equipment based on K 0 and channel measurement. Based on this, the network device can parse the first part of the CSI report according to the predefined CSI report format, and estimate the length of the second part of the CSI report, so as to complete the correct decoding of the second part of the CSI report. Therefore, the network device can determine the precoding matrix used for data transmission based on the information in the CSI report, which is beneficial to improve the system transmission performance.
  • the network device has learned whether the terminal device has discarded the weighting coefficient, and can consider allocating more physical uplink resources for the terminal device in the next scheduling to transmit the CSI report. On the contrary, if the network device does not know that the terminal device discards part of the weighting coefficients with a non-zero amplitude when reporting the CSI report, the network device will not infer that the physical uplink resources allocated to the terminal device during this scheduling are insufficient. In the next scheduling, the terminal device may still be allocated resources of the same size, and the terminal device may discard a part of the weighting coefficients with a non-zero amplitude each time it reports. This may seriously affect the feedback accuracy and is not conducive to improving the data transmission performance.
  • the network device can determine whether the physical uplink resources allocated to the terminal device in the previous scheduling are sufficient according to the first indication information, and can also be based on the information obtained in the previous scheduling in the next scheduling, such as K 2. Allocate appropriate physical uplink resources for terminal equipment. Therefore, it is beneficial to improve the feedback accuracy and the transmission performance.
  • the method further includes: the network device sending second indication information, the second indication information being used to indicate the number of weighting coefficients configured for the terminal device to report K 0 .
  • the number of weighting coefficient reports pre-configured by the network device for the terminal device that is, the maximum number of weighting coefficients reported by the terminal device, or in other words, the maximum number of weighting coefficients reported.
  • the network equipment can pre-instruct the maximum number of weighting coefficients to be reported for the terminal equipment through high-level signaling.
  • K 1 and K 2 it can be determined according to the magnitude relationship between K 1 and K 2 whether the K 1 weighting coefficients are all weighting coefficients with non-zero amplitudes determined by the terminal device based on the number of weighting coefficients reported by the pre-configured K 0 . If K 1 ⁇ K 2 , it means that K 1 weighting coefficients are not all weighting coefficients with non-zero amplitudes determined by the terminal device based on the number of pre-configured weighting coefficients reported by K 0 , or that the terminal device discards K 2 amplitudes Part of the non-zero weighting coefficient.
  • K 1 K 2 , it means that the K 1 weighting coefficients are all non-zero weighting coefficients determined by the terminal device based on the pre-configured weighting coefficient report number K 0 , or in other words, the terminal device does not discard K 2 amplitudes Any one of the non-zero weighting coefficients.
  • the network device can allocate physical uplink resources to the terminal device based on the value of K 2 during the next scheduling, so that more comprehensive feedback information can be obtained during the next feedback, which is beneficial to improve system transmission. performance.
  • the K 2 indication is carried in the first part of the CSI report, and the K 1 indication is carried in the second part of the CSI report.
  • K 2 can be indicated by a binary number, for example, or by other existing possible indication methods.
  • the value of K 1 may also be indicated by a binary number, or may be indicated by a bitmap, or indicated by other existing possible indication methods. This application does not limit the specific instructions of K 1 and K 2 .
  • the first indication information includes a first indication bit, and the first indication bit is used to indicate whether the K 1 weighting coefficients are based on the terminal equipment preset
  • the configured weighting coefficients report all weighting coefficients with a non-zero amplitude determined by the number K 0 .
  • the overhead of the first indicator bit may be 1 bit.
  • This 1 bit can be used to indicate yes or no.
  • the first indication bit when the first indication bit is set to "0", it means that the K 1 weighting coefficients are all weighting coefficients with non-zero amplitudes determined by the terminal device based on the number of weighting coefficients reported by the pre-configured K 0 , that is, the terminal device has no Discard any of the K 2 weighting coefficients; when the first indication bit is set to "1", it means that the K 1 weighting coefficients are not all determined by the terminal device based on the number of weighting coefficients reported by the pre-configured K 0 A weighting coefficient with a non-zero amplitude, that is, the terminal device discards some of the K 2 weighting coefficients.
  • the meanings represented by different values in the first indicator bit may be determined according to a preset rule, and the present application does not limit the meanings corresponding to different values.
  • the first indication bit is carried in the second part of the CSI report.
  • the first indication information includes a second indication bit
  • the second indication bit indicates a weighting coefficient among K 2 weighting coefficients that is not reported through the CSI report The number of.
  • the second indication bit can simultaneously indicate whether the terminal device discards the weighting coefficient and how many weighting coefficients are discarded through more indication bits.
  • the overhead of the second indication bit is Bit, corresponding to K 0 -K 1 +1 optional values; among them, K 0 is the number of pre-configured weighting coefficient reports, K 0 is a positive integer; the K 0 -K 1 +1 optional The value of includes K 0 -K 1 +1 possible values of the number of weighting coefficients not reported by the CSI report.
  • the number of weighting coefficients pre-configured by the network equipment is K 0
  • the number of weighting coefficients actually reported by the terminal equipment is K 1
  • the number of weighting coefficients discarded by the terminal equipment does not exceed K 0 -K 1 .
  • the weighting coefficient is not discarded that is, K 0 -K 1 is 0, and the K 0 -K 1 +1 optional values may include the number of weighting coefficients not reported through the CSI report.
  • the number of possible values K 0 -K 1 +1 This indicates whether the terminal device discards the weighting coefficients and how many weighting coefficients are discarded.
  • the network device can determine how many weighting coefficients are discarded according to the second indicator bit, and can allocate physical uplink resources to the terminal device based on the value of K 2 in the next scheduling, so that a more comprehensive feedback can be obtained in the next feedback.
  • the feedback information is therefore helpful to improve system transmission performance.
  • the second indication bit is carried in the second part of the CSI report.
  • the first part of the reported CSI comprises an indication of K 1.
  • the network device By including the indication of K 1 in the first part of the CSI report, it is convenient for the network device to estimate the length of the second part of the CSI report according to the number of weighting coefficients actually reported.
  • the CSI The overhead of the second part of the report is X 2 bits; or, if the number of bits Q required for the second part of the CSI report determined based on the K 2 weighting coefficients is less than or equal to the pre-allocated number of bits X 2 , the CSI report
  • the length of the second part of the CSI report is related to K 2 and the number of pre-allocated bits X 2 .
  • the overhead of the second part of the CSI report can be estimated, and then the second part of the CSI report can be decoded, so as to obtain the information reported by the terminal device for constructing precoding
  • the coefficients of the matrix and other information such as spatial vector, frequency vector, etc.
  • a communication device which includes modules or units for executing the method in the first aspect and any one of the possible implementation manners of the first aspect.
  • the communication device includes a processing unit and a transceiver unit.
  • the processing unit is used to generate a CSI report, the CSI report including quantization information of K 1 weighting coefficients and first indication information; wherein, the K 1 weighting coefficients are weighting coefficients with a non-zero amplitude, and the K 1 weighting coefficients are used for Construct a precoding matrix corresponding to one or more frequency domain units;
  • the first indication information is used to indicate whether the K 1 weighting coefficients are all the amplitudes determined by the device based on the number of pre-configured weighting coefficient reports K 0 weighting coefficients to zero, the magnitude of the apparatus based on the number of all nonzero weighting coefficient K 0 is determined as K 2, K 1 ⁇ K 2 ⁇ K 0, K 0, K 1 and K 2 are positive integers; transceiver
  • the unit is used to send the CSI report.
  • a communication device including a processor.
  • the processor is coupled with the memory and can be used to execute instructions in the memory to implement the foregoing first aspect and the method in any one of the possible implementation manners of the first aspect.
  • the communication device further includes a memory.
  • the communication device further includes a communication interface, and the processor is coupled with the communication interface.
  • the communication device is a terminal device.
  • the communication interface may be a transceiver, or an input/output interface.
  • the communication device is a chip configured in a terminal device.
  • the communication interface may be an input/output interface.
  • the transceiver may be a transceiver circuit.
  • the input/output interface may be an input/output circuit.
  • a communication device which includes modules or units for executing the second aspect and the method in any one of the possible implementation manners of the second aspect.
  • the communication device includes a processing unit and a transceiver unit.
  • the transceiver unit is used to receive a CSI report;
  • the CSI report includes quantization information of K 1 weighting coefficients and first indication information; wherein, the K 1 weighting coefficients are weighting coefficients with a non-zero amplitude, and the K 1 weighting coefficients are used for Construct a precoding matrix corresponding to one or more frequency domain units;
  • the first indication information is used to indicate whether the K 1 weighting coefficients are all the amplitudes determined by the device based on the number of pre-configured weighting coefficient reports K 0 weighting coefficients to zero, the magnitude of the apparatus based on the number of all nonzero weighting coefficient K 0 is determined as K 2, K 1 ⁇ K 2 ⁇ K 0, K 0, K 1 and K 2 are positive integers;
  • processing The unit is configured to determine K 1 weighting coefficients and whether the K 1 weighting coefficients are all weighting coefficients with a non-zero amplitude determined by
  • a communication device including a processor.
  • the processor is coupled with the memory and can be used to execute instructions in the memory to implement the foregoing second aspect and the method in any one of the possible implementation manners of the second aspect.
  • the communication device further includes a memory.
  • the communication device further includes a communication interface, and the processor is coupled with the communication interface.
  • the communication device is a network device.
  • the communication interface may be a transceiver, or an input/output interface.
  • the communication device is a chip configured in a network device.
  • the communication interface may be an input/output interface.
  • the transceiver may be a transceiver circuit.
  • the input/output interface may be an input/output circuit.
  • a processor including: an input circuit, an output circuit, and a processing circuit.
  • the processing circuit is configured to receive a signal through the input circuit and transmit a signal through the output circuit, so that the processor executes any one of the first aspect to the second aspect and the first aspect to the second aspect. The method in the way.
  • the above-mentioned processor can be one or more chips
  • the input circuit can be an input pin
  • the output circuit can be an output pin
  • the processing circuit can be a transistor, a gate circuit, a flip-flop, and various logic circuits, etc.
  • the input signal received by the input circuit may be received and input by, for example, but not limited to, a receiver
  • the signal output by the output circuit may be, for example, but not limited to, output to and transmitted by the transmitter
  • the circuit can be the same circuit, which is used as an input circuit and an output circuit at different times.
  • the embodiments of the present application do not limit the specific implementation manners of the processor and various circuits.
  • a processing device including a processor and a memory.
  • the processor is used to read instructions stored in the memory, receive signals through a receiver, and transmit signals through a transmitter to execute any one of the first aspect to the second aspect and the first aspect to the second aspect.
  • processors there are one or more processors and one or more memories.
  • the memory may be integrated with the processor, or the memory and the processor may be provided separately.
  • the memory can be a non-transitory (non-transitory) memory, such as a read only memory (ROM), which can be integrated with the processor on the same chip, or can be set in different On the chip, the embodiment of the present application does not limit the type of memory and the setting mode of the memory and the processor.
  • ROM read only memory
  • sending instruction information may be a process of outputting instruction information from the processor
  • receiving capability information may be a process of the processor receiving input capability information.
  • the data output by the processor can be output to the transmitter, and the input data received by the processor can come from the receiver.
  • the transmitter and receiver can be collectively referred to as a transceiver.
  • the processing device in the above eighth aspect may be one or more chips.
  • the processor in the processing device can be implemented by hardware or software.
  • the processor may be a logic circuit, integrated circuit, etc.; when implemented by software, the processor may be a general-purpose processor, which is implemented by reading software codes stored in the memory, and the memory may Integrated in the processor, can be located outside of the processor, and exist independently.
  • a computer program product includes: a computer program (also called code, or instruction), which when the computer program is executed, causes the computer to execute the first aspect to the first aspect.
  • a computer program also called code, or instruction
  • a computer-readable medium stores a computer program (also called code, or instruction) when it runs on a computer, so that the computer executes the first aspect to the first aspect.
  • a computer program also called code, or instruction
  • a communication system including the aforementioned network equipment and terminal equipment.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of a communication system suitable for a coefficient indication method for constructing a precoding matrix provided by an embodiment of the present application;
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic flowchart of a coefficient indicating method for constructing a precoding matrix provided by an embodiment of the present application
  • FIG. 3 is a schematic block diagram of a communication device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 4 is a schematic structural diagram of a terminal device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 5 is a schematic structural diagram of a network device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • GSM global system for mobile communications
  • CDMA code division multiple access
  • WCDMA broadband code division multiple access
  • GPRS general packet radio service
  • LTE long term evolution
  • LTE frequency division duplex FDD
  • TDD LTE Time division duplex
  • UMTS universal mobile telecommunication system
  • WiMAX worldwide interoperability for microwave access
  • 5G fifth generation
  • 5G fifth generation
  • NR new radio
  • V2X can include vehicle-to-network (V2N) and vehicle-to-vehicle (V2N), V2V), vehicle to infrastructure (V2I), vehicle to pedestrian (V2P), etc.
  • LTE-V long term evolution-vehicle
  • LTE-V vehicle networking
  • machine-type communications etc.
  • MTC Internet of things
  • IoT Internet of things
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of a communication system 100 applicable to an embodiment of the present application for constructing a coefficient indication method of a precoding matrix.
  • the communication system 100 may include at least one network device, such as the network device 110 shown in FIG. 1; the communication system 100 may also include at least one terminal device, such as the terminal device 120 shown in FIG. 1.
  • the network device 110 and the terminal device 120 may communicate through a wireless link.
  • Each communication device, such as the network device 110 or the terminal device 120 can be equipped with multiple antennas.
  • the configured multiple antennas may include at least one transmitting antenna for transmitting signals and at least one receiving antenna for receiving signals. Therefore, the communication devices in the communication system 100, such as the network device 110 and the terminal device 120, can communicate through multi-antenna technology.
  • the network device in the communication system may be any device with a wireless transceiver function.
  • the network equipment includes but not limited to: evolved Node B (eNB), radio network controller (RNC), Node B (NB), base station controller (BSC) ), base transceiver station (BTS), home base station (for example, home evolved NodeB, or home Node B, HNB), baseband unit (BBU), wireless fidelity (WiFi) systems
  • the access point (AP), wireless relay node, wireless backhaul node, transmission point (TP) or transmission and reception point (TRP), etc. can also be 5G, for example, NR, gNB in the system, or transmission point (TRP or TP), one or a group of antenna panels (including multiple antenna panels) of the base station in the 5G system, or it can also be a network node that constitutes a gNB or transmission point , Such as baseband unit (BBU), or distributed unit (DU), etc.
  • BBU baseband unit
  • DU distributed unit
  • the gNB may include a centralized unit (CU) and a DU.
  • the gNB may also include an active antenna unit (AAU for short).
  • CU implements some functions of gNB
  • DU implements some functions of gNB.
  • CU is responsible for processing non-real-time protocols and services, implementing radio resource control (RRC), and packet data convergence protocol (PDCP) The function of the layer.
  • RRC radio resource control
  • PDCP packet data convergence protocol
  • the DU is responsible for processing physical layer protocols and real-time services, and realizes the functions of the radio link control (radio link control, RLC) layer, media access control (MAC) layer, and physical (physical, PHY) layer.
  • RLC radio link control
  • MAC media access control
  • PHY physical layer
  • the network device may be a device that includes one or more of a CU node, a DU node, and an AAU node.
  • the CU can be divided into network equipment in an access network (radio access network, RAN), or the CU can be divided into network equipment in a core network (core network, CN), which is not limited in this application.
  • terminal equipment in the wireless communication system may also be referred to as user equipment (UE), access terminal, user unit, user station, mobile station, mobile station, remote station, remote terminal, mobile equipment, User terminal, terminal, wireless communication device, user agent or user device.
  • UE user equipment
  • the terminal device in the embodiment of the present application may be a mobile phone (mobile phone), a tablet computer (pad), a computer with wireless transceiver function, a virtual reality (VR) terminal device, and an augmented reality (AR) terminal Equipment, wireless terminals in industrial control, wireless terminals in unmanned driving (self-driving), wireless terminals in remote medical, wireless terminals in smart grid, transportation safety ( Wireless terminals in transportation safety, wireless terminals in smart cities, wireless terminals in smart homes, mobile terminals configured in transportation, and so on.
  • the embodiment of this application does not limit the application scenario.
  • FIG. 1 is only a simplified schematic diagram of an example for ease of understanding, and the communication system 100 may also include other network devices or other terminal devices, which are not shown in FIG. 1.
  • the processing procedure of the downlink signal at the physical layer before transmission may be executed by a network device, or may be executed by a chip configured in the network device.
  • the following are collectively referred to as network devices.
  • the codeword may be coded bits that have been coded (for example, including channel coding).
  • the codeword is scrambling to generate scrambled bits.
  • the scrambled bits undergo modulation mapping (modulation mapping) to obtain modulation symbols.
  • Modulation symbols are mapped to multiple layers, or transmission layers, through layer mapping.
  • the modulation symbols after layer mapping are precoding (precoding) to obtain a precoded signal.
  • the precoded signal is mapped to multiple REs after resource element (resource element, RE) mapping. These REs are then modulated by orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM) and then transmitted through an antenna port (antenna port).
  • OFDM orthogonal frequency division multiplexing
  • the sending device (such as network equipment) can process the signal to be sent by using a precoding matrix that matches the channel state when the channel state is known, so that the precoded signal to be sent and the channel Adaptation, thereby reducing the complexity of the receiving device (such as the terminal device) to eliminate the influence between channels. Therefore, through the precoding processing of the signal to be transmitted, the quality of the received signal (for example, the signal to interference plus noise ratio (SINR), etc.) can be improved. Therefore, the use of precoding technology can realize transmission on the same time-frequency resource between the sending device and multiple receiving devices, that is, realizing multiple user multiple input multiple output (MU-MIMO).
  • MU-MIMO multiple user multiple input multiple output
  • the sending device may also perform precoding in other ways. For example, when channel information (such as but not limited to a channel matrix) cannot be obtained, precoding is performed using a preset precoding matrix or a weighting processing method. For the sake of brevity, its specific content will not be repeated in this article.
  • Channel state information report It can also be referred to as CSI for short.
  • the CSI report may include, but is not limited to, precoding matrix indicator (PMI), rank indicator (rank indicator, RI), channel quality indicator (CQI), and channel state information reference signal (channel state information).
  • PMI precoding matrix indicator
  • rank indicator rank indicator
  • CQI channel quality indicator
  • channel state information reference signal channel state information reference signal
  • information reference signal CSI-RS resource indicator (CSI-RS resource indicator, CRI) and layer indicator (layer indicator, LI), etc.
  • the CSI may include one or more of the above-listed, and may also include other information used to characterize the CSI in addition to the above-listed, which is not limited in this application.
  • the terminal device may report one or more CSI reports in a time unit (such as a slot), and each CSI report may correspond to a configuration condition for CSI reporting.
  • the configuration condition of the CSI report can be determined by, for example, high-level signaling (such as an information element (IE) CSI reporting configuration (CSI-ReportingConfig) in a radio resource control (resource control, RRC) message).
  • IE information element
  • CSI-ReportingConfig CSI reporting configuration
  • RRC radio resource control
  • the CSI report configuration can be used to indicate the time domain behavior, bandwidth, and format corresponding to the report quantity of the CSI report.
  • the time domain behavior includes, for example, periodic, semi-persistent, and aperiodic.
  • the terminal device can generate a CSI report based on a CSI report configuration.
  • the content in the CSI report may be divided into two parts.
  • the CSI report may include a first part and a second part.
  • the first part can also be called part 1 (part 1).
  • the second part can also be called part 2 (part 2).
  • the first part and the second part can be coded independently.
  • the payload size of the first part may be predefined, and the payload size of the second part may be determined according to the information carried in the first part.
  • the network device may decode the first part according to the pre-defined payload size of the first part to obtain the information carried in the first part.
  • the network device may determine the payload size of the second part according to the information obtained from the first part, and then decode the second part to obtain the information carried in the second part.
  • first part and the second part are similar to part 1 (part 1) and part 2 (part 2) of the CSI defined in the NR protocol TS38.214 version 15 (release 15, R15).
  • the embodiments of the present application mainly relate to PMI reporting
  • the listing of the contents in the first part and the second part of the CSI report in the following embodiments only relates to PMI related information, and does not involve other information.
  • this should not constitute any limitation to this application.
  • the first part of the CSI report may also include one or more of CQI and LI, or may also include Other information about the feedback overhead can be predefined, and the second part of the CSI report can also include other information. This application does not limit this.
  • first part and the second part are named only for easy distinction, and should not constitute any limitation to the application. This application does not rule out the possibility of defining other names for the first and second parts in future agreements.
  • Precoding matrix indication can be used to indicate the precoding matrix.
  • the precoding matrix may be, for example, a precoding matrix determined by the terminal device based on the channel matrix of each frequency domain unit.
  • the channel matrix may be determined by the terminal equipment through channel estimation or other methods or based on channel reciprocity.
  • the specific method for the terminal device to determine the precoding matrix is not limited to the above, and the specific implementation can refer to the prior art. For brevity, it will not be listed here.
  • the precoding matrix can be obtained by performing singular value decomposition (SVD) on the channel matrix or the covariance matrix of the channel matrix, or it can be obtained by performing eigenvalue decomposition (eigenvalue decomposition) on the covariance matrix of the channel matrix. decopomsition, EVD).
  • SVD singular value decomposition
  • eigenvalue decomposition eigenvalue decomposition
  • EVD decopomsition
  • the network device may determine the precoding matrix corresponding to one or more frequency domain units based on the feedback of the terminal device.
  • the precoding matrix determined by the network equipment can be directly used for downlink data transmission; it can also undergo some beamforming methods, such as zero forcing (ZF), regularized zero-forcing (RZF), Minimum mean-squared error (MMSE), maximum signal-to-leakage-and-noise (SLNR), etc., to obtain the final precoding matrix for downlink data transmission.
  • ZF zero forcing
  • RZF regularized zero-forcing
  • MMSE Minimum mean-squared error
  • SLNR maximum signal-to-leakage-and-noise
  • the precoding matrix determined by the terminal device can be understood as the precoding matrix to be fed back.
  • the terminal device can indicate the precoding matrix to be fed back through the PMI, so that the network device can recover the precoding matrix based on the PMI.
  • the precoding matrix recovered by the network device based on the PMI may be the same or similar to the foregoing precoding matrix to be fed back.
  • this application does not limit the specific method for the terminal device to determine the precoding matrix to be fed back and the network device to restore the precoding matrix according to the feedback.
  • the terminal device can fit the precoding matrix to be fed back by the weighting of the space-frequency vector pair through the feedback mode of dual-domain compression, and combine the space vector and the frequency domain vector in each space-frequency vector pair with the space-frequency vector.
  • the weighting coefficient corresponding to the vector pair is fed back to the network device.
  • the network device may construct a precoding matrix corresponding to each frequency domain unit based on a corresponding method.
  • the terminal device can use the type II (type II) codebook feedback mode defined in the existing protocol to fit the precoding matrix to be fed back by the weighting of the beam vector, and fit the beam vector and the corresponding broadband The coefficients and subband coefficients are fed back to the network equipment.
  • the network device may construct a precoding matrix corresponding to each frequency domain unit based on a corresponding method.
  • the feedback method of the type II codebook please refer to the relevant description in the NR protocol TS38.214 version 15 (release 15, R15). For the sake of brevity, this article will not describe it in detail.
  • the terminal device may also feed back the precoding matrix to be fed back to the network device in other possible ways.
  • the terminal device can perform channel measurement based on the precoding reference signal, and the precoding matrix to be fed back determined based on the channel measurement can be fitted by the weighting of multiple reference signal ports, and each reference signal port and each The weighting coefficient corresponding to the reference signal port is fed back to the network device.
  • the network device may construct a precoding matrix corresponding to each frequency domain unit based on a corresponding method.
  • the precoding reference signal corresponding to each reference signal port can be obtained by precoding based on a space vector and a frequency vector. Therefore, the weight of the port is essentially the weight of the space-frequency vector pair.
  • the present application does not limit the correspondence between the reference signal port and the spatial vector and frequency domain vector.
  • the above-listed method for the terminal device to indicate the precoding matrix to be fed back based on the weight of the beam is only an example, and should not constitute any limitation in this application.
  • Frequency domain unit A unit of frequency domain resources, which can represent different granularity of frequency domain resources.
  • Frequency domain units may include, but are not limited to, for example, channel quality indicator (CQI) subband, 1/R of CQI subband, resource block (resource block, RB), subcarrier, resource block group ( resource block group (RBG) or precoding resource block group (PRG), etc.
  • CQI channel quality indicator
  • R is a positive integer.
  • the value of R can be 1 or 2, for example.
  • the PMI may be used to indicate a precoding matrix corresponding to a frequency domain unit, and the frequency domain unit may also be referred to as a PMI subband.
  • R may represent the ratio of the granularity of the CQI subband to the granularity of the PMI subband.
  • R is 1, the granularity of a CQI subband is the same as the granularity of a PMI subband; when R is 2, the granularity of a CQI subband is twice the granularity of a PMI subband.
  • the precoding matrix corresponding to the frequency domain unit may refer to a precoding matrix determined by performing channel measurement and feedback based on the reference signal on the frequency domain unit.
  • the precoding matrix corresponding to the frequency domain unit can be used to precode the data subsequently transmitted through the frequency domain unit.
  • the precoding matrix or precoding vector corresponding to the frequency domain unit may also be referred to simply as the precoding matrix or precoding vector of the frequency domain unit.
  • a precoding matrix can include one or more vectors, such as column vectors. Each column vector can correspond to a transport layer. In other words, the precoding matrix corresponding to a certain frequency domain unit may be determined based on the precoding vector of the frequency domain unit fed back from each transmission layer in one or more transmission layers.
  • the precoding vector of the same frequency domain unit constructed for the spatial vector, frequency domain vector and weighting coefficients fed back from different transmission layers is mathematically transformed, such as normalization processing, to obtain the frequency domain unit
  • the precoding matrix may be determined by the precoding vectors on one or more transmission layers corresponding to the same frequency domain unit. This application does not limit the mathematical transformation relationship between the precoding matrix and the precoding vector.
  • the precoding vector may refer to the precoding matrix.
  • the precoding vector may refer to a component of the precoding matrix on one transmission layer, or it may be a vector obtained by mathematical transformation of the component of the precoding matrix on a transmission layer. It should be understood that the precoding vector obtained by mathematically transforming the components of the precoding matrix on a transmission layer is only described to facilitate the description of the relationship between the precoding matrix and the precoding vector, and the network equipment and terminal equipment in this application should not determine the precoding vector.
  • the process of encoding the matrix constitutes any limitation.
  • Spatial domain vector or beam vector.
  • Each element in the spatial vector may represent the weight of each antenna port (antenna port). Based on the weight of each antenna port represented by each element in the space vector, the signals of each antenna port are linearly superimposed to form an area with a strong signal in a certain direction in space.
  • the antenna port may also be referred to as a port.
  • the antenna port can be understood as a transmitting antenna recognized by the receiving device, or a transmitting antenna that can be distinguished in space.
  • one antenna port can be pre-configured.
  • Each virtual antenna can be a weighted combination of multiple physical antennas.
  • Each antenna port can correspond to a reference signal. Therefore, each antenna port can be called a reference signal.
  • Ports for example, CSI-RS ports, sounding reference signal (sounding reference signal, SRS) ports, etc.
  • the reference signal may be a reference signal that has not been precoded, or a reference signal that has been precoded, which is not limited in this application.
  • the reference signal port may be a transmitting antenna port.
  • the transmitting antenna port may refer to an independent transceiver unit (transceiver unit, TxRU).
  • the reference signal port may be a port after dimensionality reduction is performed on the transmitting antenna port.
  • One reference signal port can correspond to one precoding vector.
  • the length of the space vector u may be the number of transmitting antenna ports N s in a polarization direction, and N s ⁇ 1 and an integer.
  • the spatial vector can be, for example, a column vector or a row vector with a length of N s . This application does not limit this.
  • the spatial vector is taken from a discrete Fourier transform (Discrete Fourier Transform, DFT) matrix.
  • DFT discrete Fourier Transform
  • Each column vector in the DFT matrix can be called a DFT vector.
  • the spatial vector can be a DFT vector.
  • the spatial vector may be, for example, a two-dimensional (2 dimensions, 2D)-discrete Fourier Transform (DFT) defined in a type II (type II) codebook in the NR protocol TS 38.214 version 15 (release 15, R15). ) Vector or oversampled 2D-DFT vector v l,m .
  • DFT discrete Fourier Transform
  • the spatial vector is one of the vectors used to construct the precoding vector.
  • Airspace vector set It can include a variety of airspace vectors of different lengths to correspond to different numbers of antenna ports.
  • the spatial vector used to construct the precoding vector may be determined from the set of spatial vectors.
  • the spatial vector set includes multiple candidate spatial vectors that can be used to construct a precoding vector.
  • the set of airspace vectors may include N s airspace vectors, and the N s airspace vectors may be orthogonal to each other.
  • Each spatial vector in the set of spatial vectors can be taken from a 2D-DFT matrix.
  • the N s airspace vectors can be denoted as The N s spatial vectors can construct a matrix B s ,
  • the set of spatial vectors can be expanded into O s ⁇ N s spatial vectors by an oversampling factor O s .
  • the set of airspace vectors may include O s subsets, and each subset may include N s airspace vectors.
  • the N s spatial vectors in each subset can be orthogonal to each other.
  • Each spatial vector in the set of spatial vectors can be taken from an oversampled 2D-DFT matrix.
  • the N s space vectors in the o s (1 ⁇ o s ⁇ O s and o s is an integer) subset of the set of space vectors can be denoted as Then the matrix can be constructed based on the N s spatial vectors in the o sth subset
  • each spatial vector in the spatial vector set can be taken from a 2D-DFT matrix or an oversampled 2D-DFT matrix.
  • Each column vector in the set of spatial vectors can be referred to as a 2D-DFT vector or an oversampled 2D-DFT vector.
  • the spatial vector can be a 2D-DFT vector or an oversampled 2D-DFT vector.
  • Frequency domain vector (frequency domain vector): a vector that can be used to represent the changing law of the channel in the frequency domain. Each frequency domain vector can represent a change law. Since the signal is transmitted through the wireless channel, it can reach the receiving antenna through multiple paths from the transmitting antenna. Multipath time delay causes frequency selective fading, which is the change of frequency domain channel. Therefore, different frequency domain vectors can be used to represent the changing law of channels in the frequency domain caused by delays on different transmission paths.
  • the frequency domain vector may be used to construct a combination of multiple space domain vectors and frequency domain vectors, or simply a space-frequency vector pair, with the above-mentioned spatial domain vector to construct a precoding vector.
  • the frequency domain vector is denoted as v.
  • the length of the frequency domain vector can be denoted as N 3 , N 3 ⁇ 1, and it is an integer.
  • Frequency domain vector set It can include a variety of frequency domain vectors of different lengths.
  • the frequency domain vector used to construct the precoding vector may be determined from the frequency domain vector set.
  • the frequency domain vector set includes multiple candidate frequency domain vectors that can be used to construct a precoding vector.
  • the frequency domain vector set may include N 3 frequency domain vectors.
  • the N 3 frequency domain vectors may be orthogonal to each other.
  • Each frequency domain vector in the frequency domain vector set can be taken from a DFT matrix or an inverse discrete Fourier transform (Inverse Discrete Fourier Transform, IDFT) matrix.
  • IDFT inverse discrete Fourier transform
  • the N f frequency domain vectors can be denoted as The N f frequency domain vectors can construct a matrix B f ,
  • the frequency-domain vector set can be extended over-sampling factor of O f O f ⁇ N 3 frequency-domain vectors.
  • the frequency-domain vector set may comprise O f subsets, each subset may include a frequency-domain vector N 3.
  • the N 3 frequency domain vectors in each subset may be orthogonal to each other.
  • Each subset can be called an orthogonal group.
  • Each frequency domain vector in the frequency domain vector set can be taken from an oversampled DFT matrix.
  • the oversampling factor O f is a positive integer.
  • the N 3 frequency domain vectors in the o f ( 1 ⁇ o f ⁇ O f and o f is an integer) subset of the frequency domain vector set can be denoted as Then the matrix can be constructed based on the N 3 frequency domain vectors in the o fth subset
  • each frequency domain vector in the frequency domain vector set can be taken from the DFT matrix or the oversampled DFT matrix, or from the IDFT matrix or the oversampled IDFT matrix.
  • each column vector in the frequency domain vector set may be referred to as a DFT vector or an oversampled DFT vector, or an IDFT vector or an oversampled IDFT vector.
  • the frequency domain vector can be a DFT vector or an oversampled DFT vector, or an IDFT vector or an oversampled IDFT vector.
  • a space-frequency component matrix can be determined through a space-domain vector and a frequency-domain vector.
  • a space-frequency component matrix may be determined by, for example, a conjugate transpose of a space-domain vector and a frequency-domain vector, such as u ⁇ v H , and its dimension may be N s ⁇ N 3 .
  • the space-frequency component matrix may be an expression form of a space-frequency basic unit determined by a space-domain vector and a frequency-domain vector.
  • the basic unit of space-frequency can also be expressed as a space-frequency component vector, for example, the space-frequency component vector can be determined by the Kronecker product of a space-domain vector and a frequency-domain vector; The space frequency vector is equal.
  • This application does not limit the specific manifestation of the basic air frequency unit. Those skilled in the art are based on the same concept, and various possible forms determined by a spatial domain vector and a frequency domain vector should fall within the protection scope of this application.
  • the operation relationship between the space-frequency component matrix and the space-domain vector and frequency-domain vector may also be different. This application does not limit the operational relationship between the space-frequency component matrix, the space-domain vector, and the frequency-domain vector.
  • Space frequency matrix It can be understood as an intermediate quantity used to determine the precoding matrix corresponding to each frequency domain unit.
  • the space-frequency matrix can be determined by the precoding matrix or the channel matrix corresponding to each frequency domain unit.
  • the space-frequency matrix may be obtained by the weighted sum of multiple space-frequency component matrices, so as to recover the downlink channel or precoding matrix.
  • the space frequency matrix can be denoted as H, Where w 1 to Is N 3 column vectors corresponding to N 3 frequency domain units, each column vector may be a precoding matrix corresponding to each frequency domain unit, and the length of each column vector may be N s .
  • the N 3 column vectors respectively correspond to precoding vectors of N 3 frequency domain units. That is, the space-frequency matrix can be regarded as a joint matrix formed by combining the precoding vectors corresponding to N 3 frequency domain units.
  • the space frequency matrix may correspond to the transmission layer.
  • the precoding vector of each frequency domain unit on the same transmission layer can construct the space-frequency matrix corresponding to the transmission layer.
  • the precoding vector of each frequency domain unit on the z-th transmission layer can be used to construct the space-frequency matrix corresponding to the z-th transmission layer.
  • the space-frequency matrix corresponding to the transmission layer is simply referred to as the space-frequency matrix of the transmission layer.
  • the space-frequency matrix is only an expression form used to determine the intermediate quantity of the precoding matrix, and should not constitute any limitation in this application.
  • a vector of length N s ⁇ N 3 can also be obtained, which can be called Space frequency vector.
  • the dimensions of the space-frequency matrix and the space-frequency vector shown above are only examples, and should not constitute any limitation to this application.
  • the space-frequency matrix may also be a matrix with a dimension of N 3 ⁇ N s .
  • each row vector may correspond to a frequency domain unit for determining the precoding vector of the corresponding frequency domain unit.
  • the dimension of the space-frequency matrix can be further expanded.
  • the dimension of the space-frequency matrix can be 2N s ⁇ N 3 or N 3 ⁇ 2N s . It should be understood that this application does not limit the number of polarization directions of the transmitting antenna.
  • Dual-domain compression It can include compression in the two dimensions of space-domain compression and frequency-domain compression.
  • Spatial compression may specifically refer to selecting one or more spatial vectors from the set of spatial vectors as the vector for constructing the precoding vector.
  • Frequency domain compression may refer to selecting one or more frequency domain vectors from a set of frequency domain vectors as a vector for constructing a precoding vector.
  • the matrix constructed by a spatial domain vector and a frequency domain vector may be called a spatial frequency component matrix, for example.
  • the selected one or more spatial vectors and one or more frequency domain vectors can construct one or more spatial frequency component matrices.
  • the weighted sum of the one or more space-frequency component matrices can be used to construct a space-frequency matrix corresponding to one transmission layer.
  • the space-frequency matrix can be approximated as a weighted sum of the space-frequency component matrix constructed from the selected one or more space-domain vectors and one or more frequency-domain vectors. Based on the space-frequency matrix corresponding to a transmission layer, the precoding vector corresponding to each frequency domain unit on the transmission layer can be determined.
  • the selected one or more spatial vectors can form a matrix W 1 , where each column vector in W 1 corresponds to a selected spatial vector.
  • the selected one or more frequency domain vectors may form a matrix W 3 , where each column vector in W 3 corresponds to a selected frequency domain vector.
  • L z space vectors can be selected for each polarization direction, and the dimension of W 1 can be 2N s ⁇ 2L z .
  • the dimension of W 3 H can be M z ⁇ N 3 .
  • Each column vector in W 3 can be a frequency domain vector.
  • each space vector in W 1 and each frequency vector in W 3 can form a space-frequency vector pair, and each space-frequency vector pair can correspond to a weighting coefficient, so there are 2L z space-domain vectors and M z
  • the 2L z ⁇ M z space-frequency vector pairs constructed by the two frequency domain vectors can correspond to the 2L z ⁇ M z weighting coefficients one-to-one.
  • the C is a coefficient matrix composed of the 2L z ⁇ M z weighting coefficients, and the dimension may be 2L z ⁇ M z .
  • the lth row in the coefficient matrix C may correspond to the lth spatial vector in the first polarization direction in the 2L z spatial vectors, and the L z +lth row in the coefficient matrix C may correspond to the 2L z spatial vectors The l-th spatial vector in the second polarization direction.
  • the m-th column in the coefficient matrix C may correspond to the m-th frequency-domain vector among the M z frequency-domain vectors.
  • the Z transmission layers may use their own independent spatial vectors.
  • the airspace vectors reported by the terminal device for the Z transmission layers may include the sum of the airspace vectors reported separately for each transmission layer. In this case, assuming that the number of airspace vectors reported by the terminal device for Z transport layers is L, then
  • the Z transmission layers may use their own independent frequency domain vectors, and the frequency domain vectors reported by the terminal device for the Z transmission layers may include the sum of frequency domain vectors respectively reported for each transmission layer.
  • the number of frequency domain vectors reported by the terminal device for Z transmission layers is M, then
  • Z transmission layers can share L spatial vectors.
  • the L spatial vectors reported by the terminal device can be used to construct the precoding vector of each frequency domain unit on any one of the Z transmission layers.
  • Z transmission layers may share M frequency domain vectors.
  • the M frequency domain vectors reported by the terminal device can be used to construct the precoding vector of each frequency domain unit on any one of the Z transmission layers.
  • the Z transmission layers can also be divided into multiple transmission layer groups, and one or more transmission layers in the same transmission layer group can share the space vector and/or frequency domain vector, and the transmission layers from different transmission layer groups Each independent spatial vector and/or frequency domain vector can be used.
  • the space-frequency matrix H and W 1 and W 3 shown above is only an example, and should not constitute any limitation to the application. Based on the same concept, those skilled in the art can perform mathematical transformations on the above-mentioned relationship to obtain other calculation formulas for representing the relationship between the space-frequency matrix H and W 1 , W 3 .
  • the terminal device can feed back the selected one or more spatial vectors and one or more frequency domain vectors to the network device during feedback, instead of being based on Each frequency domain unit (such as a subband) feeds back the weighting coefficient (such as amplitude and phase) of the subband respectively. Therefore, the feedback overhead can be greatly reduced.
  • the frequency domain vector can represent the change rule of the channel in the frequency
  • the linear superposition of one or more frequency domain vectors is used to simulate the channel change in the frequency domain. Therefore, a high feedback accuracy can still be maintained, so that the precoding matrix recovered by the network device based on the feedback of the terminal device can still better adapt to the channel.
  • the specific process for the terminal device to determine the PMI is the internal implementation behavior of the terminal device, and this application does not limit the specific process for the terminal device to determine the PMI.
  • the specific process for the network device to determine the precoding matrix according to the PMI is an internal implementation behavior of the network device, and this application does not limit the specific process for the network device to determine the precoding matrix according to the PMI.
  • the terminal device and the network device can use different algorithms to generate PMI and restore the precoding matrix.
  • weighting coefficients can also be called space-frequency combination coefficients, combination coefficients, etc.
  • Each weighting coefficient may correspond to a space vector and a frequency vector selected for constructing a precoding vector, or, in other words, a matrix of space-frequency components, or a pair of space-frequency vectors.
  • the weighting coefficient can be used to express the weight of the space-frequency component matrix constructed by constructing the precoding vector to a space-domain vector and a frequency-domain vector.
  • Each weighting factor can include amplitude and phase.
  • a is the amplitude and ⁇ is the phase.
  • each space-frequency vector pair may correspond to a weighting coefficient.
  • the amplitude (or amplitude) of some weighting coefficients may be zero or close to zero, and the corresponding quantized value may be zero.
  • the weighting coefficient that quantizes the amplitude by the quantization value of zero can be referred to as the weighting coefficient of zero amplitude.
  • some weighting coefficients have larger amplitudes, and their corresponding quantized values are not zero.
  • the weighting coefficient that quantizes the amplitude by the non-zero quantization value can be called the weighting coefficient of non-zero amplitude.
  • the multiple weighting coefficients corresponding to the multiple space-frequency vector pairs may be composed of one or more weighting coefficients with non-zero amplitude and one or more weighting coefficients with zero amplitude.
  • Transport layer It can also be referred to as a spatial layer, layer, transport stream, spatial stream, stream, etc.
  • the number of transmission layers used for data transmission between the network device and the terminal device may be determined by the rank of the channel matrix.
  • the terminal equipment can determine the number of transmission layers according to the channel matrix obtained by channel estimation.
  • the precoding matrix can be determined by performing singular value decomposition (SVD) on the channel matrix or the covariance matrix of the channel matrix. In the SVD process, different transmission layers can be distinguished according to the size of the characteristic value.
  • SVD singular value decomposition
  • the precoding vector determined by the eigenvector corresponding to the largest eigenvalue can be corresponding to the first transmission layer, and the precoding vector determined by the eigenvector corresponding to the smallest eigenvalue can be transmitted to the Zth transmission layer.
  • Layer correspondence That is, the eigenvalues corresponding to the first transmission layer to the Zth transmission layer decrease sequentially.
  • the CSI report reported by the terminal device to the network device may not contain all the information determined based on the channel measurement to construct the precoding matrix.
  • the physical uplink resources pre-allocated by the network device for the terminal device are insufficient to transmit all the information determined by the terminal device for constructing the precoding matrix.
  • how to indicate the number of weighting coefficients in the CSI report is not yet clear. If the definition of the indication of the number of weighting coefficients in the CSI report is not clear, it may cause the network device to make an error in the cost estimation of the second part of the CSI report, and thus cannot correctly decode the second part of the CSI report. Therefore, the network equipment may not be able to accurately obtain the information in the CSI report, and the precoding matrix used for data transmission determined during the downlink transmission may not be well adapted to the downlink channel, resulting in system transmission performance decline.
  • the number of weighting coefficients pre-configured by the network equipment for the terminal equipment to be reported is 20, and the number of weighting coefficients with non-zero amplitudes to be reported determined by the terminal equipment based on channel measurement is 18.
  • the number of weighting coefficients with a non-zero amplitude actually reported through the CSI report may be 15. If the network device estimates the length of the second part of the CSI report based on 18 weighting coefficients, the estimation of the length of the second part of the CSI report is not accurate.
  • the network device may not know whether the terminal device has discarded part of the non-zero amplitude The weighting factor.
  • the discarding of the weighting coefficient by the terminal device may be caused by insufficient physical uplink resources pre-allocated by the network device. If the network device cannot know whether the terminal device discards the weighting coefficient, it does not know whether the pre-allocated physical uplink resources are sufficient. In the subsequent multiple channel measurements, the terminal device may still be unable to obtain sufficient physical uplink resources to transmit the CSI report. This severely reduces the feedback accuracy and is detrimental to the transmission performance of the system.
  • this application provides a method for indicating coefficients for constructing a precoding matrix, and clearly defines how to indicate the number of weighting coefficients in a CSI report, so that the network device can accurately estimate the cost of the second part of the CSI report, so that the CSI The report is decoded correctly.
  • K 0 The number of weighting coefficients reported by the network equipment pre-configured for the terminal equipment, in other words, the maximum number of weighting coefficients reported by the terminal equipment, and K 0 is a positive integer.
  • K 1 The number of weighting coefficients reported by the terminal device to the network device through the CSI report, K 1 ⁇ K 0 , and K 1 is a positive integer. It can be understood that, in order to save overhead, the terminal device may only report the weighting coefficient with a non-zero amplitude to the network device, instead of reporting the weighting coefficient with a zero amplitude. Therefore, the K 1 weighting coefficients reported by the terminal device through the CSI report are all weighting coefficients with a non-zero amplitude.
  • K 2 The number of weighting coefficients with non-zero amplitude among the weighting coefficients determined by the terminal equipment based on the number of reported weighting coefficients K 0 pre-configured by the channel measurement and network equipment, K 1 ⁇ K 2 ⁇ K 0 , and K 2 Is a positive integer.
  • N s the number of transmitting antenna ports, N s is a positive integer.
  • N 3 the length of the frequency domain vector, N 3 is a positive integer.
  • L The number of airspace vectors reported by the terminal device, L is a positive integer.
  • multiple (such as Z) transmission layers can share L airspace vectors, so the number L of airspace vectors reported by the terminal device is the number of airspace vectors shared by multiple transmission layers. It should be noted that the L airspace vectors may be different from each other.
  • M The total number of frequency domain vectors reported by the terminal device, M is a positive integer.
  • multiple (such as Z) transmission layers may use independent frequency domain vectors respectively.
  • the zth (1 ⁇ z ⁇ Z, z is an integer) transmission layer in the Z transmission layers can use M z frequency domain vectors, so the total number of frequency domain vectors M reported by the terminal device can be The total number of frequency domain vectors reported by multiple transport layers, that is,
  • Z The number of transmission layers, which can be determined by the rank of the channel matrix, and Z is a positive integer.
  • z Corresponds to Z, can take a value in the range of 1 to Z, z is an integer.
  • serial numbers can be started from 1.
  • the Z transmission layers may include the first transmission layer to the Zth transmission layer, and so on, which will not be illustrated one by one here.
  • the specific implementation is not limited to this, for example, the serial number may also start from 0.
  • used to indicate may include used for direct indication and used for indirect indication.
  • the indication information may directly indicate I or indirectly indicate I, but it does not mean that I must be carried in the indication information.
  • the information indicated by the instruction information is called the information to be indicated.
  • the information to be indicated can be directly indicated, such as the information to be indicated or the information to be indicated. Indicates the index of the information, etc.
  • the information to be indicated can also be indicated indirectly by indicating other information, where there is an association relationship between the other information and the information to be indicated. It is also possible to indicate only a part of the information to be indicated, and other parts of the information to be indicated are known or agreed in advance. For example, it is also possible to realize the indication of specific information by means of the pre-arranged order (for example, stipulated in the agreement) of various information, thereby reducing the indication overhead to a certain extent.
  • the precoding matrix is composed of precoding vectors, and each precoding vector in the precoding matrix may have the same parts in terms of composition or other attributes.
  • the specific indication manner may also be various existing indication manners, such as, but not limited to, the foregoing indication manner and various combinations thereof.
  • the specific details of the various indication modes can be referred to the prior art, which will not be repeated here. It can be seen from the above that, for example, when multiple pieces of information of the same type need to be indicated, a situation where different information is indicated in different ways may occur.
  • the required instruction method can be selected according to specific needs.
  • the embodiment of the application does not limit the selected instruction method.
  • the instruction method involved in the embodiment of the application should be understood as covering the instructions to be Various methods for obtaining information to be indicated.
  • a row vector can be expressed as a column vector
  • a matrix can be expressed by the transposed matrix of the matrix
  • a matrix can also be expressed in the form of a vector or an array. It can be formed by connecting each row vector or column vector of the matrix, and the Kronecker product of two vectors can also be expressed in the form of the product of one vector and the transposed vector of another vector.
  • the information to be instructed can be sent together as a whole, or divided into multiple sub-information to be sent separately, and the sending period and/or sending timing of these sub-information can be the same or different.
  • the specific sending method is not limited in this application.
  • the sending period and/or sending timing of these sub-information may be pre-defined, for example, pre-defined according to a protocol, or configured by the transmitting end device by sending configuration information to the receiving end device.
  • the configuration information may include, but is not limited to, radio resource control signaling, such as RRC signaling, MAC layer signaling, such as MAC-CE signaling and physical layer signaling, such as downlink control information (DCI) One or a combination of at least two of them.
  • radio resource control signaling such as RRC signaling
  • MAC layer signaling such as MAC-CE signaling
  • DCI downlink control information
  • the first, second, and various numerical numbers are only for easy distinction for description, and are not used to limit the scope of the embodiments of the present application. For example, distinguish different indication information, different indication fields, etc.
  • pre-defined or “pre-configured” can be implemented by pre-saving corresponding codes, tables or other methods that can be used to indicate relevant information in the device (for example, including terminal devices and network devices).
  • the specific implementation method is not limited.
  • saving may refer to saving in one or more memories.
  • the one or more memories may be provided separately, or integrated in an encoder or decoder, a processor, or a communication device.
  • the one or more memories may also be partly provided separately, and partly integrated in the decoder, processor, or communication device.
  • the type of the memory can be any form of storage medium, which is not limited in this application.
  • the “protocols” involved in the embodiments of the present application may refer to standard protocols in the communication field, for example, may include LTE protocol, NR protocol, and related protocols applied to future communication systems, which are not limited in this application.
  • At least one refers to one or more, and “multiple” refers to two or more.
  • And/or describes the association relationship of the associated objects, indicating that there can be three relationships, for example, A and/or B, which can mean: A alone exists, both A and B exist, and B exists alone, where A, B can be singular or plural.
  • the character “/” generally indicates that the associated objects are in an "or” relationship.
  • "The following at least one item (a)” or similar expressions refers to any combination of these items, including any combination of a single item (a) or plural items (a).
  • At least one of a, b, and c can mean: a, or, b, or, c, or, a and b, or, a and c, or, b and c, or, a , B, and c.
  • a, b, and c can be single or multiple.
  • the method provided in the embodiments of the present application can be applied to a system that communicates through multiple antenna technology.
  • the communication system may include at least one network device and at least one terminal device.
  • Multi-antenna technology can be used to communicate between network equipment and terminal equipment.
  • the method provided in the embodiments of the present application is not limited to the communication between the network device and the terminal device, and can also be applied to the communication between the terminal device and the terminal device.
  • the application does not limit the application scenarios of the method. In the embodiments shown below, only for ease of understanding and description, the interaction between a network device and a terminal device is taken as an example to describe in detail the method provided in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the embodiments shown below do not particularly limit the specific structure of the execution body of the method provided by the embodiments of the present application, as long as the program that records the code of the method provided by the embodiments of the present application can be run according to the present application.
  • the method provided in the application embodiment only needs to communicate.
  • the execution subject of the method provided in the embodiment of the application may be a terminal device or a network device, or a functional module in the terminal device or network device that can call and execute the program.
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic flowchart of a coefficient indicating method 200 for constructing a precoding matrix according to an embodiment of the present application, shown from the perspective of device interaction. As shown in FIG. 2, the method 200 may include step 210 to step 250. The steps in the method 200 are described in detail below.
  • the terminal device In step 210, the terminal device generates a CSI report.
  • the CSI report includes quantization information of K 1 weighting coefficients and first indication information, and the first indication information is used to indicate whether the K 1 weighting coefficients are determined by the terminal device based on the number of pre-configured weighting coefficient reports K 0 All weighting coefficients with non-zero amplitude.
  • the CSI report may be determined by the terminal device based on the result of channel measurement.
  • the CSI report may include PMI, for example, to indicate the construction of a precoding matrix corresponding to each frequency domain unit.
  • the CSI report fed back by the terminal device based on dual-domain compression may include an indication of at least one spatial domain vector, an indication of at least one frequency domain vector, and quantization information of K 1 weighting coefficients.
  • the number of spatial vectors reported by the terminal device for all transmission layers is, for example, L (L is a positive integer), and the total number of frequency domain vectors reported by the terminal device for all transmission layers is, for example, M (M is a positive integer), then
  • L is a positive integer
  • M M is a positive integer
  • the total number of weighting coefficients K 1 reported by the terminal equipment for all transmission layers can satisfy: K 1 ⁇ L ⁇ M
  • the L space vectors are If the two polarization directions are shared, the number of weighting coefficients K 1 reported by the terminal device can satisfy: K 1 ⁇ 2L ⁇ M.
  • the number K 1 of weighting coefficients reported by the terminal device may satisfy: K 1 ⁇ 2L ⁇ M.
  • the method further includes: step 220, the network device sends second indication information, where the second indication information is used to indicate the number K 0 of weighting coefficients configured for the terminal device to be reported.
  • the terminal device receives the second indication information.
  • the number of weighting coefficient reports pre-configured by the network equipment for the terminal equipment is the maximum number of weighting coefficients reported by the terminal equipment. Therefore, the number K 1 of weighting coefficients actually reported by the terminal device is less than or equal to the pre-configured number K 0 of weighting coefficients to be reported.
  • is a pre-configured coefficient, 0 ⁇ 1.
  • the value of ⁇ may be 1/2, 1/4, 3/4, etc., for example. This application does not limit this. It can be seen that K 0 ⁇ 2L ⁇ M. Therefore, K 1 ⁇ K 0 ⁇ 2L ⁇ M.
  • the terminal device may include a weighting coefficient with a zero amplitude and a weighting coefficient with a non-zero amplitude.
  • the terminal device may not report the weighting coefficients with a zero amplitude, but only report the weighting coefficients with a non-zero amplitude.
  • the number of weighting coefficients with non-zero amplitude among the 2L ⁇ M weighting coefficients determined by the terminal device may be greater than K 0 , or may be less than or equal to K 0 .
  • the terminal device may determine the K 0 weighting coefficients to be reported from the 2L ⁇ M weighting coefficients. For example, the terminal device may discard part of the weighting coefficients in the weighting coefficients of the Z-th transmission layer, so that the total number of weighting coefficients with a non-zero amplitude determined is less than or equal to K 0 . If the number of weighting coefficients with non-zero amplitude among the 2L ⁇ M weighting coefficients determined by the terminal device is less than or equal to K 0 , the terminal device may report all weighting coefficients with non-zero amplitude.
  • the number of weighting coefficients with a non-zero amplitude determined by the terminal device based on the channel measurement and the number of pre-configured weighting coefficient reports K 0 is less than or equal to K 0 .
  • the number of weighting coefficients with non-zero amplitude determined by the terminal equipment based on the channel measurement and the number of pre-configured weighting coefficient reports K 0 is denoted as K 2 , K 2 ⁇ K 0 , and K 2 is Positive integer.
  • the method for the terminal device to discard some of the weighting coefficients of the Z-th transmission layer is only an example. This application deals with the specific processing method of the terminal device when the total number of weighting coefficients with a non-zero amplitude is greater than K 0 Not limited.
  • the K 2 non-zero weighting coefficients determined by the terminal device may not all be reported to the network device through the CSI report.
  • the terminal device may only report part of the K 2 weighting coefficients.
  • the number of weighting coefficients reported by the terminal equipment through the CSI report is K 1
  • the K 1 weighting coefficients reported by the terminal equipment through the CSI report may be part or all of the K 2 weighting coefficients with non-zero amplitude. . That is, K 1 ⁇ K 2 . If K 1 ⁇ K 2 , it can be considered that the terminal device discards a part of the weighting coefficients with non-zero amplitude.
  • K 1 may represent the number of weighting coefficients after discarding
  • K 2 may represent the number of weighting coefficients before discarding.
  • the terminal device discards a part of the weighting coefficient with a non-zero amplitude.
  • the physical uplink resources allocated by the network device for the terminal device in advance for transmitting the CSI report are insufficient.
  • the network equipment may incorrectly estimate the rank of the channel. For example, if the estimated channel rank of the network equipment is 2, the physical uplink resources allocated to the terminal equipment are allocated based on the rank 2. However, the rank determined by the terminal device based on channel measurement is 3. In this case, the physical uplink resources pre-allocated by the network device may not be able to report all the information of the CSI determined by the terminal device based on the channel measurement to the network device.
  • the spatial vector and the frequency domain vector have a higher priority, and the terminal device does not want to discard the indication of the spatial vector and the frequency domain vector.
  • the terminal device may discard a part of the weighting coefficients of the determined non-zero amplitude to generate a CSI report whose bit overhead is less than or equal to the bit overhead that the physical uplink resource pre-allocated by the network device can carry.
  • the amplitude of some weighting coefficients may be much smaller than the amplitude of the other part of the weighting coefficients. That said, the effect may not be significant.
  • the network device does not know whether the terminal device discards part of the weighting coefficients with a non-zero magnitude when reporting the CSI report.
  • the network device can know whether the CSI report reported by the terminal device has discarded a part of the weighting coefficient with a non-zero amplitude, it is often beneficial. For example, if the terminal device discards a part of the weighting coefficient due to insufficient pre-allocated physical uplink resources, the network device can allocate more physical uplink resources that can be used to transmit CSI reports for the terminal device in the next scheduling.
  • the terminal device can carry the first indication information in the CSI report to indicate whether the K 1 weighting coefficients reported by the CSI report are all weighting coefficients with non-zero amplitudes determined by the terminal device based on channel measurement, as described above K 2 weighting coefficients mentioned above.
  • the first indication information can be used to indicate whether the K 1 weighting coefficients are all of the K 2 weighting coefficients.
  • the first indication information may be used to indicate whether K 1 is equal to K 2 .
  • the terminal device can indicate whether the K 1 weighting coefficients are all weighting coefficients with non-zero amplitudes determined by the terminal device based on channel measurement in many different ways. Hereinafter, in conjunction with specific embodiments, it will be described in detail how the terminal device indicates through the first indication information whether the K 1 weighting coefficients are all weighting coefficients with non-zero amplitude determined by the terminal device based on channel measurement. The details of the specific process are omitted here. description.
  • the terminal device may perform channel measurement based on the received reference signal, such as CSI-RS, to determine the spatial vector, frequency vector, and weighting coefficient used to construct the precoding matrix of each frequency domain unit.
  • the received reference signal such as CSI-RS
  • the terminal device can estimate the channel matrix based on the reference signal, by performing singular value decomposition on the channel matrix or the covariance matrix of the channel matrix, or by performing eigenvalue decomposition on the covariance matrix of the channel matrix. Way to determine the precoding vector of each frequency domain unit on each transmission layer. It should be understood that the specific method for determining the precoding vector based on the channel measurement can refer to the prior art. For brevity, a detailed description of the specific process is omitted here.
  • the terminal device can construct a space-frequency matrix corresponding to each transmission layer according to the precoding vector of each frequency domain unit on each transmission layer, and can determine at least one to be reported by performing spatial and frequency domain DFT on the space-frequency matrix
  • the spatial vector, at least one frequency domain vector, and at least one weighting coefficient corresponding to the at least one pair of the spatial frequency vector can construct a space-frequency matrix corresponding to each transmission layer according to the precoding vector of each frequency domain unit on each transmission layer, and can determine at least one to be reported by performing spatial and frequency domain DFT on the space-frequency matrix
  • the Z transmission layers may use their own independent airspace vectors, and the terminal device based on the L airspace vectors reported by the Z transmission layers may include, for example, the sum of the airspace vectors separately reported for each transmission layer. .
  • the Z transmission layers may use their own independent frequency domain vectors
  • the M frequency domain vectors reported by the terminal device based on the Z transmission layers may include, for example, the sum of frequency domain vectors separately reported for each transmission layer.
  • the Z transmission layers may also share L spatial vectors.
  • the terminal device can perform spatial DFT based on the spatial frequency matrix of the Z transmission layers to determine the stronger L spatial vectors.
  • the Z transmission layers can also share M frequency domain vectors.
  • the terminal device can perform frequency domain DFT based on the space-frequency matrix of the Z transmission layers to determine the stronger M frequency domain vectors.
  • the Z transmission layers can also be divided into multiple transmission layer groups, and one or more transmission layers in the same transmission layer group can share the space vector and/or frequency domain vector, and the transmission layers from different transmission layer groups Each independent spatial vector and/or frequency domain vector can be used.
  • the terminal device may perform spatial DFT based on the space-frequency matrix of one or more transmission layers in the same transmission layer group to determine at least one stronger spatial vector.
  • the at least one airspace vector may be part of the airspace vector in the L airspace vectors reported by the terminal device.
  • the terminal device can feed back M z frequency domain vectors and the corresponding weighting coefficients of some or all of the 2L ⁇ M z space frequency vector pairs.
  • 2L ⁇ M z space-frequency vector pairs represent the total number of space-frequency vectors in two polarization directions.
  • the terminal device can determine the L space vectors based on the space frequency matrix of one of the Z transmission layers. For example, the terminal device can determine the L space vectors based on the Z transmission layers.
  • the space frequency matrix of the first transmission layer in the transmission layer determines the L space vectors; the terminal device may also determine the L space vectors based on the space frequency matrix of each of the Z transmission layers.
  • the terminal device may perform spatial DFT on the space-frequency matrix of each of the Z transmission layers to determine the stronger L spatial vectors.
  • H z represents the space-frequency matrix of the z-th transmission layer.
  • the dimension of the space-frequency matrix can be 2N s ⁇ N 3 .
  • the H z can be a space-frequency matrix in each of the two polarization directions, with a dimension of N s ⁇ N 3 ; it can also be a space-frequency matrix with two polarization directions, with a dimension of 2N s ⁇ N 3 . This application does not limit this.
  • U s represents a matrix constructed from a plurality of (such as N s ) space vectors in a set of predefined space vectors.
  • N s space vectors
  • U s airspace substrate For convenience of distinction and instructions for performing a plurality of spatial DFT to determine a spatial vector construction spatial precoding matrix vector construct called matrix U s airspace substrate.
  • U s can be, for example, the previously defined set of spatial vectors B s that has not been oversampled or a subset of the set of spatial vectors that have been oversampled, such as Its dimension can be N s ⁇ N s to correspond to the space-frequency matrix in a polarization direction; or, it can be defined by the set of space vectors B s or Determine, such as the airspace vector set B s or Spliced together, such as or The dimension may be 2N s ⁇ 2N s to correspond to the space frequency matrix in the two polarization directions.
  • C' represents the coefficient matrix obtained by spatial DFT, and the dimension can be L ⁇ N s , or 2L ⁇ 2N s .
  • 2Z coefficient matrices with dimensions of L ⁇ N s or Z coefficient matrices with dimensions of 2L ⁇ 2N s obtained from spatial DFT can be obtained.
  • the 2Z coefficient matrices with dimensions of L ⁇ N s include Z coefficient matrices corresponding to each of the two polarization directions.
  • the terminal device may determine the stronger L spatial vectors based on multiple coefficient matrices in one polarization direction, or may determine the stronger L spatial vectors based on multiple coefficient matrices in two polarization directions.
  • the stronger L space vectors may be space vectors shared by Z transmission layers and two polarization directions.
  • the terminal device may determine the L rows with a larger sum of squares of the modulus according to the sum of the squares of the elements in each row of the coefficient matrix in the same polarization direction.
  • the sequence numbers of the L rows where the square sum of the modulus determined by the Z coefficient matrices is larger may be the sequence numbers of the L columns in the spatial base, and thus the L spatial vectors can be determined.
  • the M z frequency domain vectors reported by the terminal device for the z-th transmission layer may be determined based on the space-frequency matrix of the z-th transmission layer.
  • the dimension of the coefficient matrix C thus obtained can be 2L ⁇ M z .
  • C represents the coefficient matrix obtained by spatial and frequency domain DFT.
  • U f represents a matrix constructed from a plurality of (for example, N 3 ) spatial vectors in a predefined frequency domain vector set, and its dimension may be N 3 ⁇ N 3 .
  • U f can be, for example, a subset of the previously defined set of spatial vectors B f without oversampling or the set of spatial vectors after oversampling, such as
  • the matrix U f used to perform frequency domain DFT to determine the multiple frequency domain vectors used to construct the precoding matrix is referred to as a frequency domain base.
  • the terminal device can determine the stronger M z columns from the coefficient matrix C. For example, the terminal device may determine the M z columns with a larger sum of squares of the modulus according to the magnitude of the sum of squares of the elements of each column in the coefficient matrix C.
  • the stronger M z columns in the coefficient matrix C can be used to determine the selected M z frequency domain vectors in the frequency domain base.
  • the stronger the coefficient matrix C M z may be a number of columns in a frequency domain base selected M z number of column vectors, thereby determining the frequency-domain vector M z.
  • the coefficient matrix C can further determine the weighting coefficient corresponding to each pair of space-frequency vectors.
  • the lth row in the coefficient matrix C can correspond to the lth spatial vector in the first polarization direction in the 2L spatial vectors
  • the L+1th row in the coefficient matrix C can correspond to the 2L spatial vectors
  • the mth column in the coefficient matrix C may correspond to the mzth frequency domain vector among the Mz frequency domain vectors.
  • the methods for determining the spatial vector, the frequency domain vector, and the weighting coefficients provided above are only examples, and should not constitute any limitation to the application.
  • the method for determining the spatial vector, the frequency domain vector and the weighting coefficient can be, for example, the same as the beam vector and its weighting coefficient in the feedback mode of the type II (type II) codebook defined in TS38.214 version 15 (release 15, R15) of the NR protocol The method of determining is the same.
  • the terminal device can also use existing estimation algorithms, such as multiple signal classification algorithm (MUSIC), Bartlett algorithm, or rotation invariant subspace algorithm (estimation of signal parameters via rotation invariant), for example. technique algorithm, ESPRIT) etc. to determine the spatial vector, frequency vector and weighting coefficients.
  • MUSIC multiple signal classification algorithm
  • Bartlett algorithm or rotation invariant subspace algorithm (estimation of signal parameters via rotation invariant)
  • technique algorithm ESPRIT
  • this application does not limit the sequence of determining the spatial vector, frequency vector,
  • each transmission layer uses its own independent frequency domain vector as an example to illustrate that the terminal device determines the spatial vector, frequency domain vector and The specific process of weighting coefficient. But this should not constitute any limitation to this application.
  • the terminal device can still determine the spatial vector, frequency domain vector, and weight in a similar manner as described above. coefficient.
  • the terminal device when the predefined spatial vector set includes multiple subsets obtained through oversampling and expansion, and/or when the predefined frequency domain vector set includes multiple subsets obtained through oversampling and expansion, the terminal device
  • the specific process of performing spatial and frequency domain DFT on the spatial frequency matrix to determine the spatial vector, frequency domain vector, and weighting coefficient is similar to this, and the specific process can refer to the prior art. For brevity, a detailed description of the specific process is omitted here.
  • the terminal device After the terminal device determines the spatial vector, frequency domain vector, and weighting coefficients used to construct the precoding matrix, it can report to the network device through the CSI report, so that the network device can restore the precoding matrix.
  • the terminal equipment among the 2L ⁇ M weighting coefficients corresponding to the 2L ⁇ M space-frequency vector pairs determined by the terminal equipment, the terminal equipment only needs to report at most K 0 weighting coefficients, and the terminal equipment actually reports the weighting coefficients The number of is K 1 , and K 1 ⁇ K 0 .
  • a terminal device When a terminal device reports K 1 weighting coefficients through a CSI report, it can be indicated by a quantized value, an index of a quantized value, or a non-quantized value.
  • This application does not limit the way of indicating weighting coefficients, as long as Just let the peer know the weighting coefficient.
  • the information used to indicate the weighting coefficient is referred to as the quantization information of the weighting coefficient.
  • the quantization information may be, for example, a quantization value, an index, or any other information that can be used to indicate a weighting coefficient.
  • the terminal device may indicate the weighting coefficient in a normalized manner. For example, the terminal device may determine the weighting coefficient with the largest modulus from the K 1 weighting coefficients (for example, recorded as the maximum weighting coefficient), and indicate the position of the largest weighting coefficient in the K 1 weighting coefficients. The terminal device may further indicate the relative value of the remaining K 1 -1 weighting coefficients with respect to the maximum weighting coefficient. The terminal device may indicate the above K 1 -1 weighting coefficients through the quantization value index of each relative value.
  • the network device and the terminal device may predefine a one-to-one correspondence between multiple quantized values and multiple indexes, and the terminal device may feed back to the network the relative value of each weighting coefficient with respect to the maximum weighting coefficient based on the one-to-one correspondence. equipment. Since the terminal device quantizes each weighting coefficient, the quantized value may be the same or similar to the real value, so it is called the quantized value of the weighting coefficient.
  • the normalization mentioned above can determine the maximum weighting coefficient in units of each polarization direction, or determine the maximum weighting coefficient among the weighting coefficients corresponding to multiple polarization directions. That is, the maximum weighting coefficient is determined in units of multiple polarization directions. This application does not limit the unit of normalization.
  • the first indication information when used to indicate the K 1 weighting coefficients, it may be indicated in a direct or indirect manner. For example, for the largest weighting coefficient, it can indicate its position in the K 1 weighting coefficients; for another example, for a weighting coefficient with a quantization value of zero, it can also indicate its position in the K 1 weighting coefficients. In other words, the first indication information does not necessarily indicate each coefficient of the K 1 weighting coefficients. As long as the network device can recover K 1 weighting coefficients according to the first indication information.
  • the terminal device when the terminal device reports the L spatial vectors and M frequency domain vectors through the first indication information, it may also report in a variety of different methods.
  • the terminal device can indicate the L space vectors through the index of the combination of the L space vectors, and can also indicate the L space vectors respectively through the respective indexes of the L space vectors.
  • the terminal device may further indicate the index of the subset to which the L spatial vectors belong through the first indication information.
  • the terminal device may indicate the frequency domain vector through the index of the combination of one or more frequency domain vectors corresponding to each transmission layer.
  • the frequency domain vector may be determined by the combination of M z frequency domain vectors.
  • M z index to indicate frequency-domain vectors; terminal device may be indicate that the frequency-domain vector M z M z by the respective frequency-domain vector index.
  • the terminal device may further indicate the index of the subset to which the M z frequency domain vectors belong through the CSI report.
  • the specific methods for the terminal device to indicate the spatial vector, the frequency domain vector, and the weighting coefficient through the CSI report listed above are only examples, and should not constitute any limitation to this application.
  • the terminal device can use the methods provided in the prior art to indicate the spatial vector, the frequency vector, and the weighting coefficient.
  • the terminal device may determine the number of weighting coefficients that can actually be reported according to the bit overhead that the physical uplink resource pre-allocated by the network device can carry.
  • the bit overhead of the first part of the CSI report can be determined in advance. Therefore, the terminal device can determine the maximum bit that can be carried in the second part of the CSI report according to the bit overhead that can be carried by the physical uplink resources pre-allocated by the network device. Overhead.
  • the bit overhead that the physical uplink resource pre-allocated by the network device for the terminal device can carry is X 0 bits
  • the bit overhead of the first part of the CSI report is X 1 bits
  • the remaining bit overhead can be used to carry the second part of the CSI report It is X 2 bits
  • X 2 X 0 -X 1
  • the terminal device determines the number of bits Q required for the second part of the CSI report by determining the number K 1 of all weighting coefficients with non-zero amplitudes determined based on the channel measurement and K 0 .
  • the terminal device may discard part of the K 1 weighting coefficients based on X 2 bits, and the overhead of the second part of the generated CSI report may be X 2 bits. It is understandable that the bit overhead required by the terminal device after discarding a part of the weighting coefficients may be less than X 2 bits, for example, X 3 bits, X 3 ⁇ X 2. In this case, the terminal device can use padding bits Way to make up. For example, a predefined value such as zero is filled after X 3 bits, or the quantization information of K 1 weighting coefficient is filled into the X 2 bits according to a predefined rule, and the QX 2 bits exceeding the X 2 bits are directly Discard etc. This application does not limit the specific method for the terminal device to generate the second part of the X 2- bit CSI report.
  • the terminal device can generate the second part of the CSI report based on the Q bits.
  • the second part of the CSI report is Q bits.
  • the number of bits Q required for the second part of the CSI report determined by the terminal device is not only determined based on K 1 weighting coefficients, and the terminal device can further combine the information carried in the second part of the CSI report.
  • Information such as the indication of the spatial vector, the indication of the frequency domain, and the position of the weighting coefficient determines the number of bits required for the second part of the CSI report. It should be understood that this application does not limit the specific content of the information contained in the second part of the CSI report. As long as the network equipment and the terminal equipment negotiate in advance the information carried in the second part of the CSI report.
  • step 230 the terminal device sends the CSI report.
  • the network device receives the CSI report.
  • the terminal device can send the CSI report to the network device through physical uplink resources, such as physical uplink share channel (PUSCH) or physical uplink control channel (PUCCH), so that the network device can use the
  • PUSCH physical uplink share channel
  • PUCCH physical uplink control channel
  • the specific method for the terminal device to send the CSI report to the network device through the physical uplink resource may be the same as the prior art. For brevity, detailed description of the specific process is omitted here.
  • step 240 the network device determines K 1 weighting coefficients and whether the K 1 weighting coefficients are all non-zero weighting coefficients determined by the terminal device based on the pre-configured weighting coefficient report number K 0 according to the CSI report .
  • the network device may decode the first part of the CSI report according to the predefined length of the first part. After parsing the first part of the CSI report, the length of the second part of the CSI report can be determined, and then the second part of the CSI report can be decoded. Therefore, the terminal device can determine K 1 weighting coefficients according to the quantization information of the weighting coefficients, and determine whether the K 1 weighting coefficients are determined by the terminal device based on the number K 0 of the weighting coefficients reported by the terminal device based on the first indication information. All weighting coefficients with non-zero amplitude.
  • the specific process for the network device to determine the K 1 weighting coefficients according to the quantization information of the weighting coefficients may refer to the prior art. For brevity, a detailed description of the specific process is omitted here. In addition, the following will describe in detail the specific embodiments of the network device according to the CSI report to determine whether the K 1 weighting coefficients are all non-zero weighting coefficients determined by the terminal device based on the pre-configured weighting coefficient report number K 0 Method, for the sake of brevity, a detailed description of the specific method is omitted here.
  • the method 200 further includes step 250.
  • the network device determines the precoding matrix of one or more frequency domain units according to the CSI report.
  • the network device can determine the spatial vector, frequency vector, and weighting coefficient reported by the terminal device based on the CSI report.
  • the specific process of the network device parsing the CSI report is similar to the specific process of the terminal device generating the CSI report. For brevity, a detailed description of the specific process is omitted here.
  • the specific process of decoding can refer to the prior art. For brevity, a detailed description of the specific process is omitted here.
  • the L space vectors reported by the terminal equipment are the space vectors shared by the Z transmission layers; the M frequency domain vectors reported by the terminal equipment are all frequency domain vectors reported for the Z transmission layers, and the M z frequency domain vectors are for The frequency domain vector reported by the z-th transmission layer; the K 1 weighting coefficients reported by the terminal device are all weighting coefficients reported for the Z transmission layers, and the K z weighting coefficients are the weighting coefficients reported for the z-th transmission layer. Then, the L spatial vectors and the M z frequency domain vectors and K z weighting coefficients reported for the z-th transmission layer can be used to construct the z-th transmission layer's spatial frequency matrix.
  • the space-frequency matrix of the z-th transmission layer may be obtained by a weighted summation of the space-frequency component matrix constructed by the L space domain vectors and the M z frequency domain vectors.
  • the precoding vector of one or more frequency domain units on the z-th transmission layer can be obtained.
  • the network device may be based on the transport layer of each first n (1 ⁇ n ⁇ N 3 and n is an integer) frequency-domain precoding vector determining unit may be constructed with the n-th unit corresponding to a frequency domain pre-coding matrix. For example, according to the order from the first transmission layer to the Zth transmission layer in the Z transmission layers, the precoding vectors corresponding to the nth frequency domain unit are arranged in sequence, and the normalization process is performed, and the nth transmission layer Precoding matrix corresponding to each frequency domain unit.
  • the above-described precoding vector corresponding to each frequency domain unit on each transmission layer is determined based on the spatial vector, frequency domain vector, and weighting coefficient indicated in the CSI report, and then the precoding corresponding to each frequency domain unit is determined
  • the matrix method is only an example, and should not constitute any limitation to this application. This application does not limit the specific method for the network device to determine the precoding matrix based on the spatial vector, the frequency vector, and the weighting coefficient.
  • the following describes in detail how the terminal device uses the first indication information to indicate whether the terminal device discards the weighting coefficient, and how the network device determines whether the terminal device discards the weighting coefficient according to the first indication information, and how the network device discards the weighting coefficient in the terminal device with reference to specific embodiments. How to estimate the length of the second part of the CSI report in the case of weighting coefficients.
  • the first indication information includes an indication of K 1 and an indication of K 2 .
  • the K 1 indication is carried in the second part of the CSI report, and the K 2 indication is carried in the first part of the CSI report.
  • the value of K 1 can be determined by a bitmap with a length of 2L ⁇ M in the second part of the CSI report.
  • Each bit in the bitmap can correspond to a space-frequency vector pair, and each bit can be used to indicate whether the corresponding space-frequency vector pair has reported a weighting coefficient, that is, whether the corresponding space-frequency vector pair is used for construction Precoding matrix. For example, when a bit in the bitmap is set to "0", it means that the weighting coefficient corresponding to the space-frequency vector pair corresponding to the bit has not been reported; when a bit in the bitmap is set to "1", It means that the weighting coefficient corresponding to the space-frequency vector pair corresponding to the bit is reported. Based on each bit in the bitmap, the network device can determine the total number of weighting coefficients K 1 actually reported by the terminal device.
  • K 2 can be passed Bits to indicate.
  • the bits can be used to indicate K 0 optional values. Since K 2 ⁇ K 0 , the The bits can be used to indicate any possible value of K 2 .
  • the value of K 2 may also be determined by the sum of the number of weighting coefficients with a non-zero amplitude determined for each of the Z transmission layers.
  • the sum of the number of weighting coefficients with non-zero amplitudes determined by the terminal equipment for each of the Z transmission layers should be less than or equal to K 0 , when the terminal equipment determines the weighting coefficients with non-zero amplitudes
  • the number of weighting coefficients with a non-zero amplitude determined for each transmission layer herein refers to the number of reported weighting coefficients based on the pre-configured K 0 and the channel measurement determined The number of weighting coefficients with a non-zero amplitude that each transmission layer wants to feedback.
  • the terminal device When the values of K 1 and K 2 determined by the network device through the first indication information are the same, it means that the K 1 weighting coefficients are all weighting coefficients of non-zero amplitude determined by the terminal device based on channel measurement, or in other words, the terminal device has not discard any one of the K 2 weighting coefficients; when the network device as determined by K indicative of 1 and K 2 to K 1 different from the value K 2, as K 1 ⁇ K 2, it indicates that the K a weighting coefficient It is not that the terminal equipment determines all the weighting coefficients with non-zero amplitudes based on the channel measurement, or in other words, the terminal equipment discards some of the K 2 weighting coefficients.
  • reported CSI can be decoded based on the number of bits of the second portion of the pre-allocated.
  • the number of pre-allocated bits described herein may be determined by the network device based on the number of bits X 0 that are pre-allocated to the terminal device for transmitting the CSI report and the number of bits X 1 of the first part of the CSI report that can predetermine the bit overhead.
  • the number of bits X 2 pre-allocated by the network device to the second part of the CSI report may be equal to X 0 -X 1 .
  • the length of the second part of the CSI report can be estimated based on the K 1 weighting coefficients, and then based on the estimated Length to decode the second part of the CSI report.
  • the first indication information includes a first indication bit, which is used to indicate whether the K 1 weighting coefficients are all the magnitudes determined by the terminal device based on the number K 0 of weighting coefficients reported by the terminal device.
  • the weighting coefficient of zero is used to indicate whether the K 1 weighting coefficients are all of the K 2 weighting coefficients.
  • the overhead of the first indicator bit is 1 bit.
  • the first indicator bit is set to "0" it means that the K 1 weighting coefficient is all of the K 2 weighting coefficients, that is, the terminal device does not discard the K 2 Any one of the weighting coefficients; when the first indication bit is set to "1", it means that the K 1 weighting coefficient is part of the K 2 weighting coefficients, that is, the terminal device discards the K 2 weighting coefficients Part of the weighting factor in.
  • the meanings represented by different values in the first indicator bit may be determined according to a preset rule, and the present application does not limit the meanings corresponding to different values.
  • the first indicator bit is carried in the second part of the CSI report. As another embodiment, the first indicator bit is carried in the first part of the CSI report.
  • the first indication information includes a second indication bit, and the second indication bit indicates the number of K 2 weighting coefficients that are not reported through the CSI report.
  • the second indicator bit can pass Bits to indicate.
  • the bits can be used to indicate K 0 optional values. Since K 2 ⁇ K 0 , the The bits can be used to indicate any possible value of K 2 .
  • the second indicator bit can pass Bits to indicate.
  • the bits can be used to indicate K 0 -K 1 +1 optional values. Since the number of weighting coefficients pre-configured by the network equipment is K 0 , and the number of weighting coefficients actually reported by the terminal equipment is K 1 , the number of weighting coefficients discarded by the terminal equipment does not exceed K 0 -K 1 . In addition, there is a possibility that the weighting coefficient is not discarded, that is, K 0 -K 1 is 0, and the K 0 -K 1 +1 optional values may include the number of weighting coefficients not reported through the CSI report. The number of possible values K 0 -K 1 +1.
  • the second indicator bit is carried in the first part of the CSI report. As another embodiment, the second indicator bit is carried in the second part of the CSI report.
  • the CSI report In addition to the CSI report carries the first indication or the second indication bits bits, it may also carry an indication of K 1.
  • the first portion carries the reported CSI is indicative of K 1.
  • the value of K 1 can be passed Bits to indicate.
  • the bits can be used to indicate K 0 optional values. Since K 1 ⁇ K 0 , the Bits may be used to indicate any one of K possible values.
  • K 1 can also be determined by the sum of the number of weighting coefficients actually reported for each of the Z transmission layers.
  • the network device can directly estimate the length of the second part of the CSI report according to the value of K 1 .
  • the terminal device carries the first indication information in the CSI report to indicate whether the weighting coefficient reported by the terminal device is all non-zero weighting coefficients determined by the terminal device based on K 0 and channel measurement , So that the network equipment can determine the K 1 weighting coefficients reported by the terminal equipment based on the CSI report, and determine whether the reported weighting coefficients are all non-zero weighting coefficients determined by the terminal equipment based on K 0 and channel measurement. Based on this, the network device can parse the first part of the CSI report according to the predefined CSI report format, and estimate the length of the second part of the CSI report, so as to complete the correct decoding of the second part of the CSI report. Therefore, the network device can determine the precoding matrix used for data transmission based on the information in the CSI report, which is beneficial to improve the system transmission performance.
  • the network device has learned whether the terminal device has discarded the weighting coefficient, and can consider allocating more physical uplink resources for the terminal device in the next scheduling to transmit the CSI report. On the contrary, if the network device does not know that the terminal device discards part of the weighting coefficients with a non-zero amplitude when reporting the CSI report, the network device will not infer that the physical uplink resources allocated to the terminal device during this scheduling are insufficient. In the next scheduling, the terminal device may still be allocated resources of the same size, and the terminal device may discard a part of the weighting coefficients with a non-zero amplitude each time it reports. This may seriously affect the feedback accuracy and is not conducive to improving the data transmission performance.
  • the network device can determine whether the physical uplink resources allocated to the terminal device in the previous scheduling are sufficient according to the first indication information, and can also be based on the information obtained in the previous scheduling in the next scheduling, such as K 2. Allocate appropriate physical uplink resources for terminal equipment. Therefore, it is beneficial to improve the feedback accuracy and the transmission performance.
  • Fig. 3 is a schematic block diagram of a communication device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication device 1000 may include a processing unit 1100 and a transceiver unit 1200.
  • the communication device 1000 may correspond to the terminal device in the above method embodiment, for example, it may be a terminal device or a chip configured in the terminal device.
  • the processing unit 1100 is configured to generate a CSI report, the CSI report including quantization information of K 1 weighting coefficients and first indication information; wherein the K 1 weighting coefficients are weighting coefficients with a non-zero amplitude, and the K 1 Weighting coefficients are used to construct a precoding matrix corresponding to one or more frequency domain units; the first indication information is used to indicate whether the K 1 weighting coefficients are the number K 0 reported by the device 1000 based on the pre-configured weighting coefficients.
  • the apparatus 1000 based on the number of all non-zero amplitude weighting coefficient K 0 is determined as K 2, K 1 ⁇ K 2 ⁇ K 0, K 0, K 1 and K 2 is a positive integer; the transceiver unit 1200 is used to send the CSI report.
  • the transceiving unit 1200 is further configured to receive second indication information, where the second indication information is used to report the number K 0 of weighting coefficients configured for the terminal device.
  • the first indication information includes an indication of K 1 and an indication of K 2 .
  • the K 2 indication is carried in the first part of the CSI report, and the K 1 indication is carried in the second part of the CSI report.
  • the first indication information includes a first indication bit, which is used to indicate whether the K 1 weighting coefficients are all the amplitudes determined by the terminal device based on the number K 0 of weighting coefficients reported by the terminal device. Non-zero weighting factor.
  • the first indication bit is carried in the second part of the CSI report.
  • the first indication information includes a second indication bit
  • the second indication bit indicates the number of K 2 weighting coefficients that have not been reported through the CSI report.
  • the overhead of the second indication bit is Bit, corresponding to K 0 -K 1 +1 optional values; among them, K 0 is the number of pre-configured weighting coefficient reports, K 0 is a positive integer; the K 0 -K 1 +1 optional The value of includes K 0 -K 1 +1 possible values of the number of weighting coefficients not reported by the CSI report.
  • the second indication bit is carried in the second part of the CSI report.
  • the first part of the reported CSI comprises an indication of K 1.
  • the overhead of the second part of the CSI report is X 2 bits;
  • the overhead of the second part of the CSI report is Q bits
  • X 2 X 0 -X 1
  • X 0 is the number of bits allocated in advance for transmitting the CSI report
  • X 1 is the number of bits used to transmit the first part of the CSI report
  • Q, X 1 , X 2 and X 0 are all positive integers.
  • the communication device 1000 may correspond to the terminal device in the method 200 according to the embodiment of the present application, and the communication device 1000 may include a unit for executing the method executed by the terminal device in the method 200 in FIG. 2.
  • each unit in the communication device 1000 and other operations and/or functions described above are used to implement the corresponding process of the method 200 in FIG. 2.
  • the processing unit 1100 may be used to execute step 210 in the method 200
  • the transceiver unit 1200 may be used to execute steps 220 and 230 in the method 200. It should be understood that the specific process of each unit performing the foregoing corresponding steps has been described in detail in the foregoing method embodiment, and is not repeated here for brevity.
  • the transceiver unit 1200 in the communication device 1000 may correspond to the transceiver 2020 in the terminal device 2000 shown in FIG. 4, and the processing unit 1100 in the communication device 1000 may It corresponds to the processor 2010 in the terminal device 2000 shown in FIG. 4.
  • the transceiver unit 1200 in the communication device 1000 may be an input/output interface.
  • the communication device 1000 may correspond to the network device in the above method embodiment, for example, it may be a network device or a chip configured in the network device.
  • the transceiver unit 1200 is configured to receive a CSI report; the CSI report includes quantization information of K 1 weighting coefficients and first indication information; wherein, the K 1 weighting coefficients are weighting coefficients with a non-zero amplitude, and the K 1 weighting coefficients
  • the weighting coefficient is used to construct a precoding matrix corresponding to one or more frequency domain units; the first indication information is used to indicate whether the K 1 weighting coefficient is the number K 0 reported by the device 1000 based on the pre-configured weighting coefficient.
  • the number of weighting coefficients of all non-zero amplitudes determined by the device 1000 based on K 0 is K 2 , K 1 ⁇ K 2 ⁇ K 0 , K 0 , K 1 and K 2 All are positive integers; the processing unit 1100 is configured to determine K 1 weighting coefficients and whether the K 1 weighting coefficients are all non-zero ranges determined by the device 1000 based on the number K 0 of the weighting coefficients reported by the device 1000 according to the CSI report The weighting factor.
  • the transceiving unit 1200 is further configured to receive second indication information, where the second indication information is used to report the number K 0 of weighting coefficients configured for the terminal device.
  • the first indication information includes an indication of K 1 and an indication of K 2 .
  • the K 2 indication is carried in the first part of the CSI report, and the K 1 indication is carried in the second part of the CSI report.
  • the first indication information includes a first indication bit, which is used to indicate whether the K 1 weighting coefficients are all the amplitudes determined by the terminal device based on the number K 0 of weighting coefficients reported by the terminal device. Non-zero weighting factor.
  • the first indication bit is carried in the second part of the CSI report.
  • the first indication information includes a second indication bit
  • the second indication bit indicates the number of K 2 weighting coefficients that have not been reported through the CSI report.
  • the overhead of the second indication bit is Bit, corresponding to K 0 -K 1 +1 optional values; among them, K 0 is the number of pre-configured weighting coefficient reports, K 0 is a positive integer; the K 0 -K 1 +1 optional The value of includes K 0 -K 1 +1 possible values of the number of weighting coefficients not reported by the CSI report.
  • the second indication bit is carried in the second part of the CSI report.
  • the first part of the reported CSI comprises an indication of K 1.
  • the communication device 1000 may correspond to the network device in the method 200 according to the embodiment of the present application, and the communication device 1000 may include a unit for executing the method executed by the network device in the method 200 in FIG. 2.
  • each unit in the communication device 1000 and other operations and/or functions described above are used to implement the corresponding process of the method 200 in FIG. 2.
  • the processing unit 1100 can be used to execute steps 240 and 250 in the method 200
  • the transceiver unit 1200 can be used to execute steps 220 and 230 in the method 200. It should be understood that the specific process for each unit to execute the foregoing corresponding steps has been described in detail in the foregoing method embodiment, and is not repeated here for brevity.
  • the transceiver unit in the communication device 1000 may correspond to the RRU 3100 in the base station 3000 shown in FIG. 5, and the processing unit 1100 in the communication device 1000 may correspond to The BBU 3200 or the processor 3202 in the base station 3000 shown in FIG. 5.
  • the transceiver unit 1200 in the communication device 1000 may be an input/output interface.
  • FIG. 4 is a schematic structural diagram of a terminal device 2000 provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the terminal device 2000 can be applied to the system shown in FIG. 1 to perform the functions of the terminal device in the foregoing method embodiment.
  • the terminal device 2000 includes a processor 2010 and a transceiver 2020.
  • the terminal device 2000 further includes a memory 2030.
  • the processor 2010, the transceiver 2002, and the memory 2030 can communicate with each other through internal connection paths to transfer control and/or data signals.
  • the memory 2030 is used for storing computer programs, and the processor 2010 is used for downloading from the memory 2030. Call and run the computer program to control the transceiver 2020 to send and receive signals.
  • the terminal device 2000 may further include an antenna 2040 for transmitting the uplink data or uplink control signaling output by the transceiver 2020 through a wireless signal.
  • the aforementioned processor 2010 and the memory 2030 can be combined into a processing device, and the processor 2010 is configured to execute the program code stored in the memory 2030 to implement the aforementioned functions.
  • the memory 2030 may also be integrated in the processor 2010 or independent of the processor 2010.
  • the processor 2010 may correspond to the processing unit in FIG. 3.
  • the aforementioned transceiver 2020 may correspond to the transceiver unit in FIG. 3, and may also be referred to as a transceiver unit.
  • the transceiver 2020 may include a receiver (or called receiver, receiving circuit) and a transmitter (or called transmitter, transmitting circuit). Among them, the receiver is used to receive signals, and the transmitter is used to transmit signals.
  • the terminal device 2000 shown in FIG. 4 can implement various processes involving the terminal device in the method embodiment shown in FIG. 2.
  • the operations and/or functions of each module in the terminal device 2000 are respectively for implementing the corresponding processes in the foregoing method embodiments.
  • the above-mentioned processor 2010 can be used to execute the actions described in the previous method embodiments implemented by the terminal device, and the transceiver 2020 can be used to execute the terminal device described in the previous method embodiments to send or receive from the network device action.
  • the transceiver 2020 can be used to execute the terminal device described in the previous method embodiments to send or receive from the network device action.
  • the aforementioned terminal device 2000 may further include a power supply 2050 for providing power to various devices or circuits in the terminal device.
  • the terminal device 2000 may also include one or more of an input unit 2060, a display unit 2070, an audio circuit 2080, a camera 2090, and a sensor 2100.
  • the audio circuit A speaker 2082, a microphone 2084, etc. may also be included.
  • FIG. 5 is a schematic structural diagram of a network device provided by an embodiment of the present application, for example, may be a schematic structural diagram of a base station.
  • the base station 3000 can be applied to the system shown in FIG. 1 to perform the functions of the network device in the foregoing method embodiment.
  • the base station 3000 may include one or more radio frequency units, such as a remote radio unit (RRU) 3100 and one or more baseband units (BBU) (also known as distributed units ( DU)) 3200.
  • RRU 3100 may be referred to as a transceiver unit, which corresponds to the transceiver unit 1100 in FIG. 3.
  • the transceiver unit 3100 may also be called a transceiver, a transceiver circuit, or a transceiver, etc., and it may include at least one antenna 3101 and a radio frequency unit 3102.
  • the transceiver unit 3100 may include a receiving unit and a transmitting unit, the receiving unit may correspond to a receiver (or receiver, receiving circuit), and the transmitting unit may correspond to a transmitter (or transmitter or transmitting circuit).
  • the RRU 3100 part is mainly used for sending and receiving of radio frequency signals and conversion of radio frequency signals and baseband signals, for example, for sending instruction information to terminal equipment.
  • the 3200 part of the BBU is mainly used for baseband processing and control of the base station.
  • the RRU 3100 and the BBU 3200 may be physically set together, or may be physically separated, that is, a distributed base station.
  • the BBU 3200 is the control center of the base station, and may also be called a processing unit, which may correspond to the processing unit 1200 in FIG. 3, and is mainly used to complete baseband processing functions, such as channel coding, multiplexing, modulation, and spreading.
  • the BBU processing unit
  • the BBU may be used to control the base station to execute the operation procedure of the network device in the foregoing method embodiment, for example, to generate the foregoing indication information.
  • the BBU 3200 may be composed of one or more single boards, and multiple single boards may jointly support a radio access network with a single access standard (such as an LTE network), or support different access standards. Wireless access network (such as LTE network, 5G network or other networks).
  • the BBU 3200 also includes a memory 3201 and a processor 3202.
  • the memory 3201 is used to store necessary instructions and data.
  • the processor 3202 is configured to control the base station to perform necessary actions, for example, to control the base station to execute the operation procedure of the network device in the foregoing method embodiment.
  • the memory 3201 and the processor 3202 may serve one or more single boards. In other words, the memory and the processor can be set separately on each board. It can also be that multiple boards share the same memory and processor. In addition, necessary circuits can be provided on each board.
  • the base station 3000 shown in FIG. 5 can implement various processes involving network devices in the method embodiment shown in FIG. 2.
  • the operations and/or functions of the various modules in the base station 3000 are used to implement the corresponding processes in the foregoing method embodiments.
  • the above-mentioned BBU 3200 can be used to perform the actions described in the previous method embodiments implemented by the network device, and the RRU 3100 can be used to perform the actions described in the previous method embodiments that the network device sends to or receives from the terminal device.
  • the RRU 3100 can be used to perform the actions described in the previous method embodiments that the network device sends to or receives from the terminal device.
  • the base station 3000 shown in FIG. 5 is only a possible architecture of the network device, and should not constitute any limitation in this application.
  • the method provided in this application can be applied to network devices of other architectures.
  • network equipment including CU, DU, and AAU. This application does not limit the specific architecture of the network device.
  • An embodiment of the present application also provides a processing device, including a processor and an interface; the processor is configured to execute the method in the foregoing method embodiment.
  • the aforementioned processing device may be one or more chips.
  • the processing device may be a field programmable gate array (FPGA), an application specific integrated circuit (ASIC), or a system on chip (SoC), or It is a central processor unit (CPU), it can also be a network processor (NP), it can also be a digital signal processing circuit (digital signal processor, DSP), or it can be a microcontroller (microcontroller unit). , MCU), it can also be a programmable logic device (PLD) or other integrated chips.
  • FPGA field programmable gate array
  • ASIC application specific integrated circuit
  • SoC system on chip
  • CPU central processor unit
  • NP network processor
  • DSP digital signal processing circuit
  • microcontroller unit microcontroller unit
  • MCU programmable logic device
  • PLD programmable logic device
  • the steps of the above method can be completed by hardware integrated logic circuits in the processor or instructions in the form of software.
  • the steps of the method disclosed in the embodiments of the present application may be directly embodied as being executed and completed by a hardware processor, or executed and completed by a combination of hardware and software modules in the processor.
  • the software module can be located in a mature storage medium in the field such as random access memory, flash memory, read-only memory, programmable read-only memory, or electrically erasable programmable memory, registers.
  • the storage medium is located in the memory, and the processor reads the information in the memory and completes the steps of the above method in combination with its hardware. To avoid repetition, it will not be described in detail here.
  • the processor in the embodiment of the present application may be an integrated circuit chip with signal processing capability.
  • the steps of the foregoing method embodiments can be completed by hardware integrated logic circuits in the processor or instructions in the form of software.
  • the above-mentioned processor may be a general-purpose processor, a digital signal processor (DSP), an application specific integrated circuit (ASIC), a field programmable gate array (FPGA) or other programmable logic devices, discrete gates or transistor logic devices, discrete hardware components .
  • DSP digital signal processor
  • ASIC application specific integrated circuit
  • FPGA field programmable gate array
  • the methods, steps, and logical block diagrams disclosed in the embodiments of the present application can be implemented or executed.
  • the general-purpose processor may be a microprocessor or the processor may also be any conventional processor or the like.
  • the steps of the method disclosed in the embodiments of the present application may be directly embodied as being executed and completed by a hardware decoding processor, or executed and completed by a combination of hardware and software modules in the decoding processor.
  • the software module can be located in a mature storage medium in the field such as random access memory, flash memory, read-only memory, programmable read-only memory, or electrically erasable programmable memory, registers.
  • the storage medium is located in the memory, and the processor reads the information in the memory and completes the steps of the above method in combination with its hardware.
  • the memory in the embodiments of the present application may be volatile memory or non-volatile memory, or may include both volatile and non-volatile memory.
  • the non-volatile memory can be read-only memory (ROM), programmable read-only memory (programmable ROM, PROM), erasable programmable read-only memory (erasable PROM, EPROM), and electronic Erase programmable read-only memory (electrically EPROM, EEPROM) or flash memory.
  • the volatile memory may be random access memory (RAM), which is used as an external cache.
  • RAM random access memory
  • static random access memory static random access memory
  • dynamic RAM dynamic random access memory
  • DRAM dynamic random access memory
  • SDRAM synchronous dynamic random access memory
  • double data rate synchronous dynamic random access memory double data rate SDRAM, DDR SDRAM
  • enhanced synchronous dynamic random access memory enhanced SDRAM, ESDRAM
  • serial link DRAM SLDRAM
  • direct rambus RAM direct rambus RAM
  • the present application also provides a computer program product, the computer program product includes: computer program code, when the computer program code runs on a computer, the computer executes the embodiment shown in FIG. 2 Method in.
  • the present application also provides a computer-readable medium storing program code, which when the program code runs on a computer, causes the computer to execute the embodiment shown in FIG. 2 Method in.
  • this application also provides a system, which includes the aforementioned one or more terminal devices and one or more network devices.
  • the network equipment in the above-mentioned device embodiments completely corresponds to the network equipment or terminal equipment in the terminal equipment and method embodiments, and the corresponding modules or units execute the corresponding steps.
  • the communication unit transmits the receiving or In the sending step, other steps except sending and receiving can be executed by the processing unit (processor).
  • the processing unit processor
  • component used in this specification are used to denote computer-related entities, hardware, firmware, a combination of hardware and software, software, or software in execution.
  • the component may be, but is not limited to, a process, a processor, an object, an executable file, an execution thread, a program, and/or a computer running on a processor.
  • the application running on the computing device and the computing device can be components.
  • One or more components may reside in processes and/or threads of execution, and components may be located on one computer and/or distributed among two or more computers.
  • these components can be executed from various computer readable media having various data structures stored thereon.
  • the component may be based on, for example, a signal having one or more data packets (such as data from two components interacting with another component in a local system, a distributed system, and/or a network, such as the Internet that interacts with other systems through signals) Communicate through local and/or remote processes.
  • a signal having one or more data packets (such as data from two components interacting with another component in a local system, a distributed system, and/or a network, such as the Internet that interacts with other systems through signals) Communicate through local and/or remote processes.
  • the disclosed system, device, and method may be implemented in other ways.
  • the device embodiments described above are only illustrative.
  • the division of the units is only a logical function division, and there may be other divisions in actual implementation, for example, multiple units or components can be combined or It can be integrated into another system, or some features can be ignored or not implemented.
  • the displayed or discussed mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection may be indirect coupling or communication connection through some interfaces, devices or units, and may be in electrical, mechanical or other forms.
  • the units described as separate components may or may not be physically separated, and the components displayed as units may or may not be physical units, that is, they may be located in one place, or they may be distributed on multiple network units. Some or all of the units may be selected according to actual needs to achieve the objectives of the solutions of the embodiments.
  • each unit in each embodiment of the present application may be integrated into one processing unit, or each unit may exist alone physically, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit.
  • each functional unit may be implemented in whole or in part by software, hardware, firmware, or any combination thereof.
  • software When implemented by software, it can be implemented in the form of a computer program product in whole or in part.
  • the computer program product includes one or more computer instructions (programs).
  • programs When the computer program instructions (programs) are loaded and executed on the computer, the processes or functions described in the embodiments of the present application are generated in whole or in part.
  • the computer may be a general-purpose computer, a special-purpose computer, a computer network, or other programmable devices.
  • the computer instructions may be stored in a computer-readable storage medium or transmitted from one computer-readable storage medium to another computer-readable storage medium.
  • the computer instructions may be transmitted from a website, computer, server, or data center. Transmission to another website, computer, server or data center via wired (such as coaxial cable, optical fiber, digital subscriber line (DSL)) or wireless (such as infrared, wireless, microwave, etc.).
  • the computer-readable storage medium may be any available medium that can be accessed by a computer or a data storage device such as a server or data center integrated with one or more available media.
  • the usable medium may be a magnetic medium (for example, a floppy disk, a hard disk, and a magnetic tape), an optical medium (for example, a high-density digital video disc (digital video disc, DVD)), or a semiconductor medium (for example, a solid state disk, SSD)) etc.
  • the function is implemented in the form of a software functional unit and sold or used as an independent product, it can be stored in a computer readable storage medium.
  • the technical solution of this application essentially or the part that contributes to the existing technology or the part of the technical solution can be embodied in the form of a software product, and the computer software product is stored in a storage medium, including Several instructions are used to make a computer device (which may be a personal computer, a server, or a network device, etc.) execute all or part of the steps of the method described in each embodiment of the present application.
  • the aforementioned storage media include: U disk, mobile hard disk, read-only memory (read-only memory, ROM), random access memory (random access memory, RAM), magnetic disk or optical disk and other media that can store program code .

Abstract

The present application provides a coefficient indication method for constructing a precoding matrix, and a communication apparatus. The method comprises: a terminal device generates a CSI report and sends to a network device, the CSI report comprising quantitative information of K 1 weighting coefficients, and first indication information, the K 1 weighting coefficients being used for constructing a precoding matrix corresponding to one or more frequency domain units, the first indication information being used for indicating whether the K 1 weighting coefficients are all the weighting coefficients having non-zero amplitudes determined by the terminal device on the basis of a preconfigured number K 0 of weighting coefficient reports, K 1 being less than or equal to K 0, and K 0 and K 1 being both positive integers. On the basis of the method, the network device is able to estimate the length of a second part according to a predefined CSI report format and a first part, so that a CSI report is decoded correctly, and the system transmission performance is improved.

Description

一种用于构建预编码矩阵的系数指示方法和通信装置Coefficient indicating method and communication device for constructing precoding matrix
本申请要求于2019年4月30日提交中国专利局、申请号为201910365436.3、申请名称为“一种用于构建预编码矩阵的系数指示方法和通信装置”的中国专利申请的优先权,其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。This application claims the priority of a Chinese patent application filed with the Chinese Patent Office on April 30, 2019, the application number is 201910365436.3, and the application name is "a coefficient indicating method and communication device for constructing a precoding matrix", all of which The content is incorporated in this application by reference.
技术领域Technical field
本申请涉及通信领域,并且更具体地,涉及一种用于构建预编码矩阵的系数指示方法和通信装置。This application relates to the field of communications, and more specifically, to a coefficient indicating method and communication device for constructing a precoding matrix.
背景技术Background technique
在大规模多输入多输出(massive multiple-input multiple output,Massive MIMO)技术中,网络设备可以通过预编码技术减小多用户之间的干扰以及同一用户的多个信号流之间的干扰。从而提高信号质量,实现空分复用,提高频谱利用率。In massive multiple-input multiple output (massive multiple-input multiple output, Massive MIMO) technology, network equipment can reduce interference between multiple users and interference between multiple signal streams of the same user through precoding technology. Thereby improving signal quality, realizing space division multiplexing, and improving spectrum utilization.
终端设备例如可以通过信道测量等方式确定预编码向量,并希望通过反馈,使得网络设备获得与终端设备所确定的预编码向量相同或相近的预编码向量。为了获得较高的反馈精度,终端设备可以将经信道测量所确定的预编码向量通过多个波束加权的方式来拟合。终端设备可以将加权所使用的波束以及加权系数反馈给网络设备,以便网络设备基于终端设备的反馈构建预编码矩阵。The terminal device may determine the precoding vector by means of channel measurement, for example, and hopes that through feedback, the network device can obtain the same or similar precoding vector as the precoding vector determined by the terminal device. In order to obtain higher feedback accuracy, the terminal device can fit the precoding vector determined by the channel measurement through multiple beam weighting methods. The terminal device may feed back the beam used for weighting and the weighting coefficient to the network device, so that the network device constructs a precoding matrix based on the feedback of the terminal device.
然而,在某些情况下,终端设备所上报的信道状态信息(channel state information,CSI)报告可能并不一定包括经信道测量所确定的待反馈的全部信息。比如,终端设备上报的加权系数可能是所有幅度非零的加权系数中的一部分。但如果网络设备无法预先知道终端设备上报了哪些信息,可能就无法准确地估计出CSI报告的第二部分的开销,也就无法正确译码。因此,网络设备可能无法准确地获取到CSI报告中的信息,从而影响系统传输性能。However, in some cases, the channel state information (CSI) report reported by the terminal device may not necessarily include all the information to be fed back determined by channel measurement. For example, the weighting coefficient reported by the terminal device may be a part of all weighting coefficients with a non-zero amplitude. However, if the network device cannot know in advance what information the terminal device reports, it may not be able to accurately estimate the cost of the second part of the CSI report, and it may not be able to decode it correctly. Therefore, the network device may not be able to accurately obtain the information in the CSI report, thereby affecting the system transmission performance.
发明内容Summary of the invention
本申请提供一种用于构建预编码矩阵的系数指示方法以及通信装置,以期明确在CSI报告中如何指示加权系数的个数。This application provides a coefficient indicating method and communication device for constructing a precoding matrix, in order to clarify how to indicate the number of weighting coefficients in a CSI report.
第一方面,提供了一种用于构建预编码矩阵的系数指示方法。具体地,该方法包括:终端设备生成信道状态信息CSI报告,该CSI报告包括K 1个加权系数的量化信息和第一指示信息;其中,该K 1个加权系数为幅度非零的加权系数,该K 1个加权系数用于构建与一个或多个频域单元对应的预编码矩阵;该第一指示信息用于指示该K 1个加权系数是否为该终端设备基于预配置的加权系数上报个数K 0所确定的所有幅度非零的加权系数,该终端设备基于K 0所确定的所有幅度非零的加权系数的个数为K 2,K 1≤K 2≤K 0,K 0、K 1和K 2均为正整数;该终端设备发送该CSI报告。 In the first aspect, a coefficient indicating method for constructing a precoding matrix is provided. Specifically, the method includes: the terminal device generates a channel state information CSI report, the CSI report including quantization information of K 1 weighting coefficients and first indication information; wherein the K 1 weighting coefficients are weighting coefficients with a non-zero amplitude, The K 1 weighting coefficients are used to construct a precoding matrix corresponding to one or more frequency domain units; the first indication information is used to indicate whether the K 1 weighting coefficients are reported by the terminal device based on the pre-configured weighting coefficients. All weighting coefficients with non-zero amplitudes determined by the number K 0 , the number of weighting coefficients with all non-zero amplitudes determined by the terminal device based on K 0 is K 2 , K 1 ≤K 2 ≤K 0 , K 0 , K 1 and K 2 are both positive integers; the terminal device sends the CSI report.
应理解,该方法可以由终端设备执行,或者,也可以由配置在终端设备中的芯片执行。本申请对此不作限定。It should be understood that this method may be executed by a terminal device, or may also be executed by a chip configured in the terminal device. This application does not limit this.
基于上文所述的方法,终端设备通过在CSI报告中携带第一指示信息,以指示终端设备所上报的加权系数是否为终端设备基于K 0和信道测量所确定的所有幅度非零的加权系数,使得网络设备可以基于CSI报告,确定终端设备所上报的K 1个加权系数,并确定所上报的加权系数是否是终端设备基于K 0和信道测量所确定的所有幅度非零的加权系数。基于此,网络设备可以按照预定义的CSI报告的格式来解析CSI报告的第一部分,并估计该CSI报告的第二部分的长度,进而完成对CSI报告的第二部分的正确译码。由此网络设备可以基于CSI报告中的信息来对确定用于数据传输的预编码矩阵,因此有利于提高系统传输性能。 Based on the method described above, the terminal device carries the first indication information in the CSI report to indicate whether the weighting coefficient reported by the terminal device is all non-zero weighting coefficients determined by the terminal device based on K 0 and channel measurement , So that the network equipment can determine the K 1 weighting coefficients reported by the terminal equipment based on the CSI report, and determine whether the reported weighting coefficients are all non-zero weighting coefficients determined by the terminal equipment based on K 0 and channel measurement. Based on this, the network device can parse the first part of the CSI report according to the predefined CSI report format, and estimate the length of the second part of the CSI report, so as to complete the correct decoding of the second part of the CSI report. Therefore, the network device can determine the precoding matrix used for data transmission based on the information in the CSI report, which is beneficial to improve the system transmission performance.
此外,网络设备获知了终端设备是否丢弃了加权系数,也就可以考虑在下一次调度时为终端设备分配更多的物理上行资源,以用于传输CSI报告。相反,如果网络设备不知道终端设备在上报CSI报告时丢弃了一部分幅度非零的加权系数,网络设备也就不会推断此次调度时为终端设备分配的物理上行资源不足。在下一次调度时,可能仍然为该终端设备分配相同大小的资源,终端设备每一次上报都可能会丢弃一部分幅度非零的加权系数。这可能会严重影响反馈精度,不利于提高数据传输性能。而在本申请实施例中,网络设备可以根据第一指示信息来判断上一次调度时为终端设备分配的物理上行资源是否足够,也就可以在下一次调度时基于上一次所获得的信息,如K 2,为终端设备分配合适的物理上行资源。因此,有利于提高反馈精度,有利于提高传输性能。 In addition, the network device has learned whether the terminal device has discarded the weighting coefficient, and can consider allocating more physical uplink resources for the terminal device in the next scheduling to transmit the CSI report. On the contrary, if the network device does not know that the terminal device discards part of the weighting coefficients with a non-zero amplitude when reporting the CSI report, the network device will not infer that the physical uplink resources allocated to the terminal device during this scheduling are insufficient. In the next scheduling, the terminal device may still be allocated resources of the same size, and the terminal device may discard a part of the weighting coefficients with a non-zero amplitude each time it reports. This may seriously affect the feedback accuracy and is not conducive to improving the data transmission performance. In the embodiment of the present application, the network device can determine whether the physical uplink resources allocated to the terminal device in the previous scheduling are sufficient according to the first indication information, and can also be based on the information obtained in the previous scheduling in the next scheduling, such as K 2. Allocate appropriate physical uplink resources for terminal equipment. Therefore, it is beneficial to improve the feedback accuracy and the transmission performance.
结合第一方面,在第一方面某些可能的实现方式中,该方法还包括:该终端设备接收第二指示信息,该第二指示信息用于指示为该终端设备配置的加权系数上报个数K 0With reference to the first aspect, in some possible implementations of the first aspect, the method further includes: the terminal device receives second indication information, where the second indication information is used to indicate the number of weighting coefficients configured for the terminal device to report. K 0 .
网络设备为终端设备预配置的加权系数上报个数,也就是终端设备上报的加权系数的最大个数,或者说,加权系数的最大上报个数。网络设备可以通过高层信令为终端设备预先指示加权系数的最大上报个数。The number of weighting coefficient reports pre-configured by the network device for the terminal device, that is, the maximum number of weighting coefficients reported by the terminal device, or in other words, the maximum number of weighting coefficients reported. The network equipment can pre-instruct the maximum number of weighting coefficients to be reported for the terminal equipment through high-level signaling.
第二方面,提供了一种用于构建预编码矩阵的系数指示方法。具体地,该方法包括:网络设备接收信道状态信息CSI报告,该CSI报告包括K 1个加权系数的量化信息和第一指示信息;其中,该K 1个加权系数为幅度非零的加权系数,该K 1个加权系数用于构建与一个或多个频域单元对应的预编码矩阵;该第一指示信息用于指示该K 1个加权系数是否为终端设备基于预配置的加权系数上报个数K 0所确定的所有幅度非零的加权系数,该终端设备基于K 0所确定的所有幅度非零的加权系数的个数为K 2,K 1≤K 2≤K 0,K 0、K 1和K 2均为正整数;该网络设备根据该CSI报告确定该K 1个加权系数以及该K 1个加权系数是否为该终端设备基于预配置的加权系数上报个数K 0所确定的所有幅度非零的加权系数。 In the second aspect, a coefficient indication method for constructing a precoding matrix is provided. Specifically, the method includes: the network device receives a channel state information CSI report, the CSI report including quantization information of K 1 weighting coefficients and first indication information; wherein, the K 1 weighting coefficients are weighting coefficients with a non-zero amplitude, The K 1 weighting coefficients are used to construct a precoding matrix corresponding to one or more frequency domain units; the first indication information is used to indicate whether the K 1 weighting coefficients are the number reported by the terminal device based on the pre-configured weighting coefficients All amplitude weighting coefficients K 0 determined non-zero, the terminal device based on the number of all non-zero amplitude weighting coefficient K 0 is determined as K 2, K 1 ≤K 2 ≤K 0, K 0, K 1 And K 2 are both positive integers; the network device determines according to the CSI report whether the K 1 weighting coefficients and the K 1 weighting coefficients are all the amplitudes determined by the terminal device based on the number of weighting coefficients reported by the terminal K 0 Non-zero weighting factor.
应理解,该方法可以由网络设备执行,或者,也可以由配置在网络设备中的芯片执行。本申请对此不作限定。It should be understood that this method may be executed by a network device, or may also be executed by a chip configured in the network device. This application does not limit this.
基于上文所述的方法,终端设备通过在CSI报告中携带第一指示信息,以指示终端设备所上报的加权系数是否为终端设备基于K 0和信道测量所确定的所有幅度非零的加权系数,使得网络设备可以基于CSI报告,确定终端设备所上报的K 1个加权系数,并确定所上报的加权系数是否是终端设备基于K 0和信道测量所确定的所有幅度非零的加权系数。基于此,网络设备可以按照预定义的CSI报告的格式来解析CSI报告的第一部分,并估计 该CSI报告的第二部分的长度,进而完成对CSI报告的第二部分的正确译码。由此网络设备可以基于CSI报告中的信息来对确定用于数据传输的预编码矩阵,因此有利于提高系统传输性能。 Based on the method described above, the terminal device carries the first indication information in the CSI report to indicate whether the weighting coefficient reported by the terminal device is all non-zero weighting coefficients determined by the terminal device based on K 0 and channel measurement , So that the network equipment can determine the K 1 weighting coefficients reported by the terminal equipment based on the CSI report, and determine whether the reported weighting coefficients are all non-zero weighting coefficients determined by the terminal equipment based on K 0 and channel measurement. Based on this, the network device can parse the first part of the CSI report according to the predefined CSI report format, and estimate the length of the second part of the CSI report, so as to complete the correct decoding of the second part of the CSI report. Therefore, the network device can determine the precoding matrix used for data transmission based on the information in the CSI report, which is beneficial to improve the system transmission performance.
此外,网络设备获知了终端设备是否丢弃了加权系数,也就可以考虑在下一次调度时为终端设备分配更多的物理上行资源,以用于传输CSI报告。相反,如果网络设备不知道终端设备在上报CSI报告时丢弃了一部分幅度非零的加权系数,网络设备也就不会推断此次调度时为终端设备分配的物理上行资源不足。在下一次调度时,可能仍然为该终端设备分配相同大小的资源,终端设备每一次上报都可能会丢弃一部分幅度非零的加权系数。这可能会严重影响反馈精度,不利于提高数据传输性能。而在本申请实施例中,网络设备可以根据第一指示信息来判断上一次调度时为终端设备分配的物理上行资源是否足够,也就可以在下一次调度时基于上一次所获得的信息,如K 2,为终端设备分配合适的物理上行资源。因此,有利于提高反馈精度,有利于提高传输性能。 In addition, the network device has learned whether the terminal device has discarded the weighting coefficient, and can consider allocating more physical uplink resources for the terminal device in the next scheduling to transmit the CSI report. On the contrary, if the network device does not know that the terminal device discards part of the weighting coefficients with a non-zero amplitude when reporting the CSI report, the network device will not infer that the physical uplink resources allocated to the terminal device during this scheduling are insufficient. In the next scheduling, the terminal device may still be allocated resources of the same size, and the terminal device may discard a part of the weighting coefficients with a non-zero amplitude each time it reports. This may seriously affect the feedback accuracy and is not conducive to improving the data transmission performance. In the embodiment of the present application, the network device can determine whether the physical uplink resources allocated to the terminal device in the previous scheduling are sufficient according to the first indication information, and can also be based on the information obtained in the previous scheduling in the next scheduling, such as K 2. Allocate appropriate physical uplink resources for terminal equipment. Therefore, it is beneficial to improve the feedback accuracy and the transmission performance.
结合第二方面,在第二方面某些可能的实现方式中,该方法还包括:该网络设备发送第二指示信息,该第二指示信息用于指示为该终端设备配置的加权系数上报个数K 0With reference to the second aspect, in some possible implementations of the second aspect, the method further includes: the network device sending second indication information, the second indication information being used to indicate the number of weighting coefficients configured for the terminal device to report K 0 .
网络设备为终端设备预配置的加权系数上报个数,也就是终端设备上报的加权系数的最大个数,或者说,加权系数的最大上报个数。网络设备可以通过高层信令为终端设备预先指示加权系数的最大上报个数。The number of weighting coefficient reports pre-configured by the network device for the terminal device, that is, the maximum number of weighting coefficients reported by the terminal device, or in other words, the maximum number of weighting coefficients reported. The network equipment can pre-instruct the maximum number of weighting coefficients to be reported for the terminal equipment through high-level signaling.
结合第一方面或第二方面,在某些可能的实现方式中,该第一指示信息包括K 1的指示和K 2的指示。 Combination with the first or second aspect, in some possible implementations, including the first indication information indicating K 1 and K 2 indicates.
通过指示K 1和K 2,可以根据K 1和K 2的大小关系确定K 1个加权系数是否为终端设备基于预配置的加权系数上报个数K 0所确定的所有幅度非零的加权系数。若K 1<K 2,则表示K 1个加权系数不是终端设备基于预配置的加权系数上报个数K 0所确定的所有幅度非零的加权系数,或者说,终端设备丢弃了K 2个幅度非零的加权系数中的部分加权系数。若K 1=K 2,则表示K 1个加权系数是终端设备基于预配置的加权系数上报个数K 0所确定的所有幅度非零的加权系数,或者说,终端设备未丢弃K 2个幅度非零的加权系数中的任意一个加权系数。 By indicating K 1 and K 2 , it can be determined according to the magnitude relationship between K 1 and K 2 whether the K 1 weighting coefficients are all weighting coefficients with non-zero amplitudes determined by the terminal device based on the number of weighting coefficients reported by the pre-configured K 0 . If K 1 <K 2 , it means that K 1 weighting coefficients are not all weighting coefficients with non-zero amplitudes determined by the terminal device based on the number of pre-configured weighting coefficients reported by K 0 , or that the terminal device discards K 2 amplitudes Part of the non-zero weighting coefficient. If K 1 = K 2 , it means that the K 1 weighting coefficients are all non-zero weighting coefficients determined by the terminal device based on the pre-configured weighting coefficient report number K 0 , or in other words, the terminal device does not discard K 2 amplitudes Any one of the non-zero weighting coefficients.
并且,通过指示K 2的值,网络设备可以在下一次调度时基于该K 2的值来为终端设备分配物理上行资源,以便在下一次反馈时能够获得更加全面的反馈信息,因此有利于提高系统传输性能。 In addition, by indicating the value of K 2 , the network device can allocate physical uplink resources to the terminal device based on the value of K 2 during the next scheduling, so that more comprehensive feedback information can be obtained during the next feedback, which is beneficial to improve system transmission. performance.
可选地,该K 2的指示携带在该CSI报告的第一部分中,该K 1的指示携带在该CSI报告的第二部分中。 Optionally, the K 2 indication is carried in the first part of the CSI report, and the K 1 indication is carried in the second part of the CSI report.
该K 2的值例如可以通过二进制数来指示,或通过其他现有可能的指示方式来指示。该K 1的值例如也可以通过二进制数来指示,或可通过位图来指示,或通过其他现有可能的指示方式来指示。本申请对于K 1和K 2的具体指示方式不作限定。 The value of K 2 can be indicated by a binary number, for example, or by other existing possible indication methods. The value of K 1 may also be indicated by a binary number, or may be indicated by a bitmap, or indicated by other existing possible indication methods. This application does not limit the specific instructions of K 1 and K 2 .
结合第一方面或第二方面,在某些可能的实现方式中,该第一指示信息包括第一指示比特,该第一指示比特用于指示该K 1个加权系数是否为该终端设备基于预配置的加权系数上报个数K 0所确定的所有幅度非零的加权系数。 With reference to the first aspect or the second aspect, in some possible implementation manners, the first indication information includes a first indication bit, and the first indication bit is used to indicate whether the K 1 weighting coefficients are based on the terminal equipment preset The configured weighting coefficients report all weighting coefficients with a non-zero amplitude determined by the number K 0 .
例如,该第一指示比特的开销可以为1比特。该1比特可用于指示是或者否。比如,当该第一指示比特置“0”时,表示该K 1个加权系数为终端设备基于预配置的加权系数上报 个数K 0确定的所有幅度非零的加权系数,即,终端设备没有丢弃该K 2个加权系数中的任意一个加权系数;当该第一指示比特置“1”时,表示该K 1个加权系数不是终端设备基于预配置的加权系数上报个数K 0确定的所有幅度非零的加权系数,即,终端设备丢弃了该K 2个加权系数中的部分加权系数。 For example, the overhead of the first indicator bit may be 1 bit. This 1 bit can be used to indicate yes or no. For example, when the first indication bit is set to "0", it means that the K 1 weighting coefficients are all weighting coefficients with non-zero amplitudes determined by the terminal device based on the number of weighting coefficients reported by the pre-configured K 0 , that is, the terminal device has no Discard any of the K 2 weighting coefficients; when the first indication bit is set to "1", it means that the K 1 weighting coefficients are not all determined by the terminal device based on the number of weighting coefficients reported by the pre-configured K 0 A weighting coefficient with a non-zero amplitude, that is, the terminal device discards some of the K 2 weighting coefficients.
应理解,第一指示比特中不同的取值所表示的含义可以根据预设规则来确定,本申请对于不同取值所对应的含义不作限定。It should be understood that the meanings represented by different values in the first indicator bit may be determined according to a preset rule, and the present application does not limit the meanings corresponding to different values.
可选地,该第一指示比特携带在该CSI报告的第二部分中。Optionally, the first indication bit is carried in the second part of the CSI report.
结合第一方面或第二方面,在某些可能的实现方式中,该第一指示信息包括第二指示比特,该第二指示比特指示K 2个加权系数中未通过该CSI报告上报的加权系数的个数。 With reference to the first aspect or the second aspect, in some possible implementation manners, the first indication information includes a second indication bit, and the second indication bit indicates a weighting coefficient among K 2 weighting coefficients that is not reported through the CSI report The number of.
该第二指示比特可通过更多的指示比特来同时指示终端设备是否丢弃了加权系数以及丢弃了多少个加权系数。The second indication bit can simultaneously indicate whether the terminal device discards the weighting coefficient and how many weighting coefficients are discarded through more indication bits.
可选地,该第二指示比特的开销为
Figure PCTCN2020086593-appb-000001
比特,以与K 0-K 1+1种可选的取值对应;其中,K 0为预配置的加权系数上报个数,K 0为正整数;该K 0-K 1+1种可选的取值包括未通过该CSI报告上报的加权系数的个数的K 0-K 1+1种可能的取值。
Optionally, the overhead of the second indication bit is
Figure PCTCN2020086593-appb-000001
Bit, corresponding to K 0 -K 1 +1 optional values; among them, K 0 is the number of pre-configured weighting coefficient reports, K 0 is a positive integer; the K 0 -K 1 +1 optional The value of includes K 0 -K 1 +1 possible values of the number of weighting coefficients not reported by the CSI report.
由于网络设备预配置的加权系数的上报个数为K 0,而终端设备实际上报的加权系数的个数为K 1,故终端设备丢弃的加权系数的个数不超过K 0-K 1个。再加上未丢弃加权系数这一种可能的情况,即,K 0-K 1为0,该K 0-K 1+1种可选的取值可以包括未通过CSI报告上报的加权系数的个数的K 0-K 1+1种可能的取值。由此指示了终端设备是否丢弃了加权系数以及丢弃了多少个加权系数。 Since the number of weighting coefficients pre-configured by the network equipment is K 0 , and the number of weighting coefficients actually reported by the terminal equipment is K 1 , the number of weighting coefficients discarded by the terminal equipment does not exceed K 0 -K 1 . In addition, there is a possibility that the weighting coefficient is not discarded, that is, K 0 -K 1 is 0, and the K 0 -K 1 +1 optional values may include the number of weighting coefficients not reported through the CSI report. The number of possible values K 0 -K 1 +1. This indicates whether the terminal device discards the weighting coefficients and how many weighting coefficients are discarded.
并且,网络设备根据该第二指示比特可以确定丢弃了多少个加权系数,也就可以在下一次调度时基于该K 2的值来为终端设备分配物理上行资源,以便在下一次反馈时能够获得更加全面的反馈信息,因此有利于提高系统传输性能。 In addition, the network device can determine how many weighting coefficients are discarded according to the second indicator bit, and can allocate physical uplink resources to the terminal device based on the value of K 2 in the next scheduling, so that a more comprehensive feedback can be obtained in the next feedback. The feedback information is therefore helpful to improve system transmission performance.
可选地,该第二指示比特携带在该CSI报告的第二部分中。Optionally, the second indication bit is carried in the second part of the CSI report.
再进一步地,该CSI报告的第一部分包括K 1的指示。 Still further, the first part of the reported CSI comprises an indication of K 1.
通过在CSI报告的第一部分包括K 1的指示,便于网络设备根据实际上报的加权系数个数,估计CSI报告的第二部分的长度。 By including the indication of K 1 in the first part of the CSI report, it is convenient for the network device to estimate the length of the second part of the CSI report according to the number of weighting coefficients actually reported.
结合第一方面或第二方面,在某些可能的实现方式中,若基于K 2个加权系数确定的CSI报告的第二部分所需的比特数Q大于预先分配的比特数X 2,该CSI报告的第二部分的开销为X 2比特;或者,若基于该K 2个加权系数确定的CSI报告的第二部分所需的比特数Q小于或等于预先分配的比特数X 2,该CSI报告的第二部分的开销为Q比特;其中,X 2=X 0-X 1,X 0为预先分配的用于传输CSI报告的比特数,X 1为用于传输CSI报告的第一部分的比特数;X 0>X 1,Q、X 1、X 2和X 0均为正整数。 In combination with the first aspect or the second aspect, in some possible implementation manners, if the number of bits Q required for the second part of the CSI report determined based on K 2 weighting coefficients is greater than the pre-allocated number of bits X 2 , the CSI The overhead of the second part of the report is X 2 bits; or, if the number of bits Q required for the second part of the CSI report determined based on the K 2 weighting coefficients is less than or equal to the pre-allocated number of bits X 2 , the CSI report The overhead of the second part of is Q bits; where X 2 =X 0 -X 1 , X 0 is the number of bits allocated in advance for transmitting the CSI report, and X 1 is the number of bits for transmitting the first part of the CSI report ; X 0 >X 1 , Q, X 1 , X 2 and X 0 are all positive integers.
也就是说,CSI报告的第二部分的长度与K 2和预先分配的比特数X 2相关。基于K 2所确定的开销Q与X 2的大小关系,可以估计CSI报告的第二部分的开销,进而对CSI报告的第二部分进行译码,从而获取到终端设备上报的用于构建预编码矩阵的系数以及其他信息,如空域向量、频域向量等。 That is, the length of the second part of the CSI report is related to K 2 and the number of pre-allocated bits X 2 . Based on the size relationship between the overhead Q determined by K 2 and X 2 , the overhead of the second part of the CSI report can be estimated, and then the second part of the CSI report can be decoded, so as to obtain the information reported by the terminal device for constructing precoding The coefficients of the matrix and other information, such as spatial vector, frequency vector, etc.
第三方面,提供了一种通信装置,包括用于执行第一方面以及第一方面中任一种可能实现方式中的方法的各个模块或单元。In a third aspect, a communication device is provided, which includes modules or units for executing the method in the first aspect and any one of the possible implementation manners of the first aspect.
具体地,该通信装置包括:处理单元和收发单元。处理单元用于生成CSI报告,该 CSI报告包括K 1个加权系数的量化信息和第一指示信息;其中,该K 1个加权系数为幅度非零的加权系数,该K 1个加权系数用于构建与一个或多个频域单元对应的预编码矩阵;该第一指示信息用于指示该K 1个加权系数是否为该装置基于预配置的加权系数上报个数K 0所确定的所有幅度非零的加权系数,该装置基于K 0所确定的所有幅度非零的加权系数的个数为K 2,K 1≤K 2≤K 0,K 0、K 1和K 2均为正整数;收发单元用于发送该CSI报告。 Specifically, the communication device includes a processing unit and a transceiver unit. The processing unit is used to generate a CSI report, the CSI report including quantization information of K 1 weighting coefficients and first indication information; wherein, the K 1 weighting coefficients are weighting coefficients with a non-zero amplitude, and the K 1 weighting coefficients are used for Construct a precoding matrix corresponding to one or more frequency domain units; the first indication information is used to indicate whether the K 1 weighting coefficients are all the amplitudes determined by the device based on the number of pre-configured weighting coefficient reports K 0 weighting coefficients to zero, the magnitude of the apparatus based on the number of all nonzero weighting coefficient K 0 is determined as K 2, K 1 ≤K 2 ≤K 0, K 0, K 1 and K 2 are positive integers; transceiver The unit is used to send the CSI report.
第四方面,提供了一种通信装置,包括处理器。该处理器与存储器耦合,可用于执行存储器中的指令,以实现上述第一方面以及第一方面中任一种可能实现方式中的方法。可选地,该通信装置还包括存储器。可选地,该通信装置还包括通信接口,处理器与通信接口耦合。In a fourth aspect, a communication device is provided, including a processor. The processor is coupled with the memory and can be used to execute instructions in the memory to implement the foregoing first aspect and the method in any one of the possible implementation manners of the first aspect. Optionally, the communication device further includes a memory. Optionally, the communication device further includes a communication interface, and the processor is coupled with the communication interface.
在一种实现方式中,该通信装置为终端设备。当该通信装置为终端设备时,该通信接口可以是收发器,或,输入/输出接口。In an implementation manner, the communication device is a terminal device. When the communication device is a terminal device, the communication interface may be a transceiver, or an input/output interface.
在另一种实现方式中,该通信装置为配置于终端设备中的芯片。当该通信装置为配置于终端设备中的芯片时,该通信接口可以是输入/输出接口。In another implementation manner, the communication device is a chip configured in a terminal device. When the communication device is a chip configured in a terminal device, the communication interface may be an input/output interface.
可选地,该收发器可以为收发电路。可选地,该输入/输出接口可以为输入/输出电路。Optionally, the transceiver may be a transceiver circuit. Optionally, the input/output interface may be an input/output circuit.
第五方面,提供了一种通信装置,包括用于执行第二方面以及第二方面中任一种可能实现方式中的方法的各个模块或单元。In a fifth aspect, a communication device is provided, which includes modules or units for executing the second aspect and the method in any one of the possible implementation manners of the second aspect.
具体地,该通信装置包括:处理单元和收发单元。收发单元用于接收CSI报告;该CSI报告包括K 1个加权系数的量化信息和第一指示信息;其中,该K 1个加权系数为幅度非零的加权系数,该K 1个加权系数用于构建与一个或多个频域单元对应的预编码矩阵;该第一指示信息用于指示该K 1个加权系数是否为该装置基于预配置的加权系数上报个数K 0所确定的所有幅度非零的加权系数,该装置基于K 0所确定的所有幅度非零的加权系数的个数为K 2,K 1≤K 2≤K 0,K 0、K 1和K 2均为正整数;处理单元用于根据所述CSI报告确定K 1个加权系数以及该K 1个加权系数是否为所述装置基于预配置的加权系数上报个数K 0所确定的所有幅度非零的加权系数。 Specifically, the communication device includes a processing unit and a transceiver unit. The transceiver unit is used to receive a CSI report; the CSI report includes quantization information of K 1 weighting coefficients and first indication information; wherein, the K 1 weighting coefficients are weighting coefficients with a non-zero amplitude, and the K 1 weighting coefficients are used for Construct a precoding matrix corresponding to one or more frequency domain units; the first indication information is used to indicate whether the K 1 weighting coefficients are all the amplitudes determined by the device based on the number of pre-configured weighting coefficient reports K 0 weighting coefficients to zero, the magnitude of the apparatus based on the number of all nonzero weighting coefficient K 0 is determined as K 2, K 1 ≤K 2 ≤K 0, K 0, K 1 and K 2 are positive integers; processing The unit is configured to determine K 1 weighting coefficients and whether the K 1 weighting coefficients are all weighting coefficients with a non-zero amplitude determined by the device based on the number K 0 of weighting coefficients reported by the device according to the CSI report.
第六方面,提供了一种通信装置,包括处理器。该处理器与存储器耦合,可用于执行存储器中的指令,以实现上述第二方面以及第二方面中任一种可能实现方式中的方法。可选地,该通信装置还包括存储器。可选地,该通信装置还包括通信接口,处理器与通信接口耦合。In a sixth aspect, a communication device is provided, including a processor. The processor is coupled with the memory and can be used to execute instructions in the memory to implement the foregoing second aspect and the method in any one of the possible implementation manners of the second aspect. Optionally, the communication device further includes a memory. Optionally, the communication device further includes a communication interface, and the processor is coupled with the communication interface.
在一种实现方式中,该通信装置为网络设备。当该通信装置为网络设备时,所述通信接口可以是收发器,或,输入/输出接口。In one implementation, the communication device is a network device. When the communication device is a network device, the communication interface may be a transceiver, or an input/output interface.
在另一种实现方式中,该通信装置为配置于网络设备中的芯片。当该通信装置为配置于网络设备中的芯片时,所述通信接口可以是输入/输出接口。In another implementation manner, the communication device is a chip configured in a network device. When the communication device is a chip configured in a network device, the communication interface may be an input/output interface.
可选地,所述收发器可以为收发电路。可选地,所述输入/输出接口可以为输入/输出电路。Optionally, the transceiver may be a transceiver circuit. Optionally, the input/output interface may be an input/output circuit.
第七方面,提供了一种处理器,包括:输入电路、输出电路和处理电路。所述处理电路用于通过所述输入电路接收信号,并通过所述输出电路发射信号,使得所述处理器执行第一方面至第二方面以及第一方面至第二方面中任一种可能实现方式中的方法。In a seventh aspect, a processor is provided, including: an input circuit, an output circuit, and a processing circuit. The processing circuit is configured to receive a signal through the input circuit and transmit a signal through the output circuit, so that the processor executes any one of the first aspect to the second aspect and the first aspect to the second aspect. The method in the way.
在具体实现过程中,上述处理器可以为一个或多个芯片,输入电路可以为输入管脚,输出电路可以为输出管脚,处理电路可以为晶体管、门电路、触发器和各种逻辑电路等。 输入电路所接收的输入的信号可以是由例如但不限于接收器接收并输入的,输出电路所输出的信号可以是例如但不限于输出给发射器并由发射器发射的,且输入电路和输出电路可以是同一电路,该电路在不同的时刻分别用作输入电路和输出电路。本申请实施例对处理器及各种电路的具体实现方式不做限定。In the specific implementation process, the above-mentioned processor can be one or more chips, the input circuit can be an input pin, the output circuit can be an output pin, and the processing circuit can be a transistor, a gate circuit, a flip-flop, and various logic circuits, etc. . The input signal received by the input circuit may be received and input by, for example, but not limited to, a receiver, and the signal output by the output circuit may be, for example, but not limited to, output to and transmitted by the transmitter, and the input circuit and output The circuit can be the same circuit, which is used as an input circuit and an output circuit at different times. The embodiments of the present application do not limit the specific implementation manners of the processor and various circuits.
第八方面,提供了一种处理装置,包括处理器和存储器。该处理器用于读取存储器中存储的指令,并可通过接收器接收信号,通过发射器发射信号,以执行第一方面至第二方面以及第一方面至第二方面中任一种可能实现方式中的方法。In an eighth aspect, a processing device is provided, including a processor and a memory. The processor is used to read instructions stored in the memory, receive signals through a receiver, and transmit signals through a transmitter to execute any one of the first aspect to the second aspect and the first aspect to the second aspect. Method in.
可选地,所述处理器为一个或多个,所述存储器为一个或多个。Optionally, there are one or more processors and one or more memories.
可选地,所述存储器可以与所述处理器集成在一起,或者所述存储器与处理器分离设置。Optionally, the memory may be integrated with the processor, or the memory and the processor may be provided separately.
在具体实现过程中,存储器可以为非瞬时性(non-transitory)存储器,例如只读存储器(read only memory,ROM),其可以与处理器集成在同一块芯片上,也可以分别设置在不同的芯片上,本申请实施例对存储器的类型以及存储器与处理器的设置方式不做限定。In the specific implementation process, the memory can be a non-transitory (non-transitory) memory, such as a read only memory (ROM), which can be integrated with the processor on the same chip, or can be set in different On the chip, the embodiment of the present application does not limit the type of memory and the setting mode of the memory and the processor.
应理解,相关的数据交互过程例如发送指示信息可以为从处理器输出指示信息的过程,接收能力信息可以为处理器接收输入能力信息的过程。具体地,处理器输出的数据可以输出给发射器,处理器接收的输入数据可以来自接收器。其中,发射器和接收器可以统称为收发器。It should be understood that the related data interaction process, for example, sending instruction information may be a process of outputting instruction information from the processor, and receiving capability information may be a process of the processor receiving input capability information. Specifically, the data output by the processor can be output to the transmitter, and the input data received by the processor can come from the receiver. Among them, the transmitter and receiver can be collectively referred to as a transceiver.
上述第八方面中的处理装置可以是一个或多个芯片。该处理装置中的处理器可以通过硬件来实现也可以通过软件来实现。当通过硬件实现时,该处理器可以是逻辑电路、集成电路等;当通过软件来实现时,该处理器可以是一个通用处理器,通过读取存储器中存储的软件代码来实现,该存储器可以集成在处理器中,可以位于该处理器之外,独立存在。The processing device in the above eighth aspect may be one or more chips. The processor in the processing device can be implemented by hardware or software. When implemented by hardware, the processor may be a logic circuit, integrated circuit, etc.; when implemented by software, the processor may be a general-purpose processor, which is implemented by reading software codes stored in the memory, and the memory may Integrated in the processor, can be located outside of the processor, and exist independently.
第九方面,提供了一种计算机程序产品,所述计算机程序产品包括:计算机程序(也可以称为代码,或指令),当所述计算机程序被运行时,使得计算机执行上述第一方面至第二方面以及第一方面至第二方面中任一种可能实现方式中的方法。In a ninth aspect, a computer program product is provided. The computer program product includes: a computer program (also called code, or instruction), which when the computer program is executed, causes the computer to execute the first aspect to the first aspect. The method in the second aspect and any one of the possible implementation manners of the first aspect to the second aspect.
第十方面,提供了一种计算机可读介质,所述计算机可读介质存储有计算机程序(也可以称为代码,或指令)当其在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行上述第一方面至第二方面以及第一方面至第二方面中任一种可能实现方式中的方法。In a tenth aspect, a computer-readable medium is provided, and the computer-readable medium stores a computer program (also called code, or instruction) when it runs on a computer, so that the computer executes the first aspect to the first aspect. The method in the second aspect and any one of the possible implementation manners of the first aspect to the second aspect.
第十一方面,提供了一种通信系统,包括前述的网络设备和终端设备。In an eleventh aspect, a communication system is provided, including the aforementioned network equipment and terminal equipment.
附图说明Description of the drawings
图1是适用于本申请实施例提供的用于构建预编码矩阵的系数指示方法的通信系统的示意图;FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of a communication system suitable for a coefficient indication method for constructing a precoding matrix provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图2是本申请一实施例提供的用于构建预编码矩阵的系数指示方法的示意性流程图;FIG. 2 is a schematic flowchart of a coefficient indicating method for constructing a precoding matrix provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图3是本申请实施例提供的通信装置的示意性框图;FIG. 3 is a schematic block diagram of a communication device provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图4是本申请实施例提供的终端设备的结构示意图;Figure 4 is a schematic structural diagram of a terminal device provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图5是本申请实施例提供的网络设备的结构示意图。Figure 5 is a schematic structural diagram of a network device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
具体实施方式Detailed ways
下面将结合附图,对本申请中的技术方案进行描述。The technical solution in this application will be described below in conjunction with the drawings.
本申请实施例的技术方案可以应用于各种通信系统,例如:全球移动通信(global system for mobile communications,GSM)系统、码分多址(code division multiple access,CDMA)系统、宽带码分多址(wideband code division multiple access,WCDMA)系统、通用分组无线业务(general packet radio service,GPRS)、长期演进(long term evolution,LTE)系统、LTE频分双工(frequency division duplex,FDD)系统、LTE时分双工(time division duplex,TDD)、通用移动通信系统(universal mobile telecommunication system,UMTS)、全球互联微波接入(worldwide interoperability for microwave access,WiMAX)通信系统、未来的第五代(5th generation,5G)系统或新无线(new radio,NR)、车到其它设备(vehicle-to-X V2X),其中V2X可以包括车到互联网(vehicle to network,V2N)、车到车(vehicle to-vehicle,V2V)、车到基础设施(vehicle to infrastructure,V2I)、车到行人(vehicle to pedestrian,V2P)等、车间通信长期演进技术(long term evolution-vehicle,LTE-V)、车联网、机器类通信(machine type communication,MTC)、物联网(Internet of things,IoT)、机器间通信长期演进技术(long term evolution-machine,LTE-M),机器到机器(machine to machine,M2M)等。The technical solutions of the embodiments of this application can be applied to various communication systems, such as: global system for mobile communications (GSM) system, code division multiple access (CDMA) system, broadband code division multiple access (wideband code division multiple access, WCDMA) system, general packet radio service (GPRS), long term evolution (LTE) system, LTE frequency division duplex (FDD) system, LTE Time division duplex (TDD), universal mobile telecommunication system (UMTS), worldwide interoperability for microwave access (WiMAX) communication system, the future fifth generation (5th generation, 5G) system or new radio (NR), vehicle-to-X V2X, where V2X can include vehicle-to-network (V2N) and vehicle-to-vehicle (V2N), V2V), vehicle to infrastructure (V2I), vehicle to pedestrian (V2P), etc., long term evolution-vehicle (LTE-V), vehicle networking, machine-type communications, etc. (machine type communication, MTC), Internet of things (IoT), long term evolution-machine (LTE-M), machine to machine (M2M), etc.
为便于理解本申请实施例,首先以图1中示出的通信系统为例详细说明适用于本申请实施例的通信系统。图1是适用于本申请实施例的用于构建预编码矩阵的系数指示方法的通信系统100的示意图。如图1所示,该通信系统100可以包括至少一个网络设备,例如图1所示的网络设备110;该通信系统100还可以包括至少一个终端设备,例如图1所示的终端设备120。网络设备110与终端设备120可通过无线链路通信。各通信设备,如网络设备110或终端设备120,均可以配置多个天线。对于该通信系统100中的每一个通信设备而言,所配置的多个天线可以包括至少一个用于发送信号的发射天线和至少一个用于接收信号的接收天线。因此,该通信系统100中的各通信设备之间,如网络设备110与终端设备120之间,可通过多天线技术通信。To facilitate the understanding of the embodiments of the present application, first, the communication system shown in FIG. 1 is taken as an example to describe in detail the communication system applicable to the embodiments of the present application. FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of a communication system 100 applicable to an embodiment of the present application for constructing a coefficient indication method of a precoding matrix. As shown in FIG. 1, the communication system 100 may include at least one network device, such as the network device 110 shown in FIG. 1; the communication system 100 may also include at least one terminal device, such as the terminal device 120 shown in FIG. 1. The network device 110 and the terminal device 120 may communicate through a wireless link. Each communication device, such as the network device 110 or the terminal device 120, can be equipped with multiple antennas. For each communication device in the communication system 100, the configured multiple antennas may include at least one transmitting antenna for transmitting signals and at least one receiving antenna for receiving signals. Therefore, the communication devices in the communication system 100, such as the network device 110 and the terminal device 120, can communicate through multi-antenna technology.
应理解,该通信系统中的网络设备可以是任意一种具有无线收发功能的设备。该网络设备包括但不限于:演进型节点B(evolved Node B,eNB)、无线网络控制器(radio network controller,RNC)、节点B(Node B,NB)、基站控制器(base station controller,BSC)、基站收发台(base transceiver station,BTS)、家庭基站(例如,home evolved NodeB,或home Node B,HNB)、基带单元(baseband unit,BBU),无线保真(wireless fidelity,WiFi)系统中的接入点(access point,AP)、无线中继节点、无线回传节点、传输点(transmission point,TP)或者发送接收点(transmission and reception point,TRP)等,还可以为5G,如,NR,系统中的gNB,或,传输点(TRP或TP),5G系统中的基站的一个或一组(包括多个天线面板)天线面板,或者,还可以为构成gNB或传输点的网络节点,如基带单元(BBU),或,分布式单元(distributed unit,DU)等。It should be understood that the network device in the communication system may be any device with a wireless transceiver function. The network equipment includes but not limited to: evolved Node B (eNB), radio network controller (RNC), Node B (NB), base station controller (BSC) ), base transceiver station (BTS), home base station (for example, home evolved NodeB, or home Node B, HNB), baseband unit (BBU), wireless fidelity (WiFi) systems The access point (AP), wireless relay node, wireless backhaul node, transmission point (TP) or transmission and reception point (TRP), etc., can also be 5G, for example, NR, gNB in the system, or transmission point (TRP or TP), one or a group of antenna panels (including multiple antenna panels) of the base station in the 5G system, or it can also be a network node that constitutes a gNB or transmission point , Such as baseband unit (BBU), or distributed unit (DU), etc.
在一些部署中,gNB可以包括集中式单元(centralized unit,CU)和DU。gNB还可以包括有源天线单元(active antenna unit,简称AAU)。CU实现gNB的部分功能,DU实现gNB的部分功能,比如,CU负责处理非实时协议和服务,实现无线资源控制(radio resource control,RRC),分组数据汇聚层协议(packet data convergence protocol,PDCP)层的功能。DU负责处理物理层协议和实时服务,实现无线链路控制(radio link control, RLC)层、媒体接入控制(media access control,MAC)层和物理(physical,PHY)层的功能。AAU实现部分物理层处理功能、射频处理及有源天线的相关功能。由于RRC层的信息最终会变成PHY层的信息,或者,由PHY层的信息转变而来,因而,在这种架构下,高层信令,如RRC层信令,也可以认为是由DU发送的,或者,由DU+AAU发送的。可以理解的是,网络设备可以为包括CU节点、DU节点、AAU节点中一项或多项的设备。此外,可以将CU划分为接入网(radio access network,RAN)中的网络设备,也可以将CU划分为核心网(core network,CN)中的网络设备,本申请对此不做限定。In some deployments, the gNB may include a centralized unit (CU) and a DU. The gNB may also include an active antenna unit (AAU for short). CU implements some functions of gNB, and DU implements some functions of gNB. For example, CU is responsible for processing non-real-time protocols and services, implementing radio resource control (RRC), and packet data convergence protocol (PDCP) The function of the layer. The DU is responsible for processing physical layer protocols and real-time services, and realizes the functions of the radio link control (radio link control, RLC) layer, media access control (MAC) layer, and physical (physical, PHY) layer. AAU realizes some physical layer processing functions, radio frequency processing and related functions of active antennas. Since the information of the RRC layer will eventually become the information of the PHY layer, or be transformed from the information of the PHY layer, under this architecture, high-level signaling, such as RRC layer signaling, can also be considered to be sent by DU , Or, sent by DU+AAU. It can be understood that the network device may be a device that includes one or more of a CU node, a DU node, and an AAU node. In addition, the CU can be divided into network equipment in an access network (radio access network, RAN), or the CU can be divided into network equipment in a core network (core network, CN), which is not limited in this application.
还应理解,该无线通信系统中的终端设备也可以称为用户设备(user equipment,UE)、接入终端、用户单元、用户站、移动站、移动台、远方站、远程终端、移动设备、用户终端、终端、无线通信设备、用户代理或用户装置。本申请的实施例中的终端设备可以是手机(mobile phone)、平板电脑(pad)、带无线收发功能的电脑、虚拟现实(virtual reality,VR)终端设备、增强现实(augmented reality,AR)终端设备、工业控制(industrial control)中的无线终端、无人驾驶(self driving)中的无线终端、远程医疗(remote medical)中的无线终端、智能电网(smart grid)中的无线终端、运输安全(transportation safety)中的无线终端、智慧城市(smart city)中的无线终端、智慧家庭(smart home)中的无线终端、配置在交通工具中的移动终端等等。本申请的实施例对应用场景不做限定。It should also be understood that the terminal equipment in the wireless communication system may also be referred to as user equipment (UE), access terminal, user unit, user station, mobile station, mobile station, remote station, remote terminal, mobile equipment, User terminal, terminal, wireless communication device, user agent or user device. The terminal device in the embodiment of the present application may be a mobile phone (mobile phone), a tablet computer (pad), a computer with wireless transceiver function, a virtual reality (VR) terminal device, and an augmented reality (AR) terminal Equipment, wireless terminals in industrial control, wireless terminals in unmanned driving (self-driving), wireless terminals in remote medical, wireless terminals in smart grid, transportation safety ( Wireless terminals in transportation safety, wireless terminals in smart cities, wireless terminals in smart homes, mobile terminals configured in transportation, and so on. The embodiment of this application does not limit the application scenario.
还应理解,图1仅为便于理解而示例的简化示意图,该通信系统100中还可以包括其他网络设备或者还可以包括其他终端设备,图1中未予以画出。It should also be understood that FIG. 1 is only a simplified schematic diagram of an example for ease of understanding, and the communication system 100 may also include other network devices or other terminal devices, which are not shown in FIG. 1.
为了便于理解本申请实施例,下面简单说明下行信号在发送之前在物理层的处理过程。应理解,下文所描述的对下行信号的处理过程可以由网络设备执行,也可以由配置于网络设备中的芯片执行。为方便说明,下文统称为网络设备。To facilitate the understanding of the embodiments of the present application, the following briefly describes the processing procedure of the downlink signal at the physical layer before transmission. It should be understood that the processing of the downlink signal described below may be executed by a network device, or may be executed by a chip configured in the network device. For the convenience of description, the following are collectively referred to as network devices.
网络设备在物理信道可对码字(code word)进行处理。其中,码字可以为经过编码(例如包括信道编码)的编码比特。码字经过加扰(scrambling),生成加扰比特。加扰比特经过调制映射(modulation mapping),得到调制符号。调制符号经过层映射(layer mapping),被映射到多个层(layer),或者称,传输层。经过层映射后的调制符号经过预编码(precoding),得到预编码后的信号。预编码后的信号经过资源元素(resource element,RE)映射后,被映射到多个RE上。这些RE随后经过正交复用(orthogonal frequency division multiplexing,OFDM)调制后通过天线端口(antenna port)发射出去。Network equipment can process code words on physical channels. The codeword may be coded bits that have been coded (for example, including channel coding). The codeword is scrambling to generate scrambled bits. The scrambled bits undergo modulation mapping (modulation mapping) to obtain modulation symbols. Modulation symbols are mapped to multiple layers, or transmission layers, through layer mapping. The modulation symbols after layer mapping are precoding (precoding) to obtain a precoded signal. The precoded signal is mapped to multiple REs after resource element (resource element, RE) mapping. These REs are then modulated by orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM) and then transmitted through an antenna port (antenna port).
应理解,上文所描述的对下行信号的处理过程仅为示例性描述,不应对本申请构成任何限定。对下行信号的处理过程具体可以参考现有技术,为了简洁,这里省略对其具体过程的详细说明。It should be understood that the processing procedure for the downlink signal described above is only an exemplary description, and should not constitute any limitation to this application. For the processing process of the downlink signal, reference may be made to the prior art. For brevity, detailed description of the specific process is omitted here.
为了便于理解本申请实施例,下面先对本申请实施例中涉及的术语做简单说明。In order to facilitate the understanding of the embodiments of the present application, the terms involved in the embodiments of the present application are briefly described below.
1、预编码技术:发送设备(如网络设备)可以在已知信道状态的情况下,借助与信道状态相匹配的预编码矩阵来对待发送信号进行处理,使得经过预编码的待发送信号与信道相适配,从而使得接收设备(如终端设备)消除信道间影响的复杂度降低。因此,通过对待发送信号的预编码处理,接收信号质量(例如信号与干扰加噪声比(signal to interference plus noise ratio,SINR)等)得以提升。因此,采用预编码技术,可以实现发送设备与多个接收设备在相同的时频资源上传输,也就是实现了多用户多输入多输出(multiple user multiple input multiple output,MU-MIMO)。1. Precoding technology: the sending device (such as network equipment) can process the signal to be sent by using a precoding matrix that matches the channel state when the channel state is known, so that the precoded signal to be sent and the channel Adaptation, thereby reducing the complexity of the receiving device (such as the terminal device) to eliminate the influence between channels. Therefore, through the precoding processing of the signal to be transmitted, the quality of the received signal (for example, the signal to interference plus noise ratio (SINR), etc.) can be improved. Therefore, the use of precoding technology can realize transmission on the same time-frequency resource between the sending device and multiple receiving devices, that is, realizing multiple user multiple input multiple output (MU-MIMO).
应理解,有关预编码技术的相关描述仅为便于理解而示例,并非用于限制本申请实施例的保护范围。在具体实现过程中,发送设备还可以通过其他方式进行预编码。例如,在无法获知信道信息(例如但不限于信道矩阵)的情况下,采用预先设置的预编码矩阵或者加权处理方式进行预编码等。为了简洁,其具体内容本文不再赘述。It should be understood that the related description of the precoding technology is only an example for ease of understanding, and is not used to limit the protection scope of the embodiments of the present application. In a specific implementation process, the sending device may also perform precoding in other ways. For example, when channel information (such as but not limited to a channel matrix) cannot be obtained, precoding is performed using a preset precoding matrix or a weighting processing method. For the sake of brevity, its specific content will not be repeated in this article.
2、信道状态信息报告(CSI report):也可以简称为CSI。在无线通信系统中,由接收端(如终端设备)向发送端(如网络设备)上报的用于描述通信链路的信道属性的信息。CSI报告中例如可以包括但不限于,预编码矩阵指示(precoding matrix indicator,PMI)、秩指示(rank indication,RI)、信道质量指示(channel quality indicator,CQI)、信道状态信息参考信号(channel state information reference signal,CSI-RS资源指示(CSI-RS resource indicator,CRI)以及层指示(layer indicator,LI)等。应理解,以上列举的CSI的具体内容仅为示例性说明,不应对本申请构成任何限定。CSI可以包括上文所列举的一项或多项,也可以包括除上述列举之外的其他用于表征CSI的信息,本申请对此不作限定。2. Channel state information report (CSI report): It can also be referred to as CSI for short. In a wireless communication system, the information used to describe the channel attributes of the communication link reported by the receiving end (such as a terminal device) to the sending end (such as a network device). The CSI report may include, but is not limited to, precoding matrix indicator (PMI), rank indicator (rank indicator, RI), channel quality indicator (CQI), and channel state information reference signal (channel state information). information reference signal, CSI-RS resource indicator (CSI-RS resource indicator, CRI) and layer indicator (layer indicator, LI), etc. It should be understood that the specific content of the CSI listed above is only exemplary and should not constitute this application Any limitation. The CSI may include one or more of the above-listed, and may also include other information used to characterize the CSI in addition to the above-listed, which is not limited in this application.
以终端设备向网络设备上报CSI为例。终端设备可以在一个时间单元(如时隙(slot))内上报一个或多个CSI报告,每个CSI报告可以对应一种CSI上报的配置条件。该CSI上报的配置条件例如可以由高层信令(如无线资源控制(resource control,RRC)消息中的信息元素(information element,IE)CSI上报配置(CSI-ReportingConfig))来确定。该CSI上报配置可用于指示CSI上报的时域行为、带宽以及与上报量(report quantity)对应的格式等。其中,时域行为例如包括周期性(periodic)、半持续性(semi-persistent)和非周期性(aperiodic)。终端设备可以基于一个CSI上报配置生成一个CSI报告。Take terminal equipment reporting CSI to network equipment as an example. The terminal device may report one or more CSI reports in a time unit (such as a slot), and each CSI report may correspond to a configuration condition for CSI reporting. The configuration condition of the CSI report can be determined by, for example, high-level signaling (such as an information element (IE) CSI reporting configuration (CSI-ReportingConfig) in a radio resource control (resource control, RRC) message). The CSI report configuration can be used to indicate the time domain behavior, bandwidth, and format corresponding to the report quantity of the CSI report. Among them, the time domain behavior includes, for example, periodic, semi-persistent, and aperiodic. The terminal device can generate a CSI report based on a CSI report configuration.
在本申请实施例中,终端设备在生成CSI报告时,可以将CSI报告中的内容分为两部分。例如,CSI报告可以包括第一部分和第二部分。第一部分也可以称为部分1(part 1)。第二部分也可以称为部分2(part 2)。第一部分和第二部分可以是独立编码的。其中,第一部分的净荷(payload)大小(size)可以是预先定义的,第二部分的净荷大小可以根据第一部分中所携带的信息来确定。In the embodiment of the present application, when the terminal device generates the CSI report, the content in the CSI report may be divided into two parts. For example, the CSI report may include a first part and a second part. The first part can also be called part 1 (part 1). The second part can also be called part 2 (part 2). The first part and the second part can be coded independently. Wherein, the payload size of the first part may be predefined, and the payload size of the second part may be determined according to the information carried in the first part.
网络设备可以根据预先定义的第一部分的净荷大小解码第一部分,以获取第一部分中携带的信息。网络设备可以根据从第一部分中获取的信息确定第二部分的净荷大小,进而解码第二部分,以获取第二部分中携带的信息。The network device may decode the first part according to the pre-defined payload size of the first part to obtain the information carried in the first part. The network device may determine the payload size of the second part according to the information obtained from the first part, and then decode the second part to obtain the information carried in the second part.
在本申请实施例中,“净荷大小”与“长度”、“开销”、“比特开销”等经常交替使用,下文中在所作出特别说明的情况下,其所表达的含义是一致的。In the embodiments of the present application, "payload size" and "length", "overhead", "bit overhead", etc. are often used interchangeably, and the meanings expressed are the same in the case of special instructions below.
应理解,该第一部分和第二部分类似于NR协议TS38.214版本15(release 15,R15)中定义的CSI的部分1(part 1)和部分2(part 2)。It should be understood that the first part and the second part are similar to part 1 (part 1) and part 2 (part 2) of the CSI defined in the NR protocol TS38.214 version 15 (release 15, R15).
还应理解,由于本申请实施例主要涉及PMI的上报,下文实施例中对CSI报告的第一部分和第二部分中内容的列举仅涉及PMI的相关信息,而未涉及其他。但应理解,这不应对本申请构成任何限定。除了在下文实施例中所列举的CSI报告的第一部分和第二部分所包含或指示的信息外,CSI报告的第一部分还可以包括CQI和LI中的一项或多项,或者,还可以包括其他可预先定义反馈开销的信息,CSI报告的第二部分也可以包括其他信息。本申请对此不作限定。It should also be understood that, since the embodiments of the present application mainly relate to PMI reporting, the listing of the contents in the first part and the second part of the CSI report in the following embodiments only relates to PMI related information, and does not involve other information. However, it should be understood that this should not constitute any limitation to this application. In addition to the information contained or indicated in the first part and the second part of the CSI report listed in the following embodiments, the first part of the CSI report may also include one or more of CQI and LI, or may also include Other information about the feedback overhead can be predefined, and the second part of the CSI report can also include other information. This application does not limit this.
还应理解,第一部分和第二部分仅为便于区分而命名,不应对本申请构成任何限定。本申请也不排除在未来的协议中将该第一部分和第二部分定义其他名称的可能。It should also be understood that the first part and the second part are named only for easy distinction, and should not constitute any limitation to the application. This application does not rule out the possibility of defining other names for the first and second parts in future agreements.
3、预编码矩阵指示(PMI):可用于指示预编码矩阵。其中,该预编码矩阵例如可以是终端设备基于各个频域单元的信道矩阵确定的预编码矩阵。该信道矩阵可以是终端设备通过信道估计等方式或者基于信道互易性确定。但应理解,终端设备确定预编码矩阵的具体方法并不限于上文所述,具体实现方式可参考现有技术,为了简洁,这里不再一一列举。3. Precoding matrix indication (PMI): can be used to indicate the precoding matrix. Wherein, the precoding matrix may be, for example, a precoding matrix determined by the terminal device based on the channel matrix of each frequency domain unit. The channel matrix may be determined by the terminal equipment through channel estimation or other methods or based on channel reciprocity. However, it should be understood that the specific method for the terminal device to determine the precoding matrix is not limited to the above, and the specific implementation can refer to the prior art. For brevity, it will not be listed here.
例如,预编码矩阵可以通过对信道矩阵或信道矩阵的协方差矩阵进行奇异值分解(singular value decomposition,SVD)的方式获得,或者,也可以通过对信道矩阵的协方差矩阵进行特征值分解(eigenvalue decopomsition,EVD)的方式获得。应理解,上文中列举的预编码矩阵的确定方式仅为示例,不应对本申请构成任何限定。预编码矩阵的确定方式可以参考现有技术,为了简洁,这里不再一一列举。For example, the precoding matrix can be obtained by performing singular value decomposition (SVD) on the channel matrix or the covariance matrix of the channel matrix, or it can be obtained by performing eigenvalue decomposition (eigenvalue decomposition) on the covariance matrix of the channel matrix. decopomsition, EVD). It should be understood that the method for determining the precoding matrix listed above is only an example, and should not constitute any limitation to this application. The method for determining the precoding matrix can refer to the prior art. For brevity, it will not be listed here.
需要说明的是,由本申请实施例提供的方法,网络设备可以基于终端设备的反馈确定与一个或多个频域单元对应的预编码矩阵。网络设备由此而确定的预编码矩阵可以直接用于下行数据传输;也可以经过一些波束成形方法,例如包括迫零(zero forcing,ZF)、正则化迫零(regularized zero-forcing,RZF)、最小均方误差(minimum mean-squared error,MMSE)、最大化信漏噪比(signal-to-leakage-and-noise,SLNR)等,以得到最终用于下行数据传输的预编码矩阵。本申请对此不作限定。在未作出特别说明的情况下,下文中所涉及的预编码矩阵均可以是指基于本申请提供的方法所确定的预编码矩阵。It should be noted that in the method provided by the embodiment of the present application, the network device may determine the precoding matrix corresponding to one or more frequency domain units based on the feedback of the terminal device. The precoding matrix determined by the network equipment can be directly used for downlink data transmission; it can also undergo some beamforming methods, such as zero forcing (ZF), regularized zero-forcing (RZF), Minimum mean-squared error (MMSE), maximum signal-to-leakage-and-noise (SLNR), etc., to obtain the final precoding matrix for downlink data transmission. This application does not limit this. Unless otherwise specified, the precoding matrixes involved in the following may all refer to the precoding matrixes determined based on the method provided in this application.
可以理解的是,终端设备所确定的预编码矩阵可以理解为待反馈的预编码矩阵。终端设备可以通过PMI指示待反馈的预编码矩阵,以便于网络设备基于PMI恢复出该预编码矩阵。网络设备基于该PMI恢复出的预编码矩阵可以与上述待反馈的预编码矩阵相同或相近。It can be understood that the precoding matrix determined by the terminal device can be understood as the precoding matrix to be fed back. The terminal device can indicate the precoding matrix to be fed back through the PMI, so that the network device can recover the precoding matrix based on the PMI. The precoding matrix recovered by the network device based on the PMI may be the same or similar to the foregoing precoding matrix to be fed back.
在下行信道测量中,网络设备根据PMI确定出的预编码矩阵与终端设备所确定的预编码矩阵的近似度越高,其确定出的用于数据传输的预编码矩阵也就越能够与下行信道相适配,因此也就能够提高信号的传输质量。In downlink channel measurement, the higher the similarity between the precoding matrix determined by the network device according to the PMI and the precoding matrix determined by the terminal device, the better the precoding matrix determined by the network device for data transmission can match the downlink channel Therefore, the signal transmission quality can be improved.
还需要说明的是,本申请对于终端设备确定待反馈的预编码矩阵和网络设备根据反馈恢复预编码矩阵的具体方法不作限定。It should also be noted that this application does not limit the specific method for the terminal device to determine the precoding matrix to be fed back and the network device to restore the precoding matrix according to the feedback.
例如,终端设备可以通过双域压缩的反馈方式将待反馈的预编码矩阵通过空频向量对的加权来拟合,并将每个空频向量对中的空域向量和频域向量以及与空频向量对对应的加权系数反馈给网络设备。网络设备可以基于相对应的方式构建与各频域单元对应的预编码矩阵。关于双域压缩的具体过程下文中会做详细说明,这里暂且省略对该具体过程的详细描述。For example, the terminal device can fit the precoding matrix to be fed back by the weighting of the space-frequency vector pair through the feedback mode of dual-domain compression, and combine the space vector and the frequency domain vector in each space-frequency vector pair with the space-frequency vector. The weighting coefficient corresponding to the vector pair is fed back to the network device. The network device may construct a precoding matrix corresponding to each frequency domain unit based on a corresponding method. The specific process of dual-domain compression will be described in detail below, and the detailed description of the specific process is omitted here.
又例如,终端设备可以通过现有协议中定义的类型II(type II)码本的反馈方式,将待反馈的预编码矩阵通过波束向量的加权来拟合,并将波束向量以及相对应的宽带系数和子带系数反馈给网络设备。网络设备可以基于相对应的方式构建与各频域单元对应的预编码矩阵。关于type II码本的反馈方式具体可参考NR协议TS38.214版本15(release 15,R15)中的相关描述,为了简洁,本文不作详细描述。For another example, the terminal device can use the type II (type II) codebook feedback mode defined in the existing protocol to fit the precoding matrix to be fed back by the weighting of the beam vector, and fit the beam vector and the corresponding broadband The coefficients and subband coefficients are fed back to the network equipment. The network device may construct a precoding matrix corresponding to each frequency domain unit based on a corresponding method. Regarding the feedback method of the type II codebook, please refer to the relevant description in the NR protocol TS38.214 version 15 (release 15, R15). For the sake of brevity, this article will not describe it in detail.
再例如,终端设备还可以通过其他可能的方式来将待反馈的预编码矩阵反馈给网络设备。例如,终端设备可以基于预编码参考信号来进行信道测量,基于信道测量所确定的待反馈的预编码矩阵可以通过多个参考信号端口的加权来拟合,并将每个参考信号端口以及 每个参考信号端口对应的加权系数反馈给网络设备。网络设备可以基于相对应的方式构建与各频域单元对应的预编码矩阵。其中,每个参考信号端口所对应的预编码参考信号可以是基于一个空域向量和一个频域向量预编码得到,因此对端口的加权的实质也就是对空频向量对的加权。另外,本申请对于参考信号端口与空域向量、频域向量的对应关系不作限定。For another example, the terminal device may also feed back the precoding matrix to be fed back to the network device in other possible ways. For example, the terminal device can perform channel measurement based on the precoding reference signal, and the precoding matrix to be fed back determined based on the channel measurement can be fitted by the weighting of multiple reference signal ports, and each reference signal port and each The weighting coefficient corresponding to the reference signal port is fed back to the network device. The network device may construct a precoding matrix corresponding to each frequency domain unit based on a corresponding method. Wherein, the precoding reference signal corresponding to each reference signal port can be obtained by precoding based on a space vector and a frequency vector. Therefore, the weight of the port is essentially the weight of the space-frequency vector pair. In addition, the present application does not limit the correspondence between the reference signal port and the spatial vector and frequency domain vector.
应理解,上文列举的终端设备基于波束的加权来指示待反馈的预编码矩阵的方法仅为示例,不应对本申请构成任何限定。It should be understood that the above-listed method for the terminal device to indicate the precoding matrix to be fed back based on the weight of the beam is only an example, and should not constitute any limitation in this application.
4、频域单元:频域资源的单位,可表示不同的频域资源粒度。频域单元例如可以包括但不限于,信道质量指示(channel quality indicator,CQI)子带(subband)、CQI子带的1/R、资源块(resource block,RB)、子载波、资源块组(resource block group,RBG)或预编码资源块组(precoding resource block group,PRG)等。其中,R为正整数。R的取值例如可以为1或2。4. Frequency domain unit: A unit of frequency domain resources, which can represent different granularity of frequency domain resources. Frequency domain units may include, but are not limited to, for example, channel quality indicator (CQI) subband, 1/R of CQI subband, resource block (resource block, RB), subcarrier, resource block group ( resource block group (RBG) or precoding resource block group (PRG), etc. Among them, R is a positive integer. The value of R can be 1 or 2, for example.
在本申请实施例中,PMI可用于指示与频域单元对应的预编码矩阵,该频域单元也可以称为PMI子带。其中,R可以表示CQI子带的粒度与PMI子带的粒度的比值。当R为1时,即一个CQI子带的粒度与一个PMI子带的粒度相同;当R为2时,即一个CQI子带的粒度为一个PMI子带的粒度的两倍。In the embodiment of the present application, the PMI may be used to indicate a precoding matrix corresponding to a frequency domain unit, and the frequency domain unit may also be referred to as a PMI subband. Wherein, R may represent the ratio of the granularity of the CQI subband to the granularity of the PMI subband. When R is 1, the granularity of a CQI subband is the same as the granularity of a PMI subband; when R is 2, the granularity of a CQI subband is twice the granularity of a PMI subband.
需要说明的是,与频域单元对应的预编码矩阵可以是指基于该频域单元上的参考信号进行信道测量和反馈而确定的预编码矩阵。与频域单元对应的预编码矩阵可用于对后续通过该频域单元传输的数据做预编码。下文中,与频域单元对应的预编码矩阵或预编码向量也可以简称为该频域单元的预编码矩阵或预编码向量。It should be noted that the precoding matrix corresponding to the frequency domain unit may refer to a precoding matrix determined by performing channel measurement and feedback based on the reference signal on the frequency domain unit. The precoding matrix corresponding to the frequency domain unit can be used to precode the data subsequently transmitted through the frequency domain unit. Hereinafter, the precoding matrix or precoding vector corresponding to the frequency domain unit may also be referred to simply as the precoding matrix or precoding vector of the frequency domain unit.
5、预编码向量:一个预编码矩阵可以包括一个或多个向量,如列向量。每个列向量可对应一个传输层。换言之,与某一频域单元对应的预编码矩阵可以由基于一个或多个传输层中每个传输层反馈的该频域单元的预编码向量确定。5. Precoding vector: A precoding matrix can include one or more vectors, such as column vectors. Each column vector can correspond to a transport layer. In other words, the precoding matrix corresponding to a certain frequency domain unit may be determined based on the precoding vector of the frequency domain unit fed back from each transmission layer in one or more transmission layers.
以双域压缩为例,将针对不同传输层反馈的空域向量、频域向量和加权系数所构建的同一频域单元的预编码向量进行数学变换,如归一化处理,可以得到该频域单元的预编码矩阵。也就是说,预编码矩阵可以由同一频域单元对应的一个或多个传输层上的预编码向量确定。本申请对于预编码矩阵与预编码向量之间的数学变换关系不作限定。Taking dual-domain compression as an example, the precoding vector of the same frequency domain unit constructed for the spatial vector, frequency domain vector and weighting coefficients fed back from different transmission layers is mathematically transformed, such as normalization processing, to obtain the frequency domain unit The precoding matrix. In other words, the precoding matrix may be determined by the precoding vectors on one or more transmission layers corresponding to the same frequency domain unit. This application does not limit the mathematical transformation relationship between the precoding matrix and the precoding vector.
因此,当传输层数为1时,预编码向量可以是指预编码矩阵。当传输层数大于1时,预编码向量可以是指预编码矩阵在一个传输层上的分量,也可以是该预编码矩阵在一个传输层上的分量进过数学变换而得到的向量。应理解,对预编码矩阵在一个传输层上的分量进行数学变换而得到预编码向量仅为便于描述预编码矩阵和预编码向量的关系而描述,不应对本申请中网络设备和终端设备确定预编码矩阵的过程构成任何限定。Therefore, when the number of transmission layers is 1, the precoding vector may refer to the precoding matrix. When the number of transmission layers is greater than 1, the precoding vector may refer to a component of the precoding matrix on one transmission layer, or it may be a vector obtained by mathematical transformation of the component of the precoding matrix on a transmission layer. It should be understood that the precoding vector obtained by mathematically transforming the components of the precoding matrix on a transmission layer is only described to facilitate the description of the relationship between the precoding matrix and the precoding vector, and the network equipment and terminal equipment in this application should not determine the precoding vector. The process of encoding the matrix constitutes any limitation.
6、空域向量(spatial domain vector):或者称波束(beam)向量。空域向量中的各个元素可以表示各个天线端口(antenna port)的权重。基于空域向量中各个元素所表示的各个天线端口的权重,将各个天线端口的信号做线性叠加,可以在空间某一方向上形成信号较强的区域。6. Spatial domain vector: or beam vector. Each element in the spatial vector may represent the weight of each antenna port (antenna port). Based on the weight of each antenna port represented by each element in the space vector, the signals of each antenna port are linearly superimposed to form an area with a strong signal in a certain direction in space.
其中,天线端口也可简称端口。天线端口可以理解为被接收设备所识别的发射天线,或者在空间上可以区分的发射天线。针对每个虚拟天线可以预配置一个天线端口,每个虚拟天线可以为多个物理天线的加权组合,每个天线端口可以与一个参考信号对应,因此, 每个天线端口可以称为一个参考信号的端口,例如,CSI-RS端口、探测参考信号(sounding reference signal,SRS)端口等。Among them, the antenna port may also be referred to as a port. The antenna port can be understood as a transmitting antenna recognized by the receiving device, or a transmitting antenna that can be distinguished in space. For each virtual antenna, one antenna port can be pre-configured. Each virtual antenna can be a weighted combination of multiple physical antennas. Each antenna port can correspond to a reference signal. Therefore, each antenna port can be called a reference signal. Ports, for example, CSI-RS ports, sounding reference signal (sounding reference signal, SRS) ports, etc.
该参考信号可以是未经过预编码的参考信号,也可以是经过预编码的参考信号,本申请对此不作限定。The reference signal may be a reference signal that has not been precoded, or a reference signal that has been precoded, which is not limited in this application.
当该参考信号是为经过预编码的参考信号时,该参考信号端口可以是发射天线端口。该发射天线端口可以是指独立的收发单元(transceiver unit,TxRU)。When the reference signal is a precoded reference signal, the reference signal port may be a transmitting antenna port. The transmitting antenna port may refer to an independent transceiver unit (transceiver unit, TxRU).
当该参考信号为预编码参考信号时,该参考信号端口可以是对发射天线端口做了降维之后的端口。一个参考信号端口可对应一个预编码向量。When the reference signal is a precoding reference signal, the reference signal port may be a port after dimensionality reduction is performed on the transmitting antenna port. One reference signal port can correspond to one precoding vector.
下文中为方便说明,假设空域向量记作u。空域向量u的长度可以为一个极化方向上的发射天线端口数N s,N s≥1且为整数。空域向量例如可以为长度为N s的列向量或行向量。本申请对此不作限定。 In the following, for convenience of explanation, suppose the airspace vector is denoted as u. The length of the space vector u may be the number of transmitting antenna ports N s in a polarization direction, and N s ≥ 1 and an integer. The spatial vector can be, for example, a column vector or a row vector with a length of N s . This application does not limit this.
可选地,空域向量取自离散傅里叶变换(Discrete Fourier Transform,DFT)矩阵。该DFT矩阵中的每个列向量可以称为一个DFT向量。换句话说,空域向量可以为DFT向量。该空域向量例如可以是NR协议TS 38.214版本15(release 15,R15)中类型II(type II)码本中定义的二维(2 dimensions,2D)-离散傅里叶变换(Discrete Fourier Transform,DFT)向量或过采样2D-DFT向量v l,m。这里为了简洁,不再赘述。 Optionally, the spatial vector is taken from a discrete Fourier transform (Discrete Fourier Transform, DFT) matrix. Each column vector in the DFT matrix can be called a DFT vector. In other words, the spatial vector can be a DFT vector. The spatial vector may be, for example, a two-dimensional (2 dimensions, 2D)-discrete Fourier Transform (DFT) defined in a type II (type II) codebook in the NR protocol TS 38.214 version 15 (release 15, R15). ) Vector or oversampled 2D-DFT vector v l,m . For the sake of brevity, I won't repeat them here.
在本申请实施例中,空域向量是用于构建预编码向量的向量之一。In the embodiment of the present application, the spatial vector is one of the vectors used to construct the precoding vector.
7、空域向量集合:可以包括多种不同长度的空域向量,以与不同的天线端口数对应。在本申请实施例中,用于构建预编码向量的空域向量可以是从空域向量集合中确定的。或者说,空域向量集合中包括多个可用于构建预编码向量的候选空域向量。7. Airspace vector set: It can include a variety of airspace vectors of different lengths to correspond to different numbers of antenna ports. In the embodiment of the present application, the spatial vector used to construct the precoding vector may be determined from the set of spatial vectors. In other words, the spatial vector set includes multiple candidate spatial vectors that can be used to construct a precoding vector.
在一种可能的设计中,该空域向量集合可以包括N s个空域向量,该N s个空域向量之间可以两两相互正交。该空域向量集合中的每个空域向量可以取自2D-DFT矩阵。其中,2D可以表示两个不同的方向,如,水平方向和垂直方向。若水平方向和垂直方向的天线端口数目分别为N h和N v,那么N s=N 1×N 2。N s、N 1和N 2均为正整数。 In a possible design, the set of airspace vectors may include N s airspace vectors, and the N s airspace vectors may be orthogonal to each other. Each spatial vector in the set of spatial vectors can be taken from a 2D-DFT matrix. Among them, 2D can represent two different directions, such as the horizontal direction and the vertical direction. If the number of antenna ports in the horizontal direction and the vertical direction are N h and N v , respectively, then N s =N 1 ×N 2 . N s , N 1 and N 2 are all positive integers.
该N s个空域向量例如可以记作
Figure PCTCN2020086593-appb-000002
该N s个空域向量可以构建矩阵B s
Figure PCTCN2020086593-appb-000003
The N s airspace vectors can be denoted as
Figure PCTCN2020086593-appb-000002
The N s spatial vectors can construct a matrix B s ,
Figure PCTCN2020086593-appb-000003
在另一种可能的设计中,该空域向量集合可以通过过采样因子O s扩展为O s×N s个空域向量。此情况下,该空域向量集合可以包括O s个子集,每个子集可以包括N s个空域向量。每个子集中的N s个空域向量之间可以两两相互正交。该空域向量集合中的每个空域向量可以取自过采样2D-DFT矩阵。其中,过采样因子O s为正整数。具体地,O s=O 1×O 2,O 1可以是水平方向的过采样因子,O 2可以是垂直方向的过采样因子。O 1≥1,O 2≥1,O 1、O 2不同时为1,且均为整数。 In another possible design, the set of spatial vectors can be expanded into O s ×N s spatial vectors by an oversampling factor O s . In this case, the set of airspace vectors may include O s subsets, and each subset may include N s airspace vectors. The N s spatial vectors in each subset can be orthogonal to each other. Each spatial vector in the set of spatial vectors can be taken from an oversampled 2D-DFT matrix. Among them, the oversampling factor O s is a positive integer. Specifically, O s =O 1 ×O 2 , O 1 may be an oversampling factor in the horizontal direction, and O 2 may be an oversampling factor in the vertical direction. O 1 ≥1, O 2 ≥1, O 1 and O 2 are not 1 at the same time, and both are integers.
该空域向量集合中的第o s(1≤o s≤O s且o s为整数)个子集中的N s个空域向量例如可以分别记作
Figure PCTCN2020086593-appb-000004
则基于该第o s个子集中的N s个空域向量可以构造矩阵
Figure PCTCN2020086593-appb-000005
Figure PCTCN2020086593-appb-000006
The N s space vectors in the o s (1≤o s ≤O s and o s is an integer) subset of the set of space vectors can be denoted as
Figure PCTCN2020086593-appb-000004
Then the matrix can be constructed based on the N s spatial vectors in the o sth subset
Figure PCTCN2020086593-appb-000005
Figure PCTCN2020086593-appb-000006
因此,空域向量集合中的各空域向量可以取自2D-DFT矩阵或过采样2D-DFT矩阵。该空域向量集合中的每个列向量可以称为一个2D-DFT向量或过采样2D-DFT向量。换句话说,空域向量可以为2D-DFT向量或过采样2D-DFT向量。Therefore, each spatial vector in the spatial vector set can be taken from a 2D-DFT matrix or an oversampled 2D-DFT matrix. Each column vector in the set of spatial vectors can be referred to as a 2D-DFT vector or an oversampled 2D-DFT vector. In other words, the spatial vector can be a 2D-DFT vector or an oversampled 2D-DFT vector.
8、频域向量:(frequency domain vector):可用于表示信道在频域的变化规律的向量。每个频域向量可以表示一种变化规律。由于信号在经过无线信道传输时,从发射天线可以经过多个路径到达接收天线。多径时延导致频率选择性衰落,就是频域信道的变化。因此,可以通过不同的频域向量来表示不同传输路径上时延导致的信道在频域上的变化规律。8. Frequency domain vector: (frequency domain vector): a vector that can be used to represent the changing law of the channel in the frequency domain. Each frequency domain vector can represent a change law. Since the signal is transmitted through the wireless channel, it can reach the receiving antenna through multiple paths from the transmitting antenna. Multipath time delay causes frequency selective fading, which is the change of frequency domain channel. Therefore, different frequency domain vectors can be used to represent the changing law of channels in the frequency domain caused by delays on different transmission paths.
在本申请实施例中,频域向量可用于和上述空域向量构建多个空域向量和频域向量的组合,或者简称空频向量对,以用于构建预编码向量。In the embodiment of the present application, the frequency domain vector may be used to construct a combination of multiple space domain vectors and frequency domain vectors, or simply a space-frequency vector pair, with the above-mentioned spatial domain vector to construct a precoding vector.
下文中为方便说明,假设频域向量记作v。频域向量的长度可以记作N 3,N 3≥1,且为整数。 In the following, for convenience of explanation, suppose the frequency domain vector is denoted as v. The length of the frequency domain vector can be denoted as N 3 , N 3 ≥ 1, and it is an integer.
9、频域向量集合:可以包括多种不同长度的频域向量。在本申请实施例中,用于构建预编码向量的频域向量可以是从频域向量集合中确定的。或者说,频域向量集合中包括多个可用于构建预编码向量的候选频域向量。9. Frequency domain vector set: It can include a variety of frequency domain vectors of different lengths. In the embodiment of the present application, the frequency domain vector used to construct the precoding vector may be determined from the frequency domain vector set. In other words, the frequency domain vector set includes multiple candidate frequency domain vectors that can be used to construct a precoding vector.
在一种可能的设计中,该频域向量集合可以包括N 3个频域向量。该N 3个频域向量之间可以两两相互正交。该频域向量集合中的每个频域向量可以取自DFT矩阵或离散傅里叶逆变换(Inverse Discrete Fourier Transform,IDFT)矩阵。 In a possible design, the frequency domain vector set may include N 3 frequency domain vectors. The N 3 frequency domain vectors may be orthogonal to each other. Each frequency domain vector in the frequency domain vector set can be taken from a DFT matrix or an inverse discrete Fourier transform (Inverse Discrete Fourier Transform, IDFT) matrix.
例如,该N f个频域向量例如可以记作
Figure PCTCN2020086593-appb-000007
该N f个频域向量可以构建矩阵B f
Figure PCTCN2020086593-appb-000008
For example, the N f frequency domain vectors can be denoted as
Figure PCTCN2020086593-appb-000007
The N f frequency domain vectors can construct a matrix B f ,
Figure PCTCN2020086593-appb-000008
在另一种可能的设计中,该频域向量集合可以通过过采样因子O f扩展为O f×N 3个频域向量。此情况下,该频域向量集合可以包括O f个子集,每个子集可以包括N 3个频域向量。每个子集中的N 3个频域向量之间可以两两相互正交。每个子集可以称为一个正交组。该频域向量集合中的每个频域向量可以取自过采样DFT矩阵。其中,过采样因子O f为正整数。 In another possible design, the frequency-domain vector set can be extended over-sampling factor of O f O f × N 3 frequency-domain vectors. In this case, the frequency-domain vector set may comprise O f subsets, each subset may include a frequency-domain vector N 3. The N 3 frequency domain vectors in each subset may be orthogonal to each other. Each subset can be called an orthogonal group. Each frequency domain vector in the frequency domain vector set can be taken from an oversampled DFT matrix. Wherein the oversampling factor O f is a positive integer.
例如,该频域向量集合中的第o f(1≤o f≤O f且o f为整数)个子集中的N 3个频域向量例如可以分别记作
Figure PCTCN2020086593-appb-000009
则基于该第o f个子集中的N 3个频域向量可以构造矩阵
Figure PCTCN2020086593-appb-000010
For example, the N 3 frequency domain vectors in the o f ( 1 ≤ o f ≤ O f and o f is an integer) subset of the frequency domain vector set can be denoted as
Figure PCTCN2020086593-appb-000009
Then the matrix can be constructed based on the N 3 frequency domain vectors in the o fth subset
Figure PCTCN2020086593-appb-000010
因此,频域向量集合中的各频域向量可以取自DFT矩阵或过采样DFT矩阵,或者取自IDFT矩阵或过采样IDFT矩阵。与此对应地,该频域向量集合中的每个列向量可以称为一个DFT向量或过采样DFT向量,或者,一个IDFT向量或过采样IDFT向量。换句话说,频域向量可以为DFT向量或过采样DFT向量,或者,IDFT向量或过采样IDFT向量。Therefore, each frequency domain vector in the frequency domain vector set can be taken from the DFT matrix or the oversampled DFT matrix, or from the IDFT matrix or the oversampled IDFT matrix. Correspondingly, each column vector in the frequency domain vector set may be referred to as a DFT vector or an oversampled DFT vector, or an IDFT vector or an oversampled IDFT vector. In other words, the frequency domain vector can be a DFT vector or an oversampled DFT vector, or an IDFT vector or an oversampled IDFT vector.
10、空频分量矩阵:通过一个空域向量和一个频域向量可以确定一个空频分量矩阵。一个空频分量矩阵例如可以由一个空域向量和一个频域向量的共轭转置确定,如u×v H,其维度可以为N s×N 310. Space-frequency component matrix: A space-frequency component matrix can be determined through a space-domain vector and a frequency-domain vector. A space-frequency component matrix may be determined by, for example, a conjugate transpose of a space-domain vector and a frequency-domain vector, such as u×v H , and its dimension may be N s ×N 3 .
应理解,空频分量矩阵可以是由一个空域向量和一个频域向量确定的空频基本单位的一种表现形式。空频基本单位例如还可以表现为空频分量向量,该空频分量向量例如可以由一个空域向量和一个频域向量的克罗内克(Kronecker)积确定;该空频基本单位例如还可以表现为空频向量对等。本申请对于空频基本单位的具体表现形式不作限定。本领域的技术人员基于相同的构思,由一个空域向量和一个频域向量确定的各种可能的形式均应落入本申请保护的范围内。此外,如果对空域向量或频域向量定义了与上文列举所不同的形 式,空频分量矩阵与空域向量、频域向量的运算关系也可能不同。本申请对于空频分量矩阵与空域向量、频域向量的运算关系不作限定。It should be understood that the space-frequency component matrix may be an expression form of a space-frequency basic unit determined by a space-domain vector and a frequency-domain vector. The basic unit of space-frequency can also be expressed as a space-frequency component vector, for example, the space-frequency component vector can be determined by the Kronecker product of a space-domain vector and a frequency-domain vector; The space frequency vector is equal. This application does not limit the specific manifestation of the basic air frequency unit. Those skilled in the art are based on the same concept, and various possible forms determined by a spatial domain vector and a frequency domain vector should fall within the protection scope of this application. In addition, if the space-domain vector or frequency-domain vector is defined in a different form than that listed above, the operation relationship between the space-frequency component matrix and the space-domain vector and frequency-domain vector may also be different. This application does not limit the operational relationship between the space-frequency component matrix, the space-domain vector, and the frequency-domain vector.
11、空频矩阵:可以理解为用于确定每个频域单元对应的预编码矩阵的一个中间量。对于终端设备来说,空频矩阵可以由每个频域单元对应的预编码矩阵或信道矩阵确定。对于网络设备来说,空频矩阵可以是由多个空频分量矩阵的加权和得到,以用于恢复下行信道或预编码矩阵。11. Space frequency matrix: It can be understood as an intermediate quantity used to determine the precoding matrix corresponding to each frequency domain unit. For the terminal device, the space-frequency matrix can be determined by the precoding matrix or the channel matrix corresponding to each frequency domain unit. For network equipment, the space-frequency matrix may be obtained by the weighted sum of multiple space-frequency component matrices, so as to recover the downlink channel or precoding matrix.
例如,空频矩阵可以记作H,
Figure PCTCN2020086593-appb-000011
其中,w 1
Figure PCTCN2020086593-appb-000012
是与N 3个频域单元对应的N 3个列向量,每个列向量可以是每个频域单元对应的预编码矩阵,各列向量的长度均可以为N s。该N 3个列向量分别对应N 3个频域单元的预编码向量。即空频矩阵可以视为将N 3个频域单元对应的预编码向量组合构成的联合矩阵。
For example, the space frequency matrix can be denoted as H,
Figure PCTCN2020086593-appb-000011
Where w 1 to
Figure PCTCN2020086593-appb-000012
Is N 3 column vectors corresponding to N 3 frequency domain units, each column vector may be a precoding matrix corresponding to each frequency domain unit, and the length of each column vector may be N s . The N 3 column vectors respectively correspond to precoding vectors of N 3 frequency domain units. That is, the space-frequency matrix can be regarded as a joint matrix formed by combining the precoding vectors corresponding to N 3 frequency domain units.
此外,空频矩阵可以与传输层对应。同一传输层上各频域单元的预编码向量可以构建该传输层对应的空频矩阵。例如,将第z个传输层上各频域单元的预编码向量可以构建第z个传输层对应的空频矩阵。下文中为方便说明,将与传输层对应的空频矩阵简称为该传输层的空频矩阵。In addition, the space frequency matrix may correspond to the transmission layer. The precoding vector of each frequency domain unit on the same transmission layer can construct the space-frequency matrix corresponding to the transmission layer. For example, the precoding vector of each frequency domain unit on the z-th transmission layer can be used to construct the space-frequency matrix corresponding to the z-th transmission layer. Hereinafter, for convenience of description, the space-frequency matrix corresponding to the transmission layer is simply referred to as the space-frequency matrix of the transmission layer.
应理解,空频矩阵仅为用于确定预编码矩阵的中间量的一种表现形式,不应对本申请构成任何限定。例如,将空频矩阵中的各列向量按从左至右的顺序依次首位相接,或者按照其他预定义的规则排列,也可以得到长度为N s×N 3的向量,该向量可以称为空频向量。 It should be understood that the space-frequency matrix is only an expression form used to determine the intermediate quantity of the precoding matrix, and should not constitute any limitation in this application. For example, by arranging each column vector in the space-frequency matrix sequentially from left to right, or arranged according to other predefined rules, a vector of length N s × N 3 can also be obtained, which can be called Space frequency vector.
还应理解,上文所示的空频矩阵和空频向量的维度仅为示例,不应对本申请构成任何限定。例如,该空频矩阵也可以是维度为N 3×N s的的矩阵。其中,每个行向量可对应于一个频域单元,以用于确定所对应的频域单元的预编码向量。 It should also be understood that the dimensions of the space-frequency matrix and the space-frequency vector shown above are only examples, and should not constitute any limitation to this application. For example, the space-frequency matrix may also be a matrix with a dimension of N 3 ×N s . Wherein, each row vector may correspond to a frequency domain unit for determining the precoding vector of the corresponding frequency domain unit.
此外,当发射天线配置有多个极化方向时,该空频矩阵的维度还可以进一步扩展。如,对于双极化方向天线,该空频矩阵的维度可以为2N s×N 3或N 3×2N s。应理解,本申请对于发射天线的极化方向数不作限定。 In addition, when the transmitting antenna is configured with multiple polarization directions, the dimension of the space-frequency matrix can be further expanded. For example, for a dual-polarization antenna, the dimension of the space-frequency matrix can be 2N s ×N 3 or N 3 ×2N s . It should be understood that this application does not limit the number of polarization directions of the transmitting antenna.
12、双域压缩:可以包括空域压缩和频域压缩这两个维度的压缩。空域压缩具体可以是指空域向量集合中选择一个或多个空域向量来作为构建预编码向量的向量。频域压缩可以是指在频域向量集合中选择一个或多个频域向量来作为构建预编码向量的向量。如前所述,一个空域向量和一个频域向量所构建的矩阵例如可以称为空频分量矩阵。被选择的一个或多个空域向量和一个或多个频域向量可以构建一个或多个空频分量矩阵。该一个或多个空频分量矩阵的加权和可用于构建与一个传输层对应的空频矩阵。换句话说,空频矩阵可以近似为由上述被选择的一个或多个空域向量和一个或多个频域向量所构建的空频分量矩阵的加权和。基于一个传输层对应的空频矩阵,进而可以确定该传输层上各频域单元对应的预编码向量。12. Dual-domain compression: It can include compression in the two dimensions of space-domain compression and frequency-domain compression. Spatial compression may specifically refer to selecting one or more spatial vectors from the set of spatial vectors as the vector for constructing the precoding vector. Frequency domain compression may refer to selecting one or more frequency domain vectors from a set of frequency domain vectors as a vector for constructing a precoding vector. As mentioned above, the matrix constructed by a spatial domain vector and a frequency domain vector may be called a spatial frequency component matrix, for example. The selected one or more spatial vectors and one or more frequency domain vectors can construct one or more spatial frequency component matrices. The weighted sum of the one or more space-frequency component matrices can be used to construct a space-frequency matrix corresponding to one transmission layer. In other words, the space-frequency matrix can be approximated as a weighted sum of the space-frequency component matrix constructed from the selected one or more space-domain vectors and one or more frequency-domain vectors. Based on the space-frequency matrix corresponding to a transmission layer, the precoding vector corresponding to each frequency domain unit on the transmission layer can be determined.
具体地,选择的一个或多个空域向量可以构成矩阵W 1,其中W 1中的每一个列向量对应选择的一个空域向量。选择的一个或多个频域向量可以构成矩阵W 3,其中W 3中的每一个列向量对应选择的一个频域向量。空频矩阵H可以表示为选择的一个或多个空域向量与选择的一个或多个频域向量线性合并的结果H=W 1CW 3 HSpecifically, the selected one or more spatial vectors can form a matrix W 1 , where each column vector in W 1 corresponds to a selected spatial vector. The selected one or more frequency domain vectors may form a matrix W 3 , where each column vector in W 3 corresponds to a selected frequency domain vector. The space-frequency matrix H can be expressed as the result of linear combination of the selected one or more space domain vectors and the selected one or more frequency domain vectors H=W 1 CW 3 H.
以第z个传输层为例,假设该第z个传输层的空频矩阵为H=W 1CW 3 HTaking the z-th transmission layer as an example, suppose the space-frequency matrix of the z-th transmission layer is H=W 1 CW 3 H.
若采用双极化方向天线,每个极化方向可以选择L z个空域向量,W 1的维度可以是2N s×2L z。在一种可能的实现方式中,两个极化方向可以采用相同的L z个空域向量
Figure PCTCN2020086593-appb-000013
其中,
Figure PCTCN2020086593-appb-000014
例如可以是从上文所述的空域向量集合中选择的L个空域向量。此时,W 1可以表示为
Figure PCTCN2020086593-appb-000015
其中
Figure PCTCN2020086593-appb-000016
表示选择的L z个空域向量中的第l个空域向量,l=1,2,…,L z
If a dual polarization direction antenna is used, L z space vectors can be selected for each polarization direction, and the dimension of W 1 can be 2N s × 2L z . In a possible implementation, the same L z spatial vectors can be used for the two polarization directions
Figure PCTCN2020086593-appb-000013
among them,
Figure PCTCN2020086593-appb-000014
For example, it may be L airspace vectors selected from the set of airspace vectors described above. At this time, W 1 can be expressed as
Figure PCTCN2020086593-appb-000015
among them
Figure PCTCN2020086593-appb-000016
Indicates the l-th spatial vector in the selected L z spatial vectors, l=1, 2,..., L z .
若选择M z个频域向量,则W 3 H的维度可以为M z×N 3。W 3中的每一个列向量可以是一个频域向量。此时W 1中的每个空域向量和W 3中的每个频域向量可以构成一个空频向量对,每个空频向量对可以对应一个加权系数,则有2L z个空域向量和M z个频域向量所构建的2L z×M z个空频向量对可以与2L z×M z个加权系数一一对应。 If M z frequency domain vectors are selected, the dimension of W 3 H can be M z ×N 3 . Each column vector in W 3 can be a frequency domain vector. At this time, each space vector in W 1 and each frequency vector in W 3 can form a space-frequency vector pair, and each space-frequency vector pair can correspond to a weighting coefficient, so there are 2L z space-domain vectors and M z The 2L z ×M z space-frequency vector pairs constructed by the two frequency domain vectors can correspond to the 2L z ×M z weighting coefficients one-to-one.
C为由该2L z×M z个加权系数构成的系数矩阵,维度可以为2L z×M z。该系数矩阵C中的第l行可以对应2L z个空域向量中第一极化方向上的第l个空域向量,该系数矩阵C中的第L z+l行可以对应2L z个空域向量中第二极化方向上的第l个空域向量。该系数矩阵C中的第m列可以对应M z个频域向量中的第m个频域向量。 C is a coefficient matrix composed of the 2L z ×M z weighting coefficients, and the dimension may be 2L z ×M z . The lth row in the coefficient matrix C may correspond to the lth spatial vector in the first polarization direction in the 2L z spatial vectors, and the L z +lth row in the coefficient matrix C may correspond to the 2L z spatial vectors The l-th spatial vector in the second polarization direction. The m-th column in the coefficient matrix C may correspond to the m-th frequency-domain vector among the M z frequency-domain vectors.
可选地,Z个传输层可以分别使用各自独立的空域向量。终端设备针对Z个传输层上报的空域向量可以包括针对每个传输层分别上报的空域向量的总和。此情况下,假设终端设备针对Z个传输层上报的空域向量个数为L,则
Figure PCTCN2020086593-appb-000017
Optionally, the Z transmission layers may use their own independent spatial vectors. The airspace vectors reported by the terminal device for the Z transmission layers may include the sum of the airspace vectors reported separately for each transmission layer. In this case, assuming that the number of airspace vectors reported by the terminal device for Z transport layers is L, then
Figure PCTCN2020086593-appb-000017
可选地,Z个传输层可以分别使用各自独立的频域向量,终端设备针对Z个传输层上报的频域向量可以包括针对每个传输层分别上报的频域向量的总和。此情况下,假设终端设备针对Z个传输层上报的频域向量的个数为M,则
Figure PCTCN2020086593-appb-000018
Optionally, the Z transmission layers may use their own independent frequency domain vectors, and the frequency domain vectors reported by the terminal device for the Z transmission layers may include the sum of frequency domain vectors respectively reported for each transmission layer. In this case, assuming that the number of frequency domain vectors reported by the terminal device for Z transmission layers is M, then
Figure PCTCN2020086593-appb-000018
可选地,Z个传输层可以共用L个空域向量。终端设备上报的L个空域向量可用于构建该Z个传输层中的任意一个传输层上各频域单元的预编码向量。此情况下,上文所述的终端设备针对第z个传输层上报的空域向量个数L z=L。 Optionally, Z transmission layers can share L spatial vectors. The L spatial vectors reported by the terminal device can be used to construct the precoding vector of each frequency domain unit on any one of the Z transmission layers. In this case, the number of airspace vectors reported by the terminal device described above for the z-th transmission layer is L z =L.
可选地,Z个传输层可以共用M个频域向量。终端设备上报的M个频域向量可用于构建该Z个传输层中的任意一个传输层上各频域单元的预编码向量。此情况下,上文所述的终端设备针对第z个传输层上报的频域向量个数M z=M。 Optionally, Z transmission layers may share M frequency domain vectors. The M frequency domain vectors reported by the terminal device can be used to construct the precoding vector of each frequency domain unit on any one of the Z transmission layers. In this case, the number of frequency domain vectors reported by the terminal device for the z-th transmission layer is M z =M.
可选地,Z个传输层也可以被划分为多个传输层组,同一传输层组中的一个或多个传输层可以共用空域向量和/或频域向量,来自不同传输层组的传输层可以分别使用各自独立的空域向量和/或频域向量。Optionally, the Z transmission layers can also be divided into multiple transmission layer groups, and one or more transmission layers in the same transmission layer group can share the space vector and/or frequency domain vector, and the transmission layers from different transmission layer groups Each independent spatial vector and/or frequency domain vector can be used.
应理解,上文中所示的空频矩阵H与W 1、W 3的关系仅为示例,不应对本申请构成任何限定。本领域的技术人员基于相同的构思,可以对上述关系进行数学变换,而得到其他用于表征空频矩阵H与W 1、W 3关系的计算式。例如,空频矩阵H也可以表示为H=W 1CW 3,此时W 3中的每一个行向量对应选择的一个频域向量。 It should be understood that the relationship between the space-frequency matrix H and W 1 and W 3 shown above is only an example, and should not constitute any limitation to the application. Based on the same concept, those skilled in the art can perform mathematical transformations on the above-mentioned relationship to obtain other calculation formulas for representing the relationship between the space-frequency matrix H and W 1 , W 3 . For example, the space-frequency matrix H can also be expressed as H=W 1 CW 3 , at this time, each row vector in W 3 corresponds to a selected frequency domain vector.
由于双域压缩在空域和频域都分别进行了压缩,终端设备在反馈时,可以将被选择的一个或多个空域向量和一个或多个频域向量反馈给网络设备,而不再需要基于每个频域单元(如子带)分别反馈子带的加权系数(如包括幅度和相位)。因此,可以大大减小反馈开销。同时,由于频域向量能够表示信道在频率的变化规律,通过一个或多个频域向量的线性叠加来模拟信道在频域上的变化。因此,仍能够保持较高的反馈精度,使得网络设备基于终端设备的反馈恢复出来的预编码矩阵仍然能够较好地与信道适配。Since dual-domain compression is compressed in both the space and frequency domains, the terminal device can feed back the selected one or more spatial vectors and one or more frequency domain vectors to the network device during feedback, instead of being based on Each frequency domain unit (such as a subband) feeds back the weighting coefficient (such as amplitude and phase) of the subband respectively. Therefore, the feedback overhead can be greatly reduced. At the same time, since the frequency domain vector can represent the change rule of the channel in the frequency, the linear superposition of one or more frequency domain vectors is used to simulate the channel change in the frequency domain. Therefore, a high feedback accuracy can still be maintained, so that the precoding matrix recovered by the network device based on the feedback of the terminal device can still better adapt to the channel.
应理解,上文中为了便于理解双域压缩,分别定义了空频分量矩阵、空频矩阵、空频向量对等术语,但这不应对本申请构成任何限定。终端设备确定PMI的具体过程为终端设备的内部实现行为,本申请对于终端设备确定PMI的具体过程并不作限定。网络设备根据PMI确定预编码矩阵的具体过程为网络设备的内部实现行为,本申请对于网络设备根据PMI确定预编码矩阵的具体过程也不作限定。终端设备和网络设备分别可以采用不同的算法来生成PMI和恢复预编码矩阵。It should be understood that, in order to facilitate the understanding of dual-domain compression, terms such as space-frequency component matrix, space-frequency matrix, and space-frequency vector equivalence are respectively defined, but this should not constitute any limitation to this application. The specific process for the terminal device to determine the PMI is the internal implementation behavior of the terminal device, and this application does not limit the specific process for the terminal device to determine the PMI. The specific process for the network device to determine the precoding matrix according to the PMI is an internal implementation behavior of the network device, and this application does not limit the specific process for the network device to determine the precoding matrix according to the PMI. The terminal device and the network device can use different algorithms to generate PMI and restore the precoding matrix.
13、加权系数:在双域压缩中,加权系数也可以称为空频合并系数、合并系数等。每个加权系数可以与被选择用于构建预编码向量的一个空域向量和一个频域向量对应,或者说,与一个空频分量矩阵对应,或者说,与一个空频向量对对应。加权系数可以用于表示构建预编码向量对一个空域向量和频域向量所构建的空频分量矩阵的权重。13. Weighting coefficient: In dual-domain compression, weighting coefficients can also be called space-frequency combination coefficients, combination coefficients, etc. Each weighting coefficient may correspond to a space vector and a frequency vector selected for constructing a precoding vector, or, in other words, a matrix of space-frequency components, or a pair of space-frequency vectors. The weighting coefficient can be used to express the weight of the space-frequency component matrix constructed by constructing the precoding vector to a space-domain vector and a frequency-domain vector.
每个加权系数可以包括幅度和相位。例如,加权系数ae 中,a为幅度,θ为相位。 Each weighting factor can include amplitude and phase. For example, in the weighting coefficient ae , a is the amplitude and θ is the phase.
在终端设备所选择的用于构建预编码矩阵的多个空频向量对中,每个空频向量对可以对应一个加权系数。与多个空频向量对对应的多个加权系数中,有些加权系数的幅度(或者说,幅值)可能为零,或者接近零,其对应的量化值可以是零。通过量化值零来量化幅度的加权系数可以称为幅度为零的加权系数。相对应地,有些加权系数的幅度较大,其对应的量化值不为零。通过非零的量化值来量化幅度的加权系数可以称为幅度非零的加权系数。换句话说,与多个空频向量对对应的多个加权系数可以由一个或多个幅度非零的加权系数以及一个或多个幅度为零的加权系数组成。Among the multiple space-frequency vector pairs selected by the terminal device to construct the precoding matrix, each space-frequency vector pair may correspond to a weighting coefficient. Among the multiple weighting coefficients corresponding to multiple space-frequency vector pairs, the amplitude (or amplitude) of some weighting coefficients may be zero or close to zero, and the corresponding quantized value may be zero. The weighting coefficient that quantizes the amplitude by the quantization value of zero can be referred to as the weighting coefficient of zero amplitude. Correspondingly, some weighting coefficients have larger amplitudes, and their corresponding quantized values are not zero. The weighting coefficient that quantizes the amplitude by the non-zero quantization value can be called the weighting coefficient of non-zero amplitude. In other words, the multiple weighting coefficients corresponding to the multiple space-frequency vector pairs may be composed of one or more weighting coefficients with non-zero amplitude and one or more weighting coefficients with zero amplitude.
14、传输层(layer):也可以称为空间层、层、传输流、空间流、流等。用于网络设备与终端设备之间的数据传输的传输层数可以由信道矩阵的秩(rank)确定。终端设备可以根据信道估计所得到的信道矩阵确定传输层数。例如,可以通过对信道矩阵或信道矩阵的协方差矩阵进行奇异值分解(singular value decomposition,SVD)来确定预编码矩阵。在SVD过程中,可以按照特征值的大小来区分不同的传输层。例如,可以将最大的特征值所对应的特征向量所确定的预编码向量与第1个传输层对应,并可以将最小的特征值所对应的特征向量所确定的预编码向量与第Z个传输层对应。即,第1个传输层至第Z个传输层所对应的特征值依次减小。14. Transport layer (layer): It can also be referred to as a spatial layer, layer, transport stream, spatial stream, stream, etc. The number of transmission layers used for data transmission between the network device and the terminal device may be determined by the rank of the channel matrix. The terminal equipment can determine the number of transmission layers according to the channel matrix obtained by channel estimation. For example, the precoding matrix can be determined by performing singular value decomposition (SVD) on the channel matrix or the covariance matrix of the channel matrix. In the SVD process, different transmission layers can be distinguished according to the size of the characteristic value. For example, the precoding vector determined by the eigenvector corresponding to the largest eigenvalue can be corresponding to the first transmission layer, and the precoding vector determined by the eigenvector corresponding to the smallest eigenvalue can be transmitted to the Zth transmission layer. Layer correspondence. That is, the eigenvalues corresponding to the first transmission layer to the Zth transmission layer decrease sequentially.
应理解,基于特征值来区分不同的传输层仅为一种可能的实现方式,而不应对本申请构成任何限定。例如,协议也可以预先定义区分传输层的其他准则,本申请对此不作限定。It should be understood that distinguishing different transmission layers based on characteristic values is only a possible implementation manner, and should not constitute any limitation to this application. For example, the protocol may also predefine other criteria for distinguishing the transport layer, which is not limited in this application.
在某些情况下,终端设备向网络设备上报的CSI报告可能并没有包含基于信道测量所确定的用于构建预编码矩阵的全部信息。例如,网络设备为终端设备预先分配的物理上行资源不足以传输终端设备所确定的用于构建预编码矩阵的全部信息。在这种情况下,如何在CSI报告中指示加权系数的个数尚未明确。如果对于CSI报告中加权系数的个数的指示的定义不明确,就可能导致网络设备对CSI报告中第二部分的开销估计出错,也就无法对CSI报告的第二部分正确译码。因此,网络设备可能无法准确地获取到CSI报告中的信息,在下行传输过程中所确定的用于数据传输的预编码矩阵可能与下行信道并不能很好地适配,由此导致系统传输性能下降。In some cases, the CSI report reported by the terminal device to the network device may not contain all the information determined based on the channel measurement to construct the precoding matrix. For example, the physical uplink resources pre-allocated by the network device for the terminal device are insufficient to transmit all the information determined by the terminal device for constructing the precoding matrix. In this case, how to indicate the number of weighting coefficients in the CSI report is not yet clear. If the definition of the indication of the number of weighting coefficients in the CSI report is not clear, it may cause the network device to make an error in the cost estimation of the second part of the CSI report, and thus cannot correctly decode the second part of the CSI report. Therefore, the network equipment may not be able to accurately obtain the information in the CSI report, and the precoding matrix used for data transmission determined during the downlink transmission may not be well adapted to the downlink channel, resulting in system transmission performance decline.
例如,网络设备为终端设备预配置的加权系数的上报个数为20个,终端设备基于信道测量确定的所有待上报的幅度非零的加权系数的个数为18个。但通过CSI报告实际上报的幅度非零的加权系数的个数可能为15个。如果网络设备基于18个加权系数去估计 CSI报告第二部分的长度,则对CSI报告第二部分的长度的估计不准确。如果网络设备基于15个加权系数去估计CSI报告第二部分的长度,虽然可能对CSI报告第二部分的长度的估计是准确的,但网络设备可能并不知道终端设备是否丢弃了一部分幅度非零的加权系数。而终端设备对加权系数的丢弃有可能是网络设备预先分配的物理上行资源不足而导致,网络设备如果不能知道终端设备是否丢弃了加权系数,也就不知道预先分配的物理上行资源是否充足。在此后的多次信道测量中,终端设备可能还是无法获得充足的物理上行资源来传输CSI报告。这严重地降低了反馈精度,对系统的传输性能不利。For example, the number of weighting coefficients pre-configured by the network equipment for the terminal equipment to be reported is 20, and the number of weighting coefficients with non-zero amplitudes to be reported determined by the terminal equipment based on channel measurement is 18. However, the number of weighting coefficients with a non-zero amplitude actually reported through the CSI report may be 15. If the network device estimates the length of the second part of the CSI report based on 18 weighting coefficients, the estimation of the length of the second part of the CSI report is not accurate. If the network device estimates the length of the second part of the CSI report based on 15 weighting coefficients, although the estimation of the length of the second part of the CSI report may be accurate, the network device may not know whether the terminal device has discarded part of the non-zero amplitude The weighting factor. The discarding of the weighting coefficient by the terminal device may be caused by insufficient physical uplink resources pre-allocated by the network device. If the network device cannot know whether the terminal device discards the weighting coefficient, it does not know whether the pre-allocated physical uplink resources are sufficient. In the subsequent multiple channel measurements, the terminal device may still be unable to obtain sufficient physical uplink resources to transmit the CSI report. This severely reduces the feedback accuracy and is detrimental to the transmission performance of the system.
基于此,本申请提供一种用于构建预编码矩阵的系数指示方法,明确定义如何在CSI报告中指示加权系数的个数,以便于网络设备准确估计CSI报告第二部分的开销,以对CSI报告进行正确译码。Based on this, this application provides a method for indicating coefficients for constructing a precoding matrix, and clearly defines how to indicate the number of weighting coefficients in a CSI report, so that the network device can accurately estimate the cost of the second part of the CSI report, so that the CSI The report is decoded correctly.
为了便于理解本申请实施例,在介绍本申请实施例之前,先作出以下几点说明。In order to facilitate the understanding of the embodiments of the present application, before introducing the embodiments of the present application, the following descriptions are made.
第一,为方便理解和说明,首先对本申请中涉及到的主要参数分别说明如下:First, in order to facilitate understanding and explanation, the main parameters involved in this application are described as follows:
K 0:网络设备为终端设备预配置的加权系数上报个数,或者说,终端设备上报的加权系数的最大个数,K 0为正整数。 K 0 : The number of weighting coefficients reported by the network equipment pre-configured for the terminal equipment, in other words, the maximum number of weighting coefficients reported by the terminal equipment, and K 0 is a positive integer.
K 1:终端设备通过CSI报告向网络设备上报的加权系数的个数,K 1≤K 0,且K 1为正整数。可以理解,为节省开销,终端设备可以仅将幅度非零的加权系数上报给网络设备,而不上报幅度为零的加权系数。因此,终端设备通过CSI报告上报的K 1个加权系数均为幅度非零的加权系数。 K 1 : The number of weighting coefficients reported by the terminal device to the network device through the CSI report, K 1 ≤ K 0 , and K 1 is a positive integer. It can be understood that, in order to save overhead, the terminal device may only report the weighting coefficient with a non-zero amplitude to the network device, instead of reporting the weighting coefficient with a zero amplitude. Therefore, the K 1 weighting coefficients reported by the terminal device through the CSI report are all weighting coefficients with a non-zero amplitude.
K 2:终端设备基于信道测量和网络设备预配置的加权系数的上报个数K 0确定的加权系数中所有幅度非零的加权系数的个数,K 1≤K 2≤K 0,且K 2为正整数。 K 2 : The number of weighting coefficients with non-zero amplitude among the weighting coefficients determined by the terminal equipment based on the number of reported weighting coefficients K 0 pre-configured by the channel measurement and network equipment, K 1 ≤K 2 ≤K 0 , and K 2 Is a positive integer.
N s:发射天线端口数,N s为正整数。 N s : the number of transmitting antenna ports, N s is a positive integer.
N 3:频域向量的长度,N 3为正整数。 N 3 : the length of the frequency domain vector, N 3 is a positive integer.
L:终端设备上报的空域向量的个数,L为正整数。在下文示出的实施例中,多个(如Z个)传输层可以共用L个空域向量,故终端设备上报的空域向量的个数L也就是多个传输层共用的空域向量的个数。需注意,该L个空域向量之间可以彼此互不相同。L: The number of airspace vectors reported by the terminal device, L is a positive integer. In the embodiment shown below, multiple (such as Z) transmission layers can share L airspace vectors, so the number L of airspace vectors reported by the terminal device is the number of airspace vectors shared by multiple transmission layers. It should be noted that the L airspace vectors may be different from each other.
M:终端设备上报的频域向量的总个数,M为正整数。在下文示出的实施例中,多个(如Z个)传输层可以分别使用各自独立的频域向量。例如Z个传输层中的第z(1≤z≤Z,z为整数)个传输层可以使用M z个频域向量,故终端设备上报的频域向量的总个数M可以是终端设备针对多个传输层上报的频域向量的总个数,即,
Figure PCTCN2020086593-appb-000019
M: The total number of frequency domain vectors reported by the terminal device, M is a positive integer. In the embodiment shown below, multiple (such as Z) transmission layers may use independent frequency domain vectors respectively. For example, the zth (1≤z≤Z, z is an integer) transmission layer in the Z transmission layers can use M z frequency domain vectors, so the total number of frequency domain vectors M reported by the terminal device can be The total number of frequency domain vectors reported by multiple transport layers, that is,
Figure PCTCN2020086593-appb-000019
Z:传输层数,可以由信道矩阵的秩(rank)确定,Z为正整数。Z: The number of transmission layers, which can be determined by the rank of the channel matrix, and Z is a positive integer.
z:与Z对应,可以在1到Z的范围内取值,z为整数。z: Corresponds to Z, can take a value in the range of 1 to Z, z is an integer.
第二,在本实施例中,为便于描述,在涉及编号时,可以从1开始连续编号。例如,Z个传输层可以包括第1个传输层至第Z个传输层,以此类推,这里不再一一举例说明。当然,具体实现时不限于此,例如,也可以从0开始连续编号。应理解,上文所述均为便于描述本申请实施例提供的技术方案而进行的设置,而并非用于限制本申请的范围。Second, in this embodiment, for ease of description, when referring to numbering, serial numbers can be started from 1. For example, the Z transmission layers may include the first transmission layer to the Zth transmission layer, and so on, which will not be illustrated one by one here. Of course, the specific implementation is not limited to this, for example, the serial number may also start from 0. It should be understood that the above descriptions are all settings for convenience of describing the technical solutions provided by the embodiments of the present application, and are not used to limit the scope of the present application.
第三,在本申请实施例中,多处涉及矩阵和向量的变换。为便于理解,这里做统一说明。上角标T表示转置,如A T表示矩阵(或向量)A的转置;上角标H表示共轭转置,如,A H表示矩阵(或向量)A的共轭转置;上角标*表示共轭,如,A *表示矩阵(或向量)A的共轭。后文中为了简洁,省略对相同或相似情况的说明。 Third, in the embodiment of the present application, multiple transformations of matrices and vectors are involved. For ease of understanding, here is a unified description. The superscript T means transpose, for example, AT means the transpose of matrix (or vector) A; superscript H means conjugate transpose, for example, A H means the conjugate transpose of matrix (or vector) A; above The subscript * represents the conjugate, for example, A * represents the conjugate of the matrix (or vector) A. For the sake of brevity in the following text, the description of the same or similar situations is omitted.
第四,在本申请实施例中,“用于指示”可以包括用于直接指示和用于间接指示。例如,当描述某一指示信息用于指示信息I时,可以包括该指示信息直接指示I或间接指示I,而并不代表该指示信息中一定携带有I。Fourth, in the embodiments of the present application, "used to indicate" may include used for direct indication and used for indirect indication. For example, when describing that a certain indication information is used to indicate information I, the indication information may directly indicate I or indirectly indicate I, but it does not mean that I must be carried in the indication information.
将指示信息所指示的信息称为待指示信息,则具体实现过程中,对待指示信息进行指示的方式有很多种,例如但不限于,可以直接指示待指示信息,如待指示信息本身或者该待指示信息的索引等。也可以通过指示其他信息来间接指示待指示信息,其中该其他信息与待指示信息之间存在关联关系。还可以仅仅指示待指示信息的一部分,而待指示信息的其他部分则是已知的或者提前约定的。例如,还可以借助预先约定(例如协议规定)的各个信息的排列顺序来实现对特定信息的指示,从而在一定程度上降低指示开销。同时,还可以识别各个信息的通用部分并统一指示,以降低单独指示同样的信息而带来的指示开销。例如,本领域的技术人员应当明白,预编码矩阵是由预编码向量组成的,预编码矩阵中的各个预编码向量,在组成或者其他属性方面,可能存在相同的部分。The information indicated by the instruction information is called the information to be indicated. In the specific implementation process, there are many ways to indicate the information to be indicated. For example, but not limited to, the information to be indicated can be directly indicated, such as the information to be indicated or the information to be indicated. Indicates the index of the information, etc. The information to be indicated can also be indicated indirectly by indicating other information, where there is an association relationship between the other information and the information to be indicated. It is also possible to indicate only a part of the information to be indicated, and other parts of the information to be indicated are known or agreed in advance. For example, it is also possible to realize the indication of specific information by means of the pre-arranged order (for example, stipulated in the agreement) of various information, thereby reducing the indication overhead to a certain extent. At the same time, it can also identify the common parts of each information and give unified instructions, so as to reduce the instruction overhead caused by separately indicating the same information. For example, those skilled in the art should understand that the precoding matrix is composed of precoding vectors, and each precoding vector in the precoding matrix may have the same parts in terms of composition or other attributes.
此外,具体的指示方式还可以是现有各种指示方式,例如但不限于,上述指示方式及其各种组合等。各种指示方式的具体细节可以参考现有技术,本文不再赘述。由上文所述可知,举例来说,当需要指示相同类型的多个信息时,可能会出现不同信息的指示方式不相同的情形。具体实现过程中,可以根据具体的需要选择所需的指示方式,本申请实施例对选择的指示方式不做限定,如此一来,本申请实施例涉及的指示方式应理解为涵盖可以使得待指示方获知待指示信息的各种方法。In addition, the specific indication manner may also be various existing indication manners, such as, but not limited to, the foregoing indication manner and various combinations thereof. The specific details of the various indication modes can be referred to the prior art, which will not be repeated here. It can be seen from the above that, for example, when multiple pieces of information of the same type need to be indicated, a situation where different information is indicated in different ways may occur. In the specific implementation process, the required instruction method can be selected according to specific needs. The embodiment of the application does not limit the selected instruction method. As a result, the instruction method involved in the embodiment of the application should be understood as covering the instructions to be Various methods for obtaining information to be indicated.
此外,待指示信息可能存在其他等价形式,例如行向量可以表现为列向量,一个矩阵可以通过该矩阵的转置矩阵来表示,一个矩阵也可以表现为向量或者数组的形式,该向量或者数组可以由该矩阵的各个行向量或者列向量相互连接而成,两个向量的克罗内克尔积也可以通过一个向量与另一个向量的转置向量的乘积等形式来表现等。本申请实施例提供的技术方案应理解为涵盖各种形式。举例来说,本申请实施例涉及的部分或者全部特性,应理解为涵盖该特性的各种表现形式。In addition, the information to be indicated may have other equivalent forms. For example, a row vector can be expressed as a column vector, a matrix can be expressed by the transposed matrix of the matrix, and a matrix can also be expressed in the form of a vector or an array. It can be formed by connecting each row vector or column vector of the matrix, and the Kronecker product of two vectors can also be expressed in the form of the product of one vector and the transposed vector of another vector. The technical solutions provided in the embodiments of the present application should be understood to cover various forms. For example, some or all of the characteristics involved in the embodiments of the present application should be understood to cover various manifestations of the characteristics.
待指示信息可以作为一个整体一起发送,也可以分成多个子信息分开发送,而且这些子信息的发送周期和/或发送时机可以相同,也可以不同。具体发送方法本申请不进行限定。其中,这些子信息的发送周期和/或发送时机可以是预先定义的,例如根据协议预先定义的,也可以是发射端设备通过向接收端设备发送配置信息来配置的。其中,该配置信息可以例如但不限于包括无线资源控制信令,例如RRC信令、MAC层信令,例如MAC-CE信令和物理层信令,例如下行控制信息(downlink control information,DCI)中的一种或者至少两种的组合。The information to be instructed can be sent together as a whole, or divided into multiple sub-information to be sent separately, and the sending period and/or sending timing of these sub-information can be the same or different. The specific sending method is not limited in this application. The sending period and/or sending timing of these sub-information may be pre-defined, for example, pre-defined according to a protocol, or configured by the transmitting end device by sending configuration information to the receiving end device. Wherein, the configuration information may include, but is not limited to, radio resource control signaling, such as RRC signaling, MAC layer signaling, such as MAC-CE signaling and physical layer signaling, such as downlink control information (DCI) One or a combination of at least two of them.
第五,在下文示出的实施例中,第一、第二以及各种数字编号仅为描述方便进行的区分,并不用来限制本申请实施例的范围。例如,区分不同的指示信息、不同的指示字段等。Fifth, in the embodiments shown below, the first, second, and various numerical numbers are only for easy distinction for description, and are not used to limit the scope of the embodiments of the present application. For example, distinguish different indication information, different indication fields, etc.
第六,“预先定义”或“预配置”可以通过在设备(例如,包括终端设备和网络设备)中预先保存相应的代码、表格或其他可用于指示相关信息的方式来实现,本申请对于其具体的实现方式不做限定。其中,“保存”可以是指,保存在一个或者多个存储器中。所述一个或者多个存储器可以是单独的设置,也可以是集成在编码器或者译码器,处理器、或通信装置中。所述一个或者多个存储器也可以是一部分单独设置,一部分集成在译码器、处理器、或通信装置中。存储器的类型可以是任意形式的存储介质,本申请并不对此限定。Sixth, "pre-defined" or "pre-configured" can be implemented by pre-saving corresponding codes, tables or other methods that can be used to indicate relevant information in the device (for example, including terminal devices and network devices). The specific implementation method is not limited. Wherein, "saving" may refer to saving in one or more memories. The one or more memories may be provided separately, or integrated in an encoder or decoder, a processor, or a communication device. The one or more memories may also be partly provided separately, and partly integrated in the decoder, processor, or communication device. The type of the memory can be any form of storage medium, which is not limited in this application.
第七,本申请实施例中涉及的“协议”可以是指通信领域的标准协议,例如可以包括LTE协议、NR协议以及应用于未来的通信系统中的相关协议,本申请对此不做限定。Seventh, the “protocols” involved in the embodiments of the present application may refer to standard protocols in the communication field, for example, may include LTE protocol, NR protocol, and related protocols applied to future communication systems, which are not limited in this application.
第八,“至少一个”是指一个或者多个,“多个”是指两个或两个以上。“和/或”,描述关联对象的关联关系,表示可以存在三种关系,例如,A和/或B,可以表示:单独存在A,同时存在A和B,单独存在B的情况,其中A,B可以是单数或者复数。字符“/”一般表示前后关联对象是一种“或”的关系。“以下至少一项(个)”或其类似表达,是指的这些项中的任意组合,包括单项(个)或复数项(个)的任意组合。例如,a、b和c中的至少一项(个),可以表示:a,或,b,或,c,或,a和b,或,a和c,或,b和c,或,a、b和c。其中a、b和c分别可以是单个,也可以是多个。Eighth, "at least one" refers to one or more, and "multiple" refers to two or more. "And/or" describes the association relationship of the associated objects, indicating that there can be three relationships, for example, A and/or B, which can mean: A alone exists, both A and B exist, and B exists alone, where A, B can be singular or plural. The character "/" generally indicates that the associated objects are in an "or" relationship. "The following at least one item (a)" or similar expressions refers to any combination of these items, including any combination of a single item (a) or plural items (a). For example, at least one of a, b, and c can mean: a, or, b, or, c, or, a and b, or, a and c, or, b and c, or, a , B, and c. Wherein, a, b, and c can be single or multiple.
下面将结合附图详细说明本申请实施例提供的方法。The method provided in the embodiments of the present application will be described in detail below with reference to the accompanying drawings.
本申请实施例提供的方法可以应用于通过多天线技术通信的系统。例如,图1中所示的通信系统100。该通信系统可以包括至少一个网络设备和至少一个终端设备。网络设备和终端设备之间可通过多天线技术通信。The method provided in the embodiments of the present application can be applied to a system that communicates through multiple antenna technology. For example, the communication system 100 shown in FIG. 1. The communication system may include at least one network device and at least one terminal device. Multi-antenna technology can be used to communicate between network equipment and terminal equipment.
应理解,本申请实施例提供的方法并不仅限于在网络设备与终端设备之间的通信,还可应用于终端设备与终端设备之间的通信等。本申请对于该方法所应用的场景并不做限定。下文示出的实施例中,仅为便于理解和说明,以网络设备与终端设备之间的交互为例详细说明本申请实施例提供的方法。It should be understood that the method provided in the embodiments of the present application is not limited to the communication between the network device and the terminal device, and can also be applied to the communication between the terminal device and the terminal device. The application does not limit the application scenarios of the method. In the embodiments shown below, only for ease of understanding and description, the interaction between a network device and a terminal device is taken as an example to describe in detail the method provided in the embodiment of the present application.
还应理解,下文示出的实施例并未对本申请实施例提供的方法的执行主体的具体结构特别限定,只要能够通过运行记录有本申请实施例的提供的方法的代码的程序,以根据本申请实施例提供的方法进行通信即可,例如,本申请实施例提供的方法的执行主体可以是终端设备或网络设备,或者,是终端设备或网络设备中能够调用程序并执行程序的功能模块。It should also be understood that the embodiments shown below do not particularly limit the specific structure of the execution body of the method provided by the embodiments of the present application, as long as the program that records the code of the method provided by the embodiments of the present application can be run according to the present application. The method provided in the application embodiment only needs to communicate. For example, the execution subject of the method provided in the embodiment of the application may be a terminal device or a network device, or a functional module in the terminal device or network device that can call and execute the program.
还应理解,下文中为便于理解,以双域压缩的反馈方式为例,详细说明本申请所提供的方法。但这不应对本申请提供的方法所适用的场景构成任何限定。本申请所提供的方法可应用于其他通过反馈波束向量和加权系数系数来指示预编码矩阵的反馈方式。It should also be understood that in the following, for ease of understanding, the method provided by the present application is described in detail by taking the feedback mode of dual domain compression as an example. However, this should not constitute any limitation on the applicable scenarios of the method provided in this application. The method provided in this application can be applied to other feedback methods that indicate the precoding matrix by feeding back beam vectors and weighting coefficient coefficients.
图2是从设备交互的角度示出的本申请一实施例提供的用于构建预编码矩阵的系数指示方法200的示意性流程图。如图2所示,该方法200可以包括步骤210至步骤250。下面详细说明方法200中的各步骤。FIG. 2 is a schematic flowchart of a coefficient indicating method 200 for constructing a precoding matrix according to an embodiment of the present application, shown from the perspective of device interaction. As shown in FIG. 2, the method 200 may include step 210 to step 250. The steps in the method 200 are described in detail below.
在步骤210中,终端设备生成CSI报告。该CSI报告包括K 1个加权系数的量化信息和第一指示信息,该第一指示信息用于指示该K 1个加权系数是否为终端设备基于预配置的加权系数上报个数K 0所确定的所有幅度非零的加权系数。 In step 210, the terminal device generates a CSI report. The CSI report includes quantization information of K 1 weighting coefficients and first indication information, and the first indication information is used to indicate whether the K 1 weighting coefficients are determined by the terminal device based on the number of pre-configured weighting coefficient reports K 0 All weighting coefficients with non-zero amplitude.
具体地,该CSI报告可以是终端设备基于信道测量的结果确定的。该CSI报告中例如可以包括PMI,以用于指示构建与各频域单元对应的预编码矩阵。在一种实现方式中,终端设备基于双域压缩而反馈的CSI报告中可包括至少一个空域向量的指示、至少一个频域向量的指示以及K 1个加权系数的量化信息。其中,终端设备针对所有传输层上报的空域向量的个数例如为L(L为正整数),终端设备针对所有传输层上报频域向量的总个数例如为M(M为正整数),则对于单极化方向天线来说,终端设备针对所有传输层上报的加权系数的总个数K 1可以满足:K 1≤L×M;对于双极化方向天线来说,若L个空域向量被两个极化方向共用,则终端设备上报的加权系数的个数K 1可以满足:K 1≤2L×M。 Specifically, the CSI report may be determined by the terminal device based on the result of channel measurement. The CSI report may include PMI, for example, to indicate the construction of a precoding matrix corresponding to each frequency domain unit. In an implementation manner, the CSI report fed back by the terminal device based on dual-domain compression may include an indication of at least one spatial domain vector, an indication of at least one frequency domain vector, and quantization information of K 1 weighting coefficients. Wherein, the number of spatial vectors reported by the terminal device for all transmission layers is, for example, L (L is a positive integer), and the total number of frequency domain vectors reported by the terminal device for all transmission layers is, for example, M (M is a positive integer), then For a single-polarization antenna, the total number of weighting coefficients K 1 reported by the terminal equipment for all transmission layers can satisfy: K 1 ≤L×M; for a dual-polarization antenna, if the L space vectors are If the two polarization directions are shared, the number of weighting coefficients K 1 reported by the terminal device can satisfy: K 1 ≤ 2L×M.
下文中为方便说明,均以双极化方向天线为例来说明本申请实施例提供的方法。即,终端设备上报的加权系数的个数K 1可以满足:K 1≤2L×M。该K 1个加权系数与2L×M个空频向量对中的K 1个空频向量对对应。 In the following, for convenience of description, a dual-polarization direction antenna is used as an example to illustrate the method provided in the embodiment of the present application. That is, the number K 1 of weighting coefficients reported by the terminal device may satisfy: K 1 ≤ 2L×M. The weighting coefficients K 1 and 2L × M vectors corresponding to the null frequency of the frequency K 1 empty vector.
为节省开销,终端设备上报的加权系数的最大个数可以由网络设备通过信令预配置。可选地,该方法还包括:步骤220,网络设备发送第二指示信息,该第二指示信息用于指示为终端设备配置的加权系数上报个数K 0。相对应地,在步骤220中,终端设备接收该第二指示信息。 To save overhead, the maximum number of weighting coefficients reported by the terminal device can be pre-configured by the network device through signaling. Optionally, the method further includes: step 220, the network device sends second indication information, where the second indication information is used to indicate the number K 0 of weighting coefficients configured for the terminal device to be reported. Correspondingly, in step 220, the terminal device receives the second indication information.
网络设备为终端设备预配置的加权系数上报个数也就是终端设备上报的加权系数的最大个数。因此终端设备实际上报的加权系数的个数K 1小于或等于预配置的加权系数上报个数K 0The number of weighting coefficient reports pre-configured by the network equipment for the terminal equipment is the maximum number of weighting coefficients reported by the terminal equipment. Therefore, the number K 1 of weighting coefficients actually reported by the terminal device is less than or equal to the pre-configured number K 0 of weighting coefficients to be reported.
在一种可能的设计中,
Figure PCTCN2020086593-appb-000020
其中,β为预配置的系数,0<β≤1。β的取值例如可以为1/2、1/4、3/4等。本申请对此不作限定。由此可以看到,K 0≤2L×M。因此,K 1≤K 0≤2L×M。
In one possible design,
Figure PCTCN2020086593-appb-000020
Among them, β is a pre-configured coefficient, 0<β≤1. The value of β may be 1/2, 1/4, 3/4, etc., for example. This application does not limit this. It can be seen that K 0 ≤ 2L×M. Therefore, K 1 ≤K 0 ≤2L×M.
终端设备基于信道测量所确定的2L×M个加权系数中,可能包括幅度为零的加权系数和幅度非零的加权系数。为节省开销,终端设备可以将幅度为零的加权系数不做上报,而仅上报幅度非零的加权系数。终端设备所确定的2L×M个加权系数中幅度非零的加权系数的个数可能大于K 0,也可能小于或等于K 0。若终端设备所确定的2L×M个加权系数中幅度非零的加权系数的个数大于K 0,终端设备可以从该2L×M个加权系数中确定待上报的K 0个加权系数。例如,终端设备可以丢弃第Z个传输层的加权系数中的部分加权系数,以使得所确定的幅度非零的加权系数的总个数小于或等于K 0。若终端设备所确定的2L×M个加权系数中幅度非零的加权系数的个数小于或等于K 0,终端设备可以将所有幅度非零的加权系数全部上报。 Among the 2L×M weighting coefficients determined by the terminal device based on the channel measurement, it may include a weighting coefficient with a zero amplitude and a weighting coefficient with a non-zero amplitude. To save overhead, the terminal device may not report the weighting coefficients with a zero amplitude, but only report the weighting coefficients with a non-zero amplitude. The number of weighting coefficients with non-zero amplitude among the 2L×M weighting coefficients determined by the terminal device may be greater than K 0 , or may be less than or equal to K 0 . If the number of weighting coefficients with non-zero amplitude among the 2L×M weighting coefficients determined by the terminal device is greater than K 0 , the terminal device may determine the K 0 weighting coefficients to be reported from the 2L×M weighting coefficients. For example, the terminal device may discard part of the weighting coefficients in the weighting coefficients of the Z-th transmission layer, so that the total number of weighting coefficients with a non-zero amplitude determined is less than or equal to K 0 . If the number of weighting coefficients with non-zero amplitude among the 2L×M weighting coefficients determined by the terminal device is less than or equal to K 0 , the terminal device may report all weighting coefficients with non-zero amplitude.
换言之,终端设备基于信道测量和预配置的加权系数上报个数K 0所确定的所有幅度非零的加权系数的个数小于或等于K 0个。为方便区分和说明,将终端设备基于信道测量和预配置的加权系数上报个数K 0所确定的所有幅度非零的加权系数的个数记作K 2,K 2≤K 0,K 2为正整数。 In other words, the number of weighting coefficients with a non-zero amplitude determined by the terminal device based on the channel measurement and the number of pre-configured weighting coefficient reports K 0 is less than or equal to K 0 . For the convenience of distinction and explanation, the number of weighting coefficients with non-zero amplitude determined by the terminal equipment based on the channel measurement and the number of pre-configured weighting coefficient reports K 0 is denoted as K 2 , K 2 ≤ K 0 , and K 2 is Positive integer.
应理解,终端设备丢弃第Z个传输层的加权系数中的部分加权系数的方法仅为示例,本申请对于幅度非零的加权系数的总个数大于K 0的情况下终端设备的具体处理方式不作限定。 It should be understood that the method for the terminal device to discard some of the weighting coefficients of the Z-th transmission layer is only an example. This application deals with the specific processing method of the terminal device when the total number of weighting coefficients with a non-zero amplitude is greater than K 0 Not limited.
然而,在某些情况下,终端设备所确定的K 2个幅度非零的加权系数可能并没有全部通过CSI报告上报给网络设备。终端设备可能仅上报了该K 2个加权系数中的部分加权系数。如前所述,终端设备通过CSI报告上报的加权系数的个数为K 1,则终端设备通过CSI报告上报的K 1个加权系数可能是K 2个幅度非零的加权系数中的部分或全部。即,K 1≤K 2。若K 1<K 2,则可以认为终端设备丢弃了一部分幅度非零的加权系数。在此情况下,K 1可以表示丢弃之后的加权系数的个数,K 2可以表示丢弃之前的加权系数的个数。 However, in some cases, the K 2 non-zero weighting coefficients determined by the terminal device may not all be reported to the network device through the CSI report. The terminal device may only report part of the K 2 weighting coefficients. As mentioned above, the number of weighting coefficients reported by the terminal equipment through the CSI report is K 1 , then the K 1 weighting coefficients reported by the terminal equipment through the CSI report may be part or all of the K 2 weighting coefficients with non-zero amplitude. . That is, K 1 ≤ K 2 . If K 1 <K 2 , it can be considered that the terminal device discards a part of the weighting coefficients with non-zero amplitude. In this case, K 1 may represent the number of weighting coefficients after discarding, and K 2 may represent the number of weighting coefficients before discarding.
终端设备丢弃一部分幅度非零的加权系数的原因可能有很多。例如,网络设备预先为终端设备分配的用于传输CSI报告的物理上行资源不足。比如网络设备可能错误预估了信道的秩,如网络设备预估的信道的秩为2,则为终端设备分配的物理上行资源是基于秩为2而分配的。但终端设备基于信道测量所确定的秩为3,此情况下,网络设备预先分配的 物理上行资源可能无法将终端设备基于信道测量所确定的CSI的全部信息上报给网络设备。在终端设备基于信道测量所确定的用于指示预编码矩阵的信息中,空域向量和频域向量的优先级较高,终端设备不希望将空域向量和频域向量的指示丢弃。终端设备可能将所确定的幅度非零的加权系数中的一部分加权系数丢弃,以生成比特开销小于或等于网络设备预先分配的物理上行资源所能够承载的比特开销的CSI报告。又例如,终端设备所确定的幅度非零的加权系数中,可能有一部分加权系数的幅度远小于另一部分加权系数的幅度,将这一部分幅度较小的加权系数上报给网络设备对于提高反馈精度来说,效果可能并不显著。There may be many reasons why the terminal device discards a part of the weighting coefficient with a non-zero amplitude. For example, the physical uplink resources allocated by the network device for the terminal device in advance for transmitting the CSI report are insufficient. For example, the network equipment may incorrectly estimate the rank of the channel. For example, if the estimated channel rank of the network equipment is 2, the physical uplink resources allocated to the terminal equipment are allocated based on the rank 2. However, the rank determined by the terminal device based on channel measurement is 3. In this case, the physical uplink resources pre-allocated by the network device may not be able to report all the information of the CSI determined by the terminal device based on the channel measurement to the network device. Among the information used to indicate the precoding matrix determined by the terminal device based on the channel measurement, the spatial vector and the frequency domain vector have a higher priority, and the terminal device does not want to discard the indication of the spatial vector and the frequency domain vector. The terminal device may discard a part of the weighting coefficients of the determined non-zero amplitude to generate a CSI report whose bit overhead is less than or equal to the bit overhead that the physical uplink resource pre-allocated by the network device can carry. For another example, among the weighting coefficients with a non-zero amplitude determined by the terminal equipment, the amplitude of some weighting coefficients may be much smaller than the amplitude of the other part of the weighting coefficients. That said, the effect may not be significant.
但是,网络设备并不知道终端设备在上报CSI报告时是否丢弃了一部分幅度非零的加权系数。而网络设备如果能够知道终端设备所上报的CSI报告是否丢弃了一部分幅度非零的加权系数,往往是有好处的。例如,若终端设备因预先分配的物理上行资源不足而丢弃一部分加权系数,网络设备便可以在下一次调度时,为该终端设备分配更多可用于传输CSI报告的物理上行资源。However, the network device does not know whether the terminal device discards part of the weighting coefficients with a non-zero magnitude when reporting the CSI report. However, if the network device can know whether the CSI report reported by the terminal device has discarded a part of the weighting coefficient with a non-zero amplitude, it is often beneficial. For example, if the terminal device discards a part of the weighting coefficient due to insufficient pre-allocated physical uplink resources, the network device can allocate more physical uplink resources that can be used to transmit CSI reports for the terminal device in the next scheduling.
因此,终端设备可以在CSI报告中携带第一指示信息,以指示该CSI报告所上报的K 1个加权系数是否是终端设备基于信道测量所确定的所有幅度非零的加权系数,即上文所述的K 2个加权系数。或者说,该第一指示信息可用于指示该K 1个加权系数是否为K 2个加权系数中的全部加权系数。又或者说,该第一指示信息可用于指示K 1是否与K 2相等。 Therefore, the terminal device can carry the first indication information in the CSI report to indicate whether the K 1 weighting coefficients reported by the CSI report are all weighting coefficients with non-zero amplitudes determined by the terminal device based on channel measurement, as described above K 2 weighting coefficients mentioned above. In other words, the first indication information can be used to indicate whether the K 1 weighting coefficients are all of the K 2 weighting coefficients. In other words, the first indication information may be used to indicate whether K 1 is equal to K 2 .
终端设备可以通过多种不同的方式来指示该K 1个加权系数是否为终端设备基于信道测量确定的所有幅度非零的加权系数。下文中会结合具体实施例详细说明终端设备通过第一指示信息如何指示该K 1个加权系数是否为终端设备基于信道测量确定的所有幅度非零的加权系数,这里暂且省略对该具体过程的详细描述。 The terminal device can indicate whether the K 1 weighting coefficients are all weighting coefficients with non-zero amplitudes determined by the terminal device based on channel measurement in many different ways. Hereinafter, in conjunction with specific embodiments, it will be described in detail how the terminal device indicates through the first indication information whether the K 1 weighting coefficients are all weighting coefficients with non-zero amplitude determined by the terminal device based on channel measurement. The details of the specific process are omitted here. description.
为便于理解,下面简单说明终端设备基于双域压缩的码本反馈方式,确定待上报的空域向量、频域向量和加权系数的过程。For ease of understanding, the following briefly describes the process of determining the spatial vector, frequency vector, and weighting coefficients to be reported by the terminal device based on the codebook feedback mode of dual-domain compression.
终端设备可以基于接收到的参考信号,如CSI-RS,进行信道测量,以确定用于构建各频域单元的预编码矩阵的空域向量、频域向量和加权系数。The terminal device may perform channel measurement based on the received reference signal, such as CSI-RS, to determine the spatial vector, frequency vector, and weighting coefficient used to construct the precoding matrix of each frequency domain unit.
在一种实现方式中,终端设备可以基于参考信号估计信道矩阵,通过对信道矩阵或信道矩阵的协方差矩阵进行奇异值分解的方式,或者,通过对信道矩阵的协方差矩阵进行特征值分解的方式来确定每个传输层上各频域单元的预编码向量。应理解,基于信道测量确定预编码向量的具体方法可以参考现有技术,为了简洁,这里省略对该具体过程的详细说明。In one implementation, the terminal device can estimate the channel matrix based on the reference signal, by performing singular value decomposition on the channel matrix or the covariance matrix of the channel matrix, or by performing eigenvalue decomposition on the covariance matrix of the channel matrix. Way to determine the precoding vector of each frequency domain unit on each transmission layer. It should be understood that the specific method for determining the precoding vector based on the channel measurement can refer to the prior art. For brevity, a detailed description of the specific process is omitted here.
终端设备可以根据每个传输层上各频域单元的预编码向量构建与每个传输层对应的空频矩阵,并可以通过对空频矩阵进行空域和频域的DFT来确定待上报的至少一个空域向量、至少一个频域向量以及与至少一个空频向量对对应的至少一个加权系数。The terminal device can construct a space-frequency matrix corresponding to each transmission layer according to the precoding vector of each frequency domain unit on each transmission layer, and can determine at least one to be reported by performing spatial and frequency domain DFT on the space-frequency matrix The spatial vector, at least one frequency domain vector, and at least one weighting coefficient corresponding to the at least one pair of the spatial frequency vector.
如前所述,可选地,Z个传输层可以分别使用各自独立的空域向量,终端设备基于Z个传输层上报的L个空域向量例如可以包括针对每个传输层分别上报的空域向量的总和。As mentioned above, optionally, the Z transmission layers may use their own independent airspace vectors, and the terminal device based on the L airspace vectors reported by the Z transmission layers may include, for example, the sum of the airspace vectors separately reported for each transmission layer. .
可选地,Z个传输层可以分别使用各自独立的频域向量,终端设备基于Z个传输层上报的M个频域向量例如可以包括针对每个传输层分别上报的频域向量的总和。Optionally, the Z transmission layers may use their own independent frequency domain vectors, and the M frequency domain vectors reported by the terminal device based on the Z transmission layers may include, for example, the sum of frequency domain vectors separately reported for each transmission layer.
可选地,Z个传输层也可以共用L个空域向量。终端设备可以基于Z个传输层的空频矩阵进行空域DFT以确定较强的L个空域向量。Optionally, the Z transmission layers may also share L spatial vectors. The terminal device can perform spatial DFT based on the spatial frequency matrix of the Z transmission layers to determine the stronger L spatial vectors.
可选地,Z个传输层也可以共用M个频域向量。终端设备可以基于Z个传输层的空频矩阵进行频域DFT以确定较强的M个频域向量。Optionally, the Z transmission layers can also share M frequency domain vectors. The terminal device can perform frequency domain DFT based on the space-frequency matrix of the Z transmission layers to determine the stronger M frequency domain vectors.
可选地,Z个传输层也可以被划分为多个传输层组,同一传输层组中的一个或多个传输层可以共用空域向量和/或频域向量,来自不同传输层组的传输层可以分别使用各自独立的空域向量和/或频域向量。Optionally, the Z transmission layers can also be divided into multiple transmission layer groups, and one or more transmission layers in the same transmission layer group can share the space vector and/or frequency domain vector, and the transmission layers from different transmission layer groups Each independent spatial vector and/or frequency domain vector can be used.
以同一传输层组共用空域向量为例。终端设备可以基于同一传输层组中的一个或多个传输层的空频矩阵进行空域的DFT以确定较强的至少一个空域向量。该至少一个空域向量可以是终端设备所上报的L个空域向量中的部分空域向量。Take the same transmission layer group sharing airspace vectors as an example. The terminal device may perform spatial DFT based on the space-frequency matrix of one or more transmission layers in the same transmission layer group to determine at least one stronger spatial vector. The at least one airspace vector may be part of the airspace vector in the L airspace vectors reported by the terminal device.
下文中假设Z个传输层共用L个空域向量,Z个传输层分别使用各自独立的频域向量和加权系数。针对第z个传输层,终端设备可反馈M z个频域向量和由2L×M z个空频向量对中部分或全部空频向量对对应的加权系数。其中,2L×M z个空频向量对表示两个极化方向上的空频向量的总个数。 In the following, it is assumed that Z transmission layers share L spatial vectors, and Z transmission layers use their own independent frequency domain vectors and weighting coefficients. For the z-th transmission layer, the terminal device can feed back M z frequency domain vectors and the corresponding weighting coefficients of some or all of the 2L×M z space frequency vector pairs. Among them, 2L×M z space-frequency vector pairs represent the total number of space-frequency vectors in two polarization directions.
由于L个空域向量是Z个传输层共用的空域向量,则终端设备可以基于Z个传输层中的某一个传输层的空频矩阵来确定该L个空域向量,例如,终端设备可以基于Z个传输层中的第1个传输层的空频矩阵来确定该L个空域向量;终端设备也可以基于该Z个传输层中的每个传输层的空频矩阵来确定该L个空域向量。Since the L space vectors are common to the Z transmission layers, the terminal device can determine the L space vectors based on the space frequency matrix of one of the Z transmission layers. For example, the terminal device can determine the L space vectors based on the Z transmission layers. The space frequency matrix of the first transmission layer in the transmission layer determines the L space vectors; the terminal device may also determine the L space vectors based on the space frequency matrix of each of the Z transmission layers.
在一种实现方式中,终端设备可以将Z个传输层中每个传输层的空频矩阵进行空域DFT,以确定较强的L个空域向量。对每个空频矩阵进行空域DFT例如可以通过公式C'=U s HH z来实现。其中,H z表示该第z个传输层的空频矩阵。对于双极化方向天线,空频矩阵的维度可以是2N s×N 3。该H z可以是两个极化方向中每个极化方向上的空频矩阵,维度为N s×N 3;也可以是两个极化方向的空频矩阵,维度为2N s×N 3。本申请对此不作限定。 In an implementation manner, the terminal device may perform spatial DFT on the space-frequency matrix of each of the Z transmission layers to determine the stronger L spatial vectors. Performing spatial DFT on each spatial frequency matrix can be realized by the formula C′=U s H H z , for example. Among them, H z represents the space-frequency matrix of the z-th transmission layer. For a dual-polarization antenna, the dimension of the space-frequency matrix can be 2N s ×N 3 . The H z can be a space-frequency matrix in each of the two polarization directions, with a dimension of N s ×N 3 ; it can also be a space-frequency matrix with two polarization directions, with a dimension of 2N s ×N 3 . This application does not limit this.
U s表示由预先定义的空域向量集合中多个(如N s个)空域向量构建的矩阵。这里,为便于区分和说明,将用于进行空域DFT以确定用于构建预编码矩阵的空域向量的多个空域向量构建的矩阵U s称为空域基底。U s例如可以是前文所定义的未经过过采样的空域向量集合B s或经过过采样的空域向量集合中的某一子集,如
Figure PCTCN2020086593-appb-000021
其维度可以是N s×N s,以与一个极化方向上的空频矩阵对应;或者,也可以由前文所定义的空域向量集合B s
Figure PCTCN2020086593-appb-000022
确定,如将空域向量集合B s
Figure PCTCN2020086593-appb-000023
拼接得到,如
Figure PCTCN2020086593-appb-000024
Figure PCTCN2020086593-appb-000025
其维度可以是2N s×2N s,以与两个极化方向上的空频矩阵对应。
U s represents a matrix constructed from a plurality of (such as N s ) space vectors in a set of predefined space vectors. Here, for convenience of distinction and instructions for performing a plurality of spatial DFT to determine a spatial vector construction spatial precoding matrix vector construct called matrix U s airspace substrate. U s can be, for example, the previously defined set of spatial vectors B s that has not been oversampled or a subset of the set of spatial vectors that have been oversampled, such as
Figure PCTCN2020086593-appb-000021
Its dimension can be N s ×N s to correspond to the space-frequency matrix in a polarization direction; or, it can be defined by the set of space vectors B s or
Figure PCTCN2020086593-appb-000022
Determine, such as the airspace vector set B s or
Figure PCTCN2020086593-appb-000023
Spliced together, such as
Figure PCTCN2020086593-appb-000024
or
Figure PCTCN2020086593-appb-000025
The dimension may be 2N s × 2N s to correspond to the space frequency matrix in the two polarization directions.
C'表示由空域DFT得到的系数矩阵,维度可以是L×N s,或,2L×2N sC'represents the coefficient matrix obtained by spatial DFT, and the dimension can be L×N s , or 2L×2N s .
在1至Z的范围内对z取值,可以得到由空域DFT得到的2Z个维度为L×N s的系数矩阵,或,Z个维度为2L×2N s的系数矩阵。其中,2Z个维度为L×N s的系数矩阵包括与两个极化方向中每个极化方向对应的Z个系数矩阵。 Taking the value of z in the range of 1 to Z, 2Z coefficient matrices with dimensions of L×N s , or Z coefficient matrices with dimensions of 2L×2N s obtained from spatial DFT can be obtained. Wherein, the 2Z coefficient matrices with dimensions of L×N s include Z coefficient matrices corresponding to each of the two polarization directions.
终端设备可以基于一个极化方向上的多个系数矩阵确定较强的L个空域向量,也可以基于两个极化方向上的多个系数矩阵确定较强的L个空域向量。该较强的L个空域向量可以是被Z个传输层、两个极化方向共用的空域向量。例如,终端设备可以根据同一极化方向上的每个系数矩阵中各行元素的模的平方和大小,确定模的平方和较大的L个行。由Z个系数矩阵所确定的模的平方和较大的L个行的序号可以是空域基底中的L个列的序号, 由此可以确定L个空域向量。The terminal device may determine the stronger L spatial vectors based on multiple coefficient matrices in one polarization direction, or may determine the stronger L spatial vectors based on multiple coefficient matrices in two polarization directions. The stronger L space vectors may be space vectors shared by Z transmission layers and two polarization directions. For example, the terminal device may determine the L rows with a larger sum of squares of the modulus according to the sum of the squares of the elements in each row of the coefficient matrix in the same polarization direction. The sequence numbers of the L rows where the square sum of the modulus determined by the Z coefficient matrices is larger may be the sequence numbers of the L columns in the spatial base, and thus the L spatial vectors can be determined.
终端设备针对第z个传输层上报的M z个频域向量可以基于第z个传输层的空频矩阵确定。对第z个传输层的空频矩阵进行空域和频域的DFT例如可以通过公式C=U s HH zU f来实现,或者也可以在上文C'=U s HH z的基础上进一步右乘U f得到。对于双极化天线而言,由此得到的系数矩阵C的维度可是为2L×M zThe M z frequency domain vectors reported by the terminal device for the z-th transmission layer may be determined based on the space-frequency matrix of the z-th transmission layer. The space-frequency and frequency-domain DFT of the space-frequency matrix of the z-th transmission layer can be implemented, for example, by the formula C=U s H H z U f , or on the basis of the above C′=U s H H z Further right multiply U f to get. For a dual-polarized antenna, the dimension of the coefficient matrix C thus obtained can be 2L×M z .
其中,C表示由空域和频域DFT得到的系数矩阵。U f表示由预先定义的频域向量集合中多个(如N 3个)空域向量构建的矩阵,其维度可以是N 3×N 3。U f例如可以是前文所定义的未经过过采样的空域向量集合B f或经过过采样的空域向量集合中的某一子集,如
Figure PCTCN2020086593-appb-000026
这里,为便于区分和说明,将用于进行频域DFT以确定用于构建预编码矩阵的多个频域向量构建的矩阵U f称为频域基底。
Among them, C represents the coefficient matrix obtained by spatial and frequency domain DFT. U f represents a matrix constructed from a plurality of (for example, N 3 ) spatial vectors in a predefined frequency domain vector set, and its dimension may be N 3 ×N 3 . U f can be, for example, a subset of the previously defined set of spatial vectors B f without oversampling or the set of spatial vectors after oversampling, such as
Figure PCTCN2020086593-appb-000026
Here, for the convenience of distinction and description, the matrix U f used to perform frequency domain DFT to determine the multiple frequency domain vectors used to construct the precoding matrix is referred to as a frequency domain base.
终端设备可以从该系数矩阵C中确定较强的M z个列。终端设备例如可以根据该系数矩阵C中各列元素的模的平方和大小,确定模的平方和较大的M z个列。该系数矩阵C中较强的M z个列可用于确定频域基底中被选择的M z个频域向量。如系数矩阵C中较强的M z个列的序号可以是频域基底中被选择的M z个列向量的序号,由此可以确定M z个频域向量。 The terminal device can determine the stronger M z columns from the coefficient matrix C. For example, the terminal device may determine the M z columns with a larger sum of squares of the modulus according to the magnitude of the sum of squares of the elements of each column in the coefficient matrix C. The stronger M z columns in the coefficient matrix C can be used to determine the selected M z frequency domain vectors in the frequency domain base. The stronger the coefficient matrix C M z may be a number of columns in a frequency domain base selected M z number of column vectors, thereby determining the frequency-domain vector M z.
此外,由该系数矩阵C还可以进一步确定与各空频向量对对应的加权系数。如前所述,该系数矩阵C中的第l行可以对应2L个空域向量中第一极化方向上的第l个空域向量,该系数矩阵C中的第L+l行可以对应2L个空域向量中第二极化方向上的第l个空域向量。该系数矩阵C中的第m列可以对应M z个频域向量中的第m z个频域向量。 In addition, the coefficient matrix C can further determine the weighting coefficient corresponding to each pair of space-frequency vectors. As mentioned above, the lth row in the coefficient matrix C can correspond to the lth spatial vector in the first polarization direction in the 2L spatial vectors, and the L+1th row in the coefficient matrix C can correspond to the 2L spatial vectors The l-th spatial vector in the second polarization direction in the vector. The mth column in the coefficient matrix C may correspond to the mzth frequency domain vector among the Mz frequency domain vectors.
应理解,上文中提供的用于确定空域向量、频域向量和加权系数的方法仅为示例,不应对本申请构成任何限定。空域向量、频域向量和加权系数的确定方法例如可以与NR协议中TS38.214版本15(release 15,R15)中定义的类型II(type II)码本的反馈方式下波束向量及其加权系数的确定方法相同。此外,终端设备例如还可以通过现有的估计算法,如多重信号分类算法(multiple signal classification algorithm,MUSIC)、巴特利特(Bartlett)算法或旋转不变子空间算法(estimation of signal parameters via rotation invariant technique algorithm,ESPRIT)等来确定空域向量、频域向量和加权系数。为了简洁,这里不再举例说明。此外,本申请对于确定空域向量、频域向量和加权系数的先后顺序也不作限定。It should be understood that the methods for determining the spatial vector, the frequency domain vector, and the weighting coefficients provided above are only examples, and should not constitute any limitation to the application. The method for determining the spatial vector, the frequency domain vector and the weighting coefficient can be, for example, the same as the beam vector and its weighting coefficient in the feedback mode of the type II (type II) codebook defined in TS38.214 version 15 (release 15, R15) of the NR protocol The method of determining is the same. In addition, the terminal device can also use existing estimation algorithms, such as multiple signal classification algorithm (MUSIC), Bartlett algorithm, or rotation invariant subspace algorithm (estimation of signal parameters via rotation invariant), for example. technique algorithm, ESPRIT) etc. to determine the spatial vector, frequency vector and weighting coefficients. For the sake of brevity, no examples are given here. In addition, this application does not limit the sequence of determining the spatial vector, frequency vector, and weighting coefficient.
还应理解,上文仅以Z个传输层、两个极化方向共用L个空域向量,每个传输层分别使用各自独立的频域向量为例来说明终端设备确定空域向量、频域向量和加权系数的具体过程。但这不应对本申请构成任何限定。当Z个传输层分别使用各自独立的空域向量或两个极化方向分别使用各自独立的空域向量时,终端设备仍然可以采用与上文所述相似的方式来确定空域向量、频域向量和加权系数。It should also be understood that the above only uses Z transmission layers and two polarization directions to share L spatial vectors, and each transmission layer uses its own independent frequency domain vector as an example to illustrate that the terminal device determines the spatial vector, frequency domain vector and The specific process of weighting coefficient. But this should not constitute any limitation to this application. When the Z transmission layers use their own independent spatial vectors or the two polarization directions use their own independent spatial vectors, the terminal device can still determine the spatial vector, frequency domain vector, and weight in a similar manner as described above. coefficient.
需要说明的是,当预先定义的空域向量集合包括经过过采样扩展得到的多个子集时,和/或,当预先定义的频域向量集合包括经过过采样扩展得到的多个子集时,终端设备对空频矩阵进行空域和频域的DFT以确定空域向量、频域向量和加权系数的具体过程与之相似,具体可以参考现有技术。为了简洁,这里省略对该具体过程的详细说明。It should be noted that when the predefined spatial vector set includes multiple subsets obtained through oversampling and expansion, and/or when the predefined frequency domain vector set includes multiple subsets obtained through oversampling and expansion, the terminal device The specific process of performing spatial and frequency domain DFT on the spatial frequency matrix to determine the spatial vector, frequency domain vector, and weighting coefficient is similar to this, and the specific process can refer to the prior art. For brevity, a detailed description of the specific process is omitted here.
终端设备在确定了用于构建预编码矩阵的空域向量、频域向量和加权系数之后,可以通过CSI报告向网络设备上报,以便网络设备恢复预编码矩阵。如前所述,在终端设备所确定的与2L×M个空频向量对对应的2L×M个加权系数中,终端设备最多仅需上报K 0 个加权系数,而终端设备实际上报的加权系数的个数为K 1个,K 1≤K 0After the terminal device determines the spatial vector, frequency domain vector, and weighting coefficients used to construct the precoding matrix, it can report to the network device through the CSI report, so that the network device can restore the precoding matrix. As mentioned above, among the 2L×M weighting coefficients corresponding to the 2L×M space-frequency vector pairs determined by the terminal equipment, the terminal equipment only needs to report at most K 0 weighting coefficients, and the terminal equipment actually reports the weighting coefficients The number of is K 1 , and K 1 ≤ K 0 .
终端设备在通过CSI报告上报K 1个加权系数时,可以通过量化值指示,也可以通过量化值的索引指示,或者也可以通过非量化值指示,本申请对于加权系数的指示方式不作限定,只要让对端知道加权系数即可。在本申请实施例中,为方便说明,将用于指示加权系数的信息称为加权系数的量化信息。该量化信息例如可以是量化值、索引或者其他任何可用于指示加权系数的信息。 When a terminal device reports K 1 weighting coefficients through a CSI report, it can be indicated by a quantized value, an index of a quantized value, or a non-quantized value. This application does not limit the way of indicating weighting coefficients, as long as Just let the peer know the weighting coefficient. In the embodiments of the present application, for the convenience of description, the information used to indicate the weighting coefficient is referred to as the quantization information of the weighting coefficient. The quantization information may be, for example, a quantization value, an index, or any other information that can be used to indicate a weighting coefficient.
在一种可能的实现方式中,终端设备可以通过归一化方式来指示加权系数。例如,终端设备可以从该K 1个加权系数中确定模最大的加权系数(例如记作最大加权系数),并指示该最大加权系数在K 1个加权系数中所处的位置。终端设备可进一步指示其余的K 1-1个加权系数相对于该最大加权系数的相对值。终端设备可以通过各相对值的量化值索引来指示上述K 1-1个加权系数。例如,网络设备和终端设备可以预先定义多个量化值与多个索引的一一对应关系,终端设备可以基于该一一对应关系,将上述各加权系数相对于最大加权系数的相对值反馈给网络设备。由于终端设备对各加权系数进行了量化,量化值与真实值可能相同或相近,故称为加权系数的量化值。 In a possible implementation manner, the terminal device may indicate the weighting coefficient in a normalized manner. For example, the terminal device may determine the weighting coefficient with the largest modulus from the K 1 weighting coefficients (for example, recorded as the maximum weighting coefficient), and indicate the position of the largest weighting coefficient in the K 1 weighting coefficients. The terminal device may further indicate the relative value of the remaining K 1 -1 weighting coefficients with respect to the maximum weighting coefficient. The terminal device may indicate the above K 1 -1 weighting coefficients through the quantization value index of each relative value. For example, the network device and the terminal device may predefine a one-to-one correspondence between multiple quantized values and multiple indexes, and the terminal device may feed back to the network the relative value of each weighting coefficient with respect to the maximum weighting coefficient based on the one-to-one correspondence. equipment. Since the terminal device quantizes each weighting coefficient, the quantized value may be the same or similar to the real value, so it is called the quantized value of the weighting coefficient.
应理解,上文列举的通过归一化方式来指示各加权系数的方式仅为一种可能的实现方式,而不应对本申请构成任何限定。本申请对于终端设备指示加权系数的具体方式不作限定。It should be understood that the manner of indicating each weighting coefficient through a normalization manner listed above is only a possible implementation manner, and should not constitute any limitation to the application. This application does not limit the specific manner in which the terminal device indicates the weighting coefficient.
需要说明的是,上文所提及的归一化,可以是以每个极化方向为单位来确定最大加权系数,也可以是在多个极化方向对应的加权系数中确定最大加权系数,即以多个极化方向为单位来确定最大加权系数。本申请对于归一化的单位不作限定。It should be noted that the normalization mentioned above can determine the maximum weighting coefficient in units of each polarization direction, or determine the maximum weighting coefficient among the weighting coefficients corresponding to multiple polarization directions. That is, the maximum weighting coefficient is determined in units of multiple polarization directions. This application does not limit the unit of normalization.
还应理解,该第一指示信息在用于指示K 1个加权系数时,可通过直接或间接的方式来指示。例如,对于最大加权系数,可以指示其在K 1个加权系数中的位置;又例如,对于量化值为零的加权系数,也可以指示其在K 1个加权系数中的位置。换句话说,该第一指示信息并不一定指示了K 1个加权系数中的每一个系数。只要网络设备可以根据第一指示信息恢复出K 1个加权系数即可。 It should also be understood that, when the first indication information is used to indicate the K 1 weighting coefficients, it may be indicated in a direct or indirect manner. For example, for the largest weighting coefficient, it can indicate its position in the K 1 weighting coefficients; for another example, for a weighting coefficient with a quantization value of zero, it can also indicate its position in the K 1 weighting coefficients. In other words, the first indication information does not necessarily indicate each coefficient of the K 1 weighting coefficients. As long as the network device can recover K 1 weighting coefficients according to the first indication information.
此外,终端设备通过第一指示信息上报L个空域向量和M个频域向量时,也可以通过多种不同的方法来上报。In addition, when the terminal device reports the L spatial vectors and M frequency domain vectors through the first indication information, it may also report in a variety of different methods.
例如,终端设备可以通过L个空域向量的组合的索引来指示L个空域向量,也可以通过L个空域向量各自的索引来分别指示该L个空域向量。在空域向量集合通过过采样因子扩展为多个子集时,终端设备还可以通过该第一指示信息进一步指示L个空域向量所属的子集的索引。For example, the terminal device can indicate the L space vectors through the index of the combination of the L space vectors, and can also indicate the L space vectors respectively through the respective indexes of the L space vectors. When the set of spatial vectors is expanded into multiple subsets by an oversampling factor, the terminal device may further indicate the index of the subset to which the L spatial vectors belong through the first indication information.
又例如,终端设备可以通过与每个传输层对应的一个或多个频域向量的组合的索引来指示频域向量,如,对于第z个传输层,通过M z个频域向量的组合的索引来指示M z个频域向量;终端设备也可以通过M z个频域向量各自的索引来分别指示该M z个频域向量。在频域向量集合通过过采样因子扩展为多个子集时,终端设备还可以通过该CSI报告进一步指示该M z个频域向量所属的子集的索引。 For another example, the terminal device may indicate the frequency domain vector through the index of the combination of one or more frequency domain vectors corresponding to each transmission layer. For example, for the zth transmission layer, the frequency domain vector may be determined by the combination of M z frequency domain vectors. M z index to indicate frequency-domain vectors; terminal device may be indicate that the frequency-domain vector M z M z by the respective frequency-domain vector index. When the set of frequency domain vectors is expanded into multiple subsets by an oversampling factor, the terminal device may further indicate the index of the subset to which the M z frequency domain vectors belong through the CSI report.
应理解,上文所列举的终端设备通过CSI报告指示空域向量、频域向量和加权系数的具体方法仅为示例,不应对本申请构成任何限定。终端设备可以采用现有技术中所提供的方法来指示空域向量、频域向量和加权系数。It should be understood that the specific methods for the terminal device to indicate the spatial vector, the frequency domain vector, and the weighting coefficient through the CSI report listed above are only examples, and should not constitute any limitation to this application. The terminal device can use the methods provided in the prior art to indicate the spatial vector, the frequency vector, and the weighting coefficient.
例如,终端设备可以根据网络设备预先分配的物理上行资源所能够承载的比特开销确定实际可上报的加权系数的个数。如前所述,CSI报告的第一部分的比特开销可以预先确定,因此,终端设备可以根据网络设备预先分配的物理上行资源所能够承载的比特开销确定CSI报告的第二部分所能够承载的最大比特开销。For example, the terminal device may determine the number of weighting coefficients that can actually be reported according to the bit overhead that the physical uplink resource pre-allocated by the network device can carry. As mentioned above, the bit overhead of the first part of the CSI report can be determined in advance. Therefore, the terminal device can determine the maximum bit that can be carried in the second part of the CSI report according to the bit overhead that can be carried by the physical uplink resources pre-allocated by the network device. Overhead.
假设网络设备为终端设备预先分配的物理上行资源所能够承载的比特开销为X 0比特,CSI报告的第一部分的比特开销为X 1比特,剩余的可用于承载CSI报告的第二部分的比特开销为X 2比特,X 2=X 0-X 1。并假设终端设备由基于信道测量和K 0所确定的所有幅度非零的加权系数的个数K 1确定的CSI报告的第二部分所需的比特数Q。 Assuming that the bit overhead that the physical uplink resource pre-allocated by the network device for the terminal device can carry is X 0 bits, the bit overhead of the first part of the CSI report is X 1 bits, and the remaining bit overhead can be used to carry the second part of the CSI report It is X 2 bits, X 2 =X 0 -X 1 . It is also assumed that the terminal device determines the number of bits Q required for the second part of the CSI report by determining the number K 1 of all weighting coefficients with non-zero amplitudes determined based on the channel measurement and K 0 .
若Q大于X 2,则终端设备可以基于X 2比特丢弃K 1个加权系数中的部分加权系数,由此而生成的CSI报告的第二部分的开销可以为X 2比特。可以理解的是,终端设备在丢弃了一部分加权系数之后所需的比特开销可能小于X 2比特,例如为X 3比特,X 3<X 2,此情况下,终端设备可以通过填充(padding)比特的方式来补齐。例如在X 3比特的后面填充预定义值,如零,或,在K 1个加权系数的量化信息按照预定义的规则填充至该X 2比特中,将超出该X 2比特的Q-X 2比特直接丢弃等。本申请对于终端设备生成X 2比特的CSI报告第二部分的具体方法不作限定。 If Q is greater than X 2 , the terminal device may discard part of the K 1 weighting coefficients based on X 2 bits, and the overhead of the second part of the generated CSI report may be X 2 bits. It is understandable that the bit overhead required by the terminal device after discarding a part of the weighting coefficients may be less than X 2 bits, for example, X 3 bits, X 3 <X 2. In this case, the terminal device can use padding bits Way to make up. For example, a predefined value such as zero is filled after X 3 bits, or the quantization information of K 1 weighting coefficient is filled into the X 2 bits according to a predefined rule, and the QX 2 bits exceeding the X 2 bits are directly Discard etc. This application does not limit the specific method for the terminal device to generate the second part of the X 2- bit CSI report.
若Q小于或等于X 2,则终端设备可以基于Q比特生成CSI报告的第二部分。该CSI报告的第二部分为Q比特。 If Q is less than or equal to X 2 , the terminal device can generate the second part of the CSI report based on the Q bits. The second part of the CSI report is Q bits.
需要说明的是,终端设备所确定的CSI报告的第二部分所需的比特数Q并不仅基于K 1个加权系数而确定,终端设备还可以进一步结合携带在CSI报告第二部分中的信息,如空域向量的指示、频域向量的指示、加权系数的位置等信息,来确定CSI报告的第二部分所需的比特数。应理解,本申请对于CSI报告第二部分中所包含的信息的具体内容不作限定。只要网络设备和终端设备预先协商好在CSI报告的第二部分中携带的信息即可。 It should be noted that the number of bits Q required for the second part of the CSI report determined by the terminal device is not only determined based on K 1 weighting coefficients, and the terminal device can further combine the information carried in the second part of the CSI report. Information such as the indication of the spatial vector, the indication of the frequency domain, and the position of the weighting coefficient determines the number of bits required for the second part of the CSI report. It should be understood that this application does not limit the specific content of the information contained in the second part of the CSI report. As long as the network equipment and the terminal equipment negotiate in advance the information carried in the second part of the CSI report.
在步骤230中,终端设备发送该CSI报告。相对应地,在步骤230中,网络设备接收该CSI报告。In step 230, the terminal device sends the CSI report. Correspondingly, in step 230, the network device receives the CSI report.
终端设备例如可以通过物理上行资源,如物理上行共享信道(physical uplink share channel,PUSCH)或物理上行控制信道(physical uplink control channel,PUCCH),向网络设备发送该CSI报告,以便于网络设备基于该CSI报告确定针对各传输层上报的空频向量对,以便恢复各传输层上与各频域向量对应的预编码向量。For example, the terminal device can send the CSI report to the network device through physical uplink resources, such as physical uplink share channel (PUSCH) or physical uplink control channel (PUCCH), so that the network device can use the The CSI report determines the space-frequency vector pairs reported for each transmission layer, so as to recover the precoding vector corresponding to each frequency domain vector on each transmission layer.
终端设备通过物理上行资源向网络设备发送CSI报告的具体方法可以与现有技术相同,为了简洁,这里省略对其具体过程的详细说明。The specific method for the terminal device to send the CSI report to the network device through the physical uplink resource may be the same as the prior art. For brevity, detailed description of the specific process is omitted here.
在步骤240中,网络设备根据该CSI报告,确定K 1个加权系数以及该K 1个加权系数是否为终端设备基于预配置的加权系数上报个数K 0所确定的所有幅度非零的加权系数。 In step 240, the network device determines K 1 weighting coefficients and whether the K 1 weighting coefficients are all non-zero weighting coefficients determined by the terminal device based on the pre-configured weighting coefficient report number K 0 according to the CSI report .
网络设备在接收到该CSI报告之后,可以根据预先定义的第一部分的长度对该CSI报告的第一部分进行译码。在解析该CSI报告的第一部分之后,可以确定CSI报告的第二部分的长度,进而对CSI报告的第二部分进行译码。由此,终端设备可以根据加权系数的量化信息确定K 1个加权系数,并根据第一指示信息确定该K 1个加权系数是否为终端设备基于预配置的加权系数上报个数K 0所确定的所有幅度非零的加权系数。 After receiving the CSI report, the network device may decode the first part of the CSI report according to the predefined length of the first part. After parsing the first part of the CSI report, the length of the second part of the CSI report can be determined, and then the second part of the CSI report can be decoded. Therefore, the terminal device can determine K 1 weighting coefficients according to the quantization information of the weighting coefficients, and determine whether the K 1 weighting coefficients are determined by the terminal device based on the number K 0 of the weighting coefficients reported by the terminal device based on the first indication information. All weighting coefficients with non-zero amplitude.
网络设备根据加权系数的量化信息确定K 1个加权系数的具体过程可以参考现有技术,为了简洁,这里省略对该具体过程的详细描述。另外,下文中会结合具体实施例详细 说明网络设备根据CSI报告确定该K 1个加权系数是否为终端设备基于预配置的加权系数上报个数K 0所确定的所有幅度非零的加权系数的具体方法,为了简洁,这里暂且省略对该具体方法的详细描述。 The specific process for the network device to determine the K 1 weighting coefficients according to the quantization information of the weighting coefficients may refer to the prior art. For brevity, a detailed description of the specific process is omitted here. In addition, the following will describe in detail the specific embodiments of the network device according to the CSI report to determine whether the K 1 weighting coefficients are all non-zero weighting coefficients determined by the terminal device based on the pre-configured weighting coefficient report number K 0 Method, for the sake of brevity, a detailed description of the specific method is omitted here.
可选地,该方法200还包括步骤250,网络设备根据CSI报告确定一个或多个频域单元的预编码矩阵。Optionally, the method 200 further includes step 250. The network device determines the precoding matrix of one or more frequency domain units according to the CSI report.
网络设备根据CSI报告可以确定终端设备所上报的空域向量、频域向量和加权系数。The network device can determine the spatial vector, frequency vector, and weighting coefficient reported by the terminal device based on the CSI report.
由于网络设备解析该CSI报告的具体过程与终端设备生成CSI报告的具体过程相似。为了简洁,这里省略对该具体过程的详细说明。此外,有关译码的具体过程可以参考现有技术,为了简洁,这里省略对其具体过程的详细说明。Because the specific process of the network device parsing the CSI report is similar to the specific process of the terminal device generating the CSI report. For brevity, a detailed description of the specific process is omitted here. In addition, the specific process of decoding can refer to the prior art. For brevity, a detailed description of the specific process is omitted here.
假设终端设备上报的L个空域向量是Z个传输层共用的空域向量;终端设备上报的M个频域向量是针对Z个传输层上报的全部频域向量,其中M z个频域向量是针对第z个传输层上报的频域向量;终端设备上报的K 1个加权系数是针对Z个传输层上报的全部加权系数,其中K z个加权系数是针对第z个传输层上报的加权系数。那么,该L个空域向量和针对第z个传输层上报的M z个频域向量和K z个加权系数可用于构建第z个传输层的空频矩阵。该第z个传输层的空频矩阵可以由该L个空域向量和M z个频域向量所构建的空频分量矩阵加权求和得到。由此可以得到该第z个传输层上一个或多个频域单元的预编码向量。 Assume that the L space vectors reported by the terminal equipment are the space vectors shared by the Z transmission layers; the M frequency domain vectors reported by the terminal equipment are all frequency domain vectors reported for the Z transmission layers, and the M z frequency domain vectors are for The frequency domain vector reported by the z-th transmission layer; the K 1 weighting coefficients reported by the terminal device are all weighting coefficients reported for the Z transmission layers, and the K z weighting coefficients are the weighting coefficients reported for the z-th transmission layer. Then, the L spatial vectors and the M z frequency domain vectors and K z weighting coefficients reported for the z-th transmission layer can be used to construct the z-th transmission layer's spatial frequency matrix. The space-frequency matrix of the z-th transmission layer may be obtained by a weighted summation of the space-frequency component matrix constructed by the L space domain vectors and the M z frequency domain vectors. Thus, the precoding vector of one or more frequency domain units on the z-th transmission layer can be obtained.
此后,网络设备可以基于每个传输层上第n(1≤n≤N 3且n为整数)个频域单元确定的预编码向量可以构建与第n个频域单元对应的预编码矩阵。例如,按照Z个传输层中第1个传输层至第Z个传输层的顺序将与第n个频域单元对应的预编码向量依次排布,并进行归一化处理,可以得到与第n个频域单元对应的预编码矩阵。 Thereafter, the network device may be based on the transport layer of each first n (1≤n≤N 3 and n is an integer) frequency-domain precoding vector determining unit may be constructed with the n-th unit corresponding to a frequency domain pre-coding matrix. For example, according to the order from the first transmission layer to the Zth transmission layer in the Z transmission layers, the precoding vectors corresponding to the nth frequency domain unit are arranged in sequence, and the normalization process is performed, and the nth transmission layer Precoding matrix corresponding to each frequency domain unit.
应理解,上文所描述的基于CSI报告中指示的空域向量、频域向量和加权系数确定与各传输层上各频域单元对应的预编码向量,进而确定与各频域单元对应的预编码矩阵的方法仅为示例,不应对本申请构成任何限定。本申请对于网络设备基于空域向量、频域向量和加权系数确定预编码矩阵的具体方法不作限定。It should be understood that the above-described precoding vector corresponding to each frequency domain unit on each transmission layer is determined based on the spatial vector, frequency domain vector, and weighting coefficient indicated in the CSI report, and then the precoding corresponding to each frequency domain unit is determined The matrix method is only an example, and should not constitute any limitation to this application. This application does not limit the specific method for the network device to determine the precoding matrix based on the spatial vector, the frequency vector, and the weighting coefficient.
下面结合具体的实施例详细说明终端设备如何通过第一指示信息指示终端设备是否丢弃了加权系数,网络设备如何根据第一指示信息确定终端设备是否丢弃了加权系数,以及网络设备在终端设备丢弃了加权系数的情况下如何估计CSI报告的第二部分的长度。The following describes in detail how the terminal device uses the first indication information to indicate whether the terminal device discards the weighting coefficient, and how the network device determines whether the terminal device discards the weighting coefficient according to the first indication information, and how the network device discards the weighting coefficient in the terminal device with reference to specific embodiments. How to estimate the length of the second part of the CSI report in the case of weighting coefficients.
可选地,该第一指示信息包括K 1的指示和K 2的指示。 Optionally, the first indication information includes an indication of K 1 and an indication of K 2 .
作为一个实施例,该K 1的指示携带在CSI报告的第二部分中,该K 2的指示携带在CSI报告的第一部分中。 As an embodiment, the K 1 indication is carried in the second part of the CSI report, and the K 2 indication is carried in the first part of the CSI report.
例如,该K 1的值可以通过CSI报告第二部分中长度为2L×M的位图来确定。该位图中的每个比特可对应于一个空频向量对,每个比特可用于指示所对应的空频向量对是否上报了加权系数,也就是指示所对应的空频向量对是否用于构建预编码矩阵。例如,该位图中的某一比特置“0”时,则表示该比特所对应的空频向量对所对应的加权系数没有被上报;该位图中的某一比特置“1”时,则表示该比特所对应的空频向量对所对应的加权系数被上报。基于该位图中的每个比特,网络设备可以确定终端设备实际上报的加权系数的总个数K 1For example, the value of K 1 can be determined by a bitmap with a length of 2L×M in the second part of the CSI report. Each bit in the bitmap can correspond to a space-frequency vector pair, and each bit can be used to indicate whether the corresponding space-frequency vector pair has reported a weighting coefficient, that is, whether the corresponding space-frequency vector pair is used for construction Precoding matrix. For example, when a bit in the bitmap is set to "0", it means that the weighting coefficient corresponding to the space-frequency vector pair corresponding to the bit has not been reported; when a bit in the bitmap is set to "1", It means that the weighting coefficient corresponding to the space-frequency vector pair corresponding to the bit is reported. Based on each bit in the bitmap, the network device can determine the total number of weighting coefficients K 1 actually reported by the terminal device.
K 2的值可以通过
Figure PCTCN2020086593-appb-000027
个比特来指示。
Figure PCTCN2020086593-appb-000028
个比特可用于指示K 0种可选的取 值。由于K 2≤K 0,故该
Figure PCTCN2020086593-appb-000029
个比特可用于指示K 2的任意可能的取值。
The value of K 2 can be passed
Figure PCTCN2020086593-appb-000027
Bits to indicate.
Figure PCTCN2020086593-appb-000028
The bits can be used to indicate K 0 optional values. Since K 2 ≤K 0 , the
Figure PCTCN2020086593-appb-000029
The bits can be used to indicate any possible value of K 2 .
K 2的值也可以通过针对Z个传输层中每个传输层分别确定的幅度非零的加权系数的个数的总和来确定。如前所述,终端设备针对Z个传输层中每个传输层分别确定的幅度非零的加权系数的个数的总和应小于或等于K 0,当终端设备确定的幅度非零的加权系数的总个数大于K 0时,这里所述的针对每个传输层分别确定的幅度非零的加权系数的个数是指在基于预配置的加权系数的上报个数K 0和信道测量所确定的针对每个传输层希望反馈的幅度非零的加权系数的个数。 The value of K 2 may also be determined by the sum of the number of weighting coefficients with a non-zero amplitude determined for each of the Z transmission layers. As mentioned above, the sum of the number of weighting coefficients with non-zero amplitudes determined by the terminal equipment for each of the Z transmission layers should be less than or equal to K 0 , when the terminal equipment determines the weighting coefficients with non-zero amplitudes When the total number is greater than K 0 , the number of weighting coefficients with a non-zero amplitude determined for each transmission layer herein refers to the number of reported weighting coefficients based on the pre-configured K 0 and the channel measurement determined The number of weighting coefficients with a non-zero amplitude that each transmission layer wants to feedback.
应理解,上文列举的用于指示K 1的值和K 2的值的具体方式仅为示例,不应对本申请构成任何限定。本申请对于终端设备指示K 1的值和K 2的值的具体方式不作限定。 It should be understood that the specific manners for indicating the value of K 1 and the value of K 2 listed above are only examples, and should not constitute any limitation to the application. This application does not limit the specific manner in which the terminal device indicates the value of K 1 and the value of K 2 .
当网络设备通过第一指示信息所确定的K 1与K 2的值相同,则表示该K 1个加权系数是终端设备基于信道测量确定的所有幅度非零的加权系数,或者说,终端设备未丢弃该K 2个加权系数中的任意一个;当网络设备通过K 1和K 2的指示所确定的K 1与K 2的值不同,如K 1<K 2,则表示该K 1个加权系数不是终端设备基于信道测量确定的所有幅度非零的加权系数,或者说,终端设备丢弃了K 2个加权系数中的一部分加权系数。 When the values of K 1 and K 2 determined by the network device through the first indication information are the same, it means that the K 1 weighting coefficients are all weighting coefficients of non-zero amplitude determined by the terminal device based on channel measurement, or in other words, the terminal device has not discard any one of the K 2 weighting coefficients; when the network device as determined by K indicative of 1 and K 2 to K 1 different from the value K 2, as K 1 <K 2, it indicates that the K a weighting coefficient It is not that the terminal equipment determines all the weighting coefficients with non-zero amplitudes based on the channel measurement, or in other words, the terminal equipment discards some of the K 2 weighting coefficients.
进一步地,当网络设备基于CSI报告的第一部分确定该终端设备丢弃了K 1个加权系数中的一部分加权系数时,可以基于预先分配的比特数来解码CSI报告的第二部分。这里所述的预先分配的比特数可以由网络设备基于预先分配给终端设备用于传输CSI报告的比特数X 0和可预先确定比特开销的CSI报告的第一部分的比特数X 1确定。网络设备预先分配给CSI报告的第二部分的比特数X 2可以等于X 0-X 1Further, when the network device determines that the terminal apparatus discards a part of the weighting coefficients K 1 weighting coefficients based on the first partial-CSI reporting, reported CSI can be decoded based on the number of bits of the second portion of the pre-allocated. The number of pre-allocated bits described herein may be determined by the network device based on the number of bits X 0 that are pre-allocated to the terminal device for transmitting the CSI report and the number of bits X 1 of the first part of the CSI report that can predetermine the bit overhead. The number of bits X 2 pre-allocated by the network device to the second part of the CSI report may be equal to X 0 -X 1 .
当网络设备基于CSI报告的第一部分确定该终端设备未丢弃K 1个加权系数中的任意一个加权系数,可以基于K 1个加权系数来估计CSI报告的第二部分的长度,进而基于预估的长度来解码CSI报告的第二部分。 When the network device determines based on the first part of the CSI report that the terminal device has not discarded any of the K 1 weighting coefficients, the length of the second part of the CSI report can be estimated based on the K 1 weighting coefficients, and then based on the estimated Length to decode the second part of the CSI report.
可选地,该第一指示信息包括第一指示比特,该第一指示比特用于指示该K 1个加权系数是否为终端设备基于预配置的加权系数上报个数K 0所确定的所有幅度非零的加权系数,即,用于指示该K 1个加权系数是否为K 2个加权系数的全部。 Optionally, the first indication information includes a first indication bit, which is used to indicate whether the K 1 weighting coefficients are all the magnitudes determined by the terminal device based on the number K 0 of weighting coefficients reported by the terminal device. The weighting coefficient of zero is used to indicate whether the K 1 weighting coefficients are all of the K 2 weighting coefficients.
例如,该第一指示比特的开销为1比特,当该第一指示比特置“0”时,表示该K 1个加权系数就是K 2个加权系数的全部,即,终端设备没有丢弃该K 2个加权系数中的任意一个加权系数;当该第一指示比特置“1”时,表示该K 1个加权系数就是K 2个加权系数的部分,即,终端设备丢弃了该K 2个加权系数中的部分加权系数。 For example, the overhead of the first indicator bit is 1 bit. When the first indicator bit is set to "0", it means that the K 1 weighting coefficient is all of the K 2 weighting coefficients, that is, the terminal device does not discard the K 2 Any one of the weighting coefficients; when the first indication bit is set to "1", it means that the K 1 weighting coefficient is part of the K 2 weighting coefficients, that is, the terminal device discards the K 2 weighting coefficients Part of the weighting factor in.
应理解,第一指示比特中不同的取值所表示的含义可以根据预设规则来确定,本申请对于不同取值所对应的含义不作限定。It should be understood that the meanings represented by different values in the first indicator bit may be determined according to a preset rule, and the present application does not limit the meanings corresponding to different values.
作为一个实施例,该第一指示比特携带在CSI报告的第二部分中。作为另一个实施例,该第一指示比特携带在CSI报告的第一部分中。As an embodiment, the first indicator bit is carried in the second part of the CSI report. As another embodiment, the first indicator bit is carried in the first part of the CSI report.
可选地,该第一指示信息包括第二指示比特,该第二指示比特指示K 2个加权系数中未通过所述CSI报告上报的加权系数的个数。 Optionally, the first indication information includes a second indication bit, and the second indication bit indicates the number of K 2 weighting coefficients that are not reported through the CSI report.
例如,该第二指示比特可以通过
Figure PCTCN2020086593-appb-000030
个比特来指示。该
Figure PCTCN2020086593-appb-000031
个比特可用于指示K 0种可选的取值。由于K 2≤K 0,故该
Figure PCTCN2020086593-appb-000032
个比特可用于指示K 2的任意可能的取值。
For example, the second indicator bit can pass
Figure PCTCN2020086593-appb-000030
Bits to indicate. The
Figure PCTCN2020086593-appb-000031
The bits can be used to indicate K 0 optional values. Since K 2 ≤K 0 , the
Figure PCTCN2020086593-appb-000032
The bits can be used to indicate any possible value of K 2 .
又例如,该第二指示比特可以通过
Figure PCTCN2020086593-appb-000033
个比特来指示。该
Figure PCTCN2020086593-appb-000034
个比特可用于指示K 0-K 1+1种可选的取值。由于网络设备预配置的加权系数的上报个数为K 0,而终端设备实际上报的加权系数的个数为K 1,故终端设备丢弃的加权系数的个数不超过K 0-K 1个。再加上未丢弃加权系数这一种可能的情况,即,K 0-K 1为0,该K 0-K 1+1种可选的取值可以包括未通过CSI报告上报的加权系数的个数的K 0-K 1+1种可能的取值。
For another example, the second indicator bit can pass
Figure PCTCN2020086593-appb-000033
Bits to indicate. The
Figure PCTCN2020086593-appb-000034
The bits can be used to indicate K 0 -K 1 +1 optional values. Since the number of weighting coefficients pre-configured by the network equipment is K 0 , and the number of weighting coefficients actually reported by the terminal equipment is K 1 , the number of weighting coefficients discarded by the terminal equipment does not exceed K 0 -K 1 . In addition, there is a possibility that the weighting coefficient is not discarded, that is, K 0 -K 1 is 0, and the K 0 -K 1 +1 optional values may include the number of weighting coefficients not reported through the CSI report. The number of possible values K 0 -K 1 +1.
作为一个实施例,该第二指示比特携带在CSI报告的第一部分中。作为另一个实施例,该第二指示比特携带在CSI报告的第二部分中。As an embodiment, the second indicator bit is carried in the first part of the CSI report. As another embodiment, the second indicator bit is carried in the second part of the CSI report.
该CSI报告除了携带上述第一指示比特或第二指示比特之外,还可以携带K 1的指示。 In addition to the CSI report carries the first indication or the second indication bits bits, it may also carry an indication of K 1.
可选地,该CSI报告的第一部分携带K 1的指示。 Alternatively, the first portion carries the reported CSI is indicative of K 1.
其中,K 1的值可以通过
Figure PCTCN2020086593-appb-000035
个比特来指示。
Figure PCTCN2020086593-appb-000036
个比特可用于指示K 0种可选的取值。由于K 1≤K 0,故该
Figure PCTCN2020086593-appb-000037
个比特可用于指示K 1的任意可能的取值。
Among them, the value of K 1 can be passed
Figure PCTCN2020086593-appb-000035
Bits to indicate.
Figure PCTCN2020086593-appb-000036
The bits can be used to indicate K 0 optional values. Since K 1 ≤K 0 , the
Figure PCTCN2020086593-appb-000037
Bits may be used to indicate any one of K possible values.
K 1的值也可以通过针对Z个传输层中每个传输层实际上报的加权系数的个数的总和来确定。 The value of K 1 can also be determined by the sum of the number of weighting coefficients actually reported for each of the Z transmission layers.
应理解,上文列举的用于指示K 1的具体方式仅为示例,本申请对于K 1的值的具体指示方式不作限定。 It should be understood that the specific manners for indicating K 1 listed above are only examples, and the specific manner of indicating the value of K 1 is not limited in this application.
当K 1的指示携带在CSI报告的第一部分中时,网络设备可以直接根据K 1的值估计CSI报告的第二部分的长度。 When the indication of K 1 is carried in the first part of the CSI report, the network device can directly estimate the length of the second part of the CSI report according to the value of K 1 .
上文列举了几种第一指示信息的具体形式,但应理解,这不应对本申请构成任何限定。本申请对于终端设备如何指示终端设备是否丢弃了加权系数的具体方法以及第一指示信息的具体形式和开销均不作限定。Several specific forms of the first indication information are listed above, but it should be understood that this should not constitute any limitation to this application. This application does not limit the specific method of how the terminal device indicates whether the terminal device discards the weighting coefficient, and the specific form and overhead of the first indication information.
基于上文所述的方法,终端设备通过在CSI报告中携带第一指示信息,以指示终端设备所上报的加权系数是否为终端设备基于K 0和信道测量所确定的所有幅度非零的加权系数,使得网络设备可以基于CSI报告,确定终端设备所上报的K 1个加权系数,并确定所上报的加权系数是否是终端设备基于K 0和信道测量所确定的所有幅度非零的加权系数。基于此,网络设备可以按照预定义的CSI报告的格式来解析CSI报告的第一部分,并估计该CSI报告的第二部分的长度,进而完成对CSI报告的第二部分的正确译码。由此网络设备可以基于CSI报告中的信息来对确定用于数据传输的预编码矩阵,因此有利于提高系统传输性能。 Based on the method described above, the terminal device carries the first indication information in the CSI report to indicate whether the weighting coefficient reported by the terminal device is all non-zero weighting coefficients determined by the terminal device based on K 0 and channel measurement , So that the network equipment can determine the K 1 weighting coefficients reported by the terminal equipment based on the CSI report, and determine whether the reported weighting coefficients are all non-zero weighting coefficients determined by the terminal equipment based on K 0 and channel measurement. Based on this, the network device can parse the first part of the CSI report according to the predefined CSI report format, and estimate the length of the second part of the CSI report, so as to complete the correct decoding of the second part of the CSI report. Therefore, the network device can determine the precoding matrix used for data transmission based on the information in the CSI report, which is beneficial to improve the system transmission performance.
此外,网络设备获知了终端设备是否丢弃了加权系数,也就可以考虑在下一次调度时为终端设备分配更多的物理上行资源,以用于传输CSI报告。相反,如果网络设备不知道终端设备在上报CSI报告时丢弃了一部分幅度非零的加权系数,网络设备也就不会推断此次调度时为终端设备分配的物理上行资源不足。在下一次调度时,可能仍然为该终端设备分配相同大小的资源,终端设备每一次上报都可能会丢弃一部分幅度非零的加权系数。这可能会严重影响反馈精度,不利于提高数据传输性能。而在本申请实施例中,网络设备可以根据第一指示信息来判断上一次调度时为终端设备分配的物理上行资源是否足够,也就可以在下一次调度时基于上一次所获得的信息,如K 2,为终端设备分配合适的物理上行资源。因此,有利于提高反馈精度,有利于提高传输性能。 In addition, the network device has learned whether the terminal device has discarded the weighting coefficient, and can consider allocating more physical uplink resources for the terminal device in the next scheduling to transmit the CSI report. On the contrary, if the network device does not know that the terminal device discards part of the weighting coefficients with a non-zero amplitude when reporting the CSI report, the network device will not infer that the physical uplink resources allocated to the terminal device during this scheduling are insufficient. In the next scheduling, the terminal device may still be allocated resources of the same size, and the terminal device may discard a part of the weighting coefficients with a non-zero amplitude each time it reports. This may seriously affect the feedback accuracy and is not conducive to improving the data transmission performance. In the embodiment of the present application, the network device can determine whether the physical uplink resources allocated to the terminal device in the previous scheduling are sufficient according to the first indication information, and can also be based on the information obtained in the previous scheduling in the next scheduling, such as K 2. Allocate appropriate physical uplink resources for terminal equipment. Therefore, it is beneficial to improve the feedback accuracy and the transmission performance.
以上,结合图2详细说明了本申请实施例提供的方法。以下,结合图3至图5详细说明本申请实施例提供的装置。Above, the method provided by the embodiment of the present application has been described in detail with reference to FIG. 2. Hereinafter, the device provided by the embodiment of the present application will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 3 to 5.
图3是本申请实施例提供的通信装置的示意性框图。如图3所示,该通信装置1000可以包括处理单元1100和收发单元1200。Fig. 3 is a schematic block diagram of a communication device provided by an embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 3, the communication device 1000 may include a processing unit 1100 and a transceiver unit 1200.
在一种可能的设计中,该通信装置1000可对应于上文方法实施例中的终端设备,例如,可以为终端设备,或者配置于终端设备中的芯片。In a possible design, the communication device 1000 may correspond to the terminal device in the above method embodiment, for example, it may be a terminal device or a chip configured in the terminal device.
具体地,该处理单元1100用于生成CSI报告,该CSI报告包括K 1个加权系数的量化信息和第一指示信息;其中,该K 1个加权系数为幅度非零的加权系数,该K 1个加权系数用于构建与一个或多个频域单元对应的预编码矩阵;该第一指示信息用于指示该K 1个加权系数是否为该装置1000基于预配置的加权系数上报个数K 0所确定的所有幅度非零的加权系数,该装置1000基于K 0所确定的所有幅度非零的加权系数的个数为K 2,K 1≤K 2≤K 0,K 0、K 1和K 2均为正整数;收发单元1200用于发送该CSI报告。 Specifically, the processing unit 1100 is configured to generate a CSI report, the CSI report including quantization information of K 1 weighting coefficients and first indication information; wherein the K 1 weighting coefficients are weighting coefficients with a non-zero amplitude, and the K 1 Weighting coefficients are used to construct a precoding matrix corresponding to one or more frequency domain units; the first indication information is used to indicate whether the K 1 weighting coefficients are the number K 0 reported by the device 1000 based on the pre-configured weighting coefficients. the amplitude weighting coefficients determined for all non-zero, the apparatus 1000 based on the number of all non-zero amplitude weighting coefficient K 0 is determined as K 2, K 1 ≤K 2 ≤K 0, K 0, K 1 and K 2 is a positive integer; the transceiver unit 1200 is used to send the CSI report.
可选地,该收发单元1200还用于接收第二指示信息,该第二指示信息用于为该终端设备配置的加权系数上报个数K 0Optionally, the transceiving unit 1200 is further configured to receive second indication information, where the second indication information is used to report the number K 0 of weighting coefficients configured for the terminal device.
可选地,该第一指示信息包括K 1的指示和K 2的指示。 Optionally, the first indication information includes an indication of K 1 and an indication of K 2 .
可选地,该K 2的指示携带在该CSI报告的第一部分中,该K 1的指示携带在该CSI报告的第二部分中。 Optionally, the K 2 indication is carried in the first part of the CSI report, and the K 1 indication is carried in the second part of the CSI report.
可选地,该第一指示信息包括第一指示比特,该第一指示比特用于指示该K 1个加权系数是否为该终端设备基于预配置的加权系数上报个数K 0所确定的所有幅度非零的加权系数。 Optionally, the first indication information includes a first indication bit, which is used to indicate whether the K 1 weighting coefficients are all the amplitudes determined by the terminal device based on the number K 0 of weighting coefficients reported by the terminal device. Non-zero weighting factor.
可选地,该第一指示比特携带在该CSI报告的第二部分中。Optionally, the first indication bit is carried in the second part of the CSI report.
可选地,该第一指示信息包括第二指示比特,该第二指示比特指示K 2个加权系数中未通过该CSI报告上报的加权系数的个数。 Optionally, the first indication information includes a second indication bit, and the second indication bit indicates the number of K 2 weighting coefficients that have not been reported through the CSI report.
可选地,该第二指示比特的开销为
Figure PCTCN2020086593-appb-000038
比特,以与K 0-K 1+1种可选的取值对应;其中,K 0为预配置的加权系数上报个数,K 0为正整数;该K 0-K 1+1种可选的取值包括未通过该CSI报告上报的加权系数的个数的K 0-K 1+1种可能的取值。
Optionally, the overhead of the second indication bit is
Figure PCTCN2020086593-appb-000038
Bit, corresponding to K 0 -K 1 +1 optional values; among them, K 0 is the number of pre-configured weighting coefficient reports, K 0 is a positive integer; the K 0 -K 1 +1 optional The value of includes K 0 -K 1 +1 possible values of the number of weighting coefficients not reported by the CSI report.
可选地,该第二指示比特携带在该CSI报告的第二部分中。Optionally, the second indication bit is carried in the second part of the CSI report.
可选地,该CSI报告的第一部分包括K 1的指示。 Alternatively, the first part of the reported CSI comprises an indication of K 1.
可选地,若基于K 2个加权系数确定的CSI报告的第二部分所需的比特数Q大于预先分配的比特数X 2,该CSI报告的第二部分的开销为X 2比特;或者 Optionally, if the number of bits Q required for the second part of the CSI report determined based on K 2 weighting coefficients is greater than the pre-allocated number of bits X 2 , the overhead of the second part of the CSI report is X 2 bits; or
若基于该K 2个加权系数确定的CSI报告的第二部分所需的比特数Q小于或等于预先分配的比特数X 2,该CSI报告的第二部分的开销为Q比特; If the number of bits Q required for the second part of the CSI report determined based on the K 2 weighting coefficients is less than or equal to the pre-allocated number of bits X 2 , the overhead of the second part of the CSI report is Q bits;
其中,X 2=X 0-X 1,X 0为预先分配的用于传输CSI报告的比特数,X 1为用于传输CSI报告的第一部分的比特数;X 0>X 1,Q、X 1、X 2和X 0均为正整数。 Among them, X 2 =X 0 -X 1 , X 0 is the number of bits allocated in advance for transmitting the CSI report, X 1 is the number of bits used to transmit the first part of the CSI report; X 0 >X 1 , Q, X 1 , X 2 and X 0 are all positive integers.
应理解,该通信装置1000可对应于根据本申请实施例的方法200中的终端设备,该通信装置1000可以包括用于执行图2中的方法200中终端设备执行的方法的单元。并且,该通信装置1000中的各单元和上述其他操作和/或功能分别为了实现图2中的方法200的相应流程。It should be understood that the communication device 1000 may correspond to the terminal device in the method 200 according to the embodiment of the present application, and the communication device 1000 may include a unit for executing the method executed by the terminal device in the method 200 in FIG. 2. In addition, each unit in the communication device 1000 and other operations and/or functions described above are used to implement the corresponding process of the method 200 in FIG. 2.
其中,当该通信装置1000用于执行图2中的方法200时,处理单元1100可用于执行方法200中的步骤210,收发单元1200可用于执行方法200中的步骤220和步骤230。应理解,各单元执行上述相应步骤的具体过程在上述方法实施例中已经详细说明,为了简洁, 在此不再赘述。Wherein, when the communication device 1000 is used to execute the method 200 in FIG. 2, the processing unit 1100 may be used to execute step 210 in the method 200, and the transceiver unit 1200 may be used to execute steps 220 and 230 in the method 200. It should be understood that the specific process of each unit performing the foregoing corresponding steps has been described in detail in the foregoing method embodiment, and is not repeated here for brevity.
还应理解,该通信装置1000为终端设备时,该通信装置1000中的收发单元1200可对应于图4中示出的终端设备2000中的收发器2020,该通信装置1000中的处理单元1100可对应于图4中示出的终端设备2000中的处理器2010。It should also be understood that when the communication device 1000 is a terminal device, the transceiver unit 1200 in the communication device 1000 may correspond to the transceiver 2020 in the terminal device 2000 shown in FIG. 4, and the processing unit 1100 in the communication device 1000 may It corresponds to the processor 2010 in the terminal device 2000 shown in FIG. 4.
还应理解,该通信装置1000为配置于终端设备中的芯片时,该通信装置1000中的收发单元1200可以为输入/输出接口。It should also be understood that when the communication device 1000 is a chip configured in a terminal device, the transceiver unit 1200 in the communication device 1000 may be an input/output interface.
在另一种可能的设计中,该通信装置1000可对应于上文方法实施例中的网络设备,例如,可以为网络设备,或者配置于网络设备中的芯片。In another possible design, the communication device 1000 may correspond to the network device in the above method embodiment, for example, it may be a network device or a chip configured in the network device.
具体地,收发单元1200用于接收CSI报告;该CSI报告包括K 1个加权系数的量化信息和第一指示信息;其中,该K 1个加权系数为幅度非零的加权系数,该K 1个加权系数用于构建与一个或多个频域单元对应的预编码矩阵;该第一指示信息用于指示该K 1个加权系数是否为该装置1000基于预配置的加权系数上报个数K 0所确定的所有幅度非零的加权系数,该装置1000基于K 0所确定的所有幅度非零的加权系数的个数为K 2,K 1≤K 2≤K 0,K 0、K 1和K 2均为正整数;处理单元1100用于根据该CSI报告确定K 1个加权系数以及该K 1个加权系数是否为该装置1000基于预配置的加权系数上报个数K 0所确定的所有幅度非零的加权系数。 Specifically, the transceiver unit 1200 is configured to receive a CSI report; the CSI report includes quantization information of K 1 weighting coefficients and first indication information; wherein, the K 1 weighting coefficients are weighting coefficients with a non-zero amplitude, and the K 1 weighting coefficients The weighting coefficient is used to construct a precoding matrix corresponding to one or more frequency domain units; the first indication information is used to indicate whether the K 1 weighting coefficient is the number K 0 reported by the device 1000 based on the pre-configured weighting coefficient. The number of weighting coefficients of all non-zero amplitudes determined by the device 1000 based on K 0 is K 2 , K 1 ≤K 2 ≤K 0 , K 0 , K 1 and K 2 All are positive integers; the processing unit 1100 is configured to determine K 1 weighting coefficients and whether the K 1 weighting coefficients are all non-zero ranges determined by the device 1000 based on the number K 0 of the weighting coefficients reported by the device 1000 according to the CSI report The weighting factor.
可选地,该收发单元1200还用于接收第二指示信息,该第二指示信息用于为该终端设备配置的加权系数上报个数K 0Optionally, the transceiving unit 1200 is further configured to receive second indication information, where the second indication information is used to report the number K 0 of weighting coefficients configured for the terminal device.
可选地,该第一指示信息包括K 1的指示和K 2的指示。 Optionally, the first indication information includes an indication of K 1 and an indication of K 2 .
可选地,该K 2的指示携带在该CSI报告的第一部分中,该K 1的指示携带在该CSI报告的第二部分中。 Optionally, the K 2 indication is carried in the first part of the CSI report, and the K 1 indication is carried in the second part of the CSI report.
可选地,该第一指示信息包括第一指示比特,该第一指示比特用于指示该K 1个加权系数是否为该终端设备基于预配置的加权系数上报个数K 0所确定的所有幅度非零的加权系数。 Optionally, the first indication information includes a first indication bit, which is used to indicate whether the K 1 weighting coefficients are all the amplitudes determined by the terminal device based on the number K 0 of weighting coefficients reported by the terminal device. Non-zero weighting factor.
可选地,该第一指示比特携带在该CSI报告的第二部分中。Optionally, the first indication bit is carried in the second part of the CSI report.
可选地,该第一指示信息包括第二指示比特,该第二指示比特指示K 2个加权系数中未通过该CSI报告上报的加权系数的个数。 Optionally, the first indication information includes a second indication bit, and the second indication bit indicates the number of K 2 weighting coefficients that have not been reported through the CSI report.
可选地,该第二指示比特的开销为
Figure PCTCN2020086593-appb-000039
比特,以与K 0-K 1+1种可选的取值对应;其中,K 0为预配置的加权系数上报个数,K 0为正整数;该K 0-K 1+1种可选的取值包括未通过该CSI报告上报的加权系数的个数的K 0-K 1+1种可能的取值。
Optionally, the overhead of the second indication bit is
Figure PCTCN2020086593-appb-000039
Bit, corresponding to K 0 -K 1 +1 optional values; among them, K 0 is the number of pre-configured weighting coefficient reports, K 0 is a positive integer; the K 0 -K 1 +1 optional The value of includes K 0 -K 1 +1 possible values of the number of weighting coefficients not reported by the CSI report.
可选地,该第二指示比特携带在该CSI报告的第二部分中。Optionally, the second indication bit is carried in the second part of the CSI report.
可选地,该CSI报告的第一部分包括K 1的指示。 Alternatively, the first part of the reported CSI comprises an indication of K 1.
可选地,若基于K 2个加权系数确定的CSI报告的第二部分所需的比特数Q大于预先分配的比特数X 2,该CSI报告的第二部分的开销为X 2比特;或者,若基于该K 2个加权系数确定的CSI报告的第二部分所需的比特数Q小于或等于预先分配的比特数X 2,该CSI报告的第二部分的开销为Q比特;其中,X 2=X 0-X 1,X 0为预先分配的用于传输CSI报告的比特数,X 1为用于传输CSI报告的第一部分的比特数;X 0>X 1,Q、X 1、X 2和X 0均为正整数。 Optionally, if the number of bits Q required for the second part of the CSI report determined based on K 2 weighting coefficients is greater than the pre-allocated number of bits X 2 , the overhead of the second part of the CSI report is X 2 bits; or, If the number of bits Q required for the second part of the CSI report determined based on the K 2 weighting coefficients is less than or equal to the pre-allocated number of bits X 2 , the overhead of the second part of the CSI report is Q bits; where X 2 =X 0 -X 1 , X 0 is the number of pre-allocated bits used to transmit the CSI report, X 1 is the number of bits used to transmit the first part of the CSI report; X 0 >X 1 , Q, X 1 , X 2 And X 0 are both positive integers.
应理解,该通信装置1000可对应于根据本申请实施例的方法200中的网络设备,该 通信装置1000可以包括用于执行图2中的方法200中网络设备执行的方法的单元。并且,该通信装置1000中的各单元和上述其他操作和/或功能分别为了实现图2中的方法200的相应流程。It should be understood that the communication device 1000 may correspond to the network device in the method 200 according to the embodiment of the present application, and the communication device 1000 may include a unit for executing the method executed by the network device in the method 200 in FIG. 2. In addition, each unit in the communication device 1000 and other operations and/or functions described above are used to implement the corresponding process of the method 200 in FIG. 2.
其中,当该通信装置1000用于执行图2中的方法200时,处理单元1100可用于执行方法200中的步骤240和步骤250,收发单元1200可用于执行方法200中的步骤220和步骤230。应理解,各单元执行上述相应步骤的具体过程在上述方法实施例中已经详细说明,为了简洁,在此不再赘述。Wherein, when the communication device 1000 is used to execute the method 200 in FIG. 2, the processing unit 1100 can be used to execute steps 240 and 250 in the method 200, and the transceiver unit 1200 can be used to execute steps 220 and 230 in the method 200. It should be understood that the specific process for each unit to execute the foregoing corresponding steps has been described in detail in the foregoing method embodiment, and is not repeated here for brevity.
还应理解,该通信装置1000为网络设备时,该通信装置1000中的收发单元为可对应于图5中示出的基站3000中的RRU 3100,该通信装置1000中的处理单元1100可对应于图5中示出的基站3000中的BBU 3200或处理器3202。It should also be understood that when the communication device 1000 is a network device, the transceiver unit in the communication device 1000 may correspond to the RRU 3100 in the base station 3000 shown in FIG. 5, and the processing unit 1100 in the communication device 1000 may correspond to The BBU 3200 or the processor 3202 in the base station 3000 shown in FIG. 5.
还应理解,该通信装置1000为配置于网络设备中的芯片时,该通信装置1000中的收发单元1200可以为输入/输出接口。It should also be understood that when the communication device 1000 is a chip configured in a network device, the transceiver unit 1200 in the communication device 1000 may be an input/output interface.
图4是本申请实施例提供的终端设备2000的结构示意图。该终端设备2000可应用于如图1所示的系统中,执行上述方法实施例中终端设备的功能。如图4所示,该终端设备2000包括处理器2010和收发器2020。可选地,该终端设备2000还包括存储器2030。其中,处理器2010、收发器2002和存储器2030之间可以通过内部连接通路互相通信,传递控制和/或数据信号,该存储器2030用于存储计算机程序,该处理器2010用于从该存储器2030中调用并运行该计算机程序,以控制该收发器2020收发信号。可选地,终端设备2000还可以包括天线2040,用于将收发器2020输出的上行数据或上行控制信令通过无线信号发送出去。FIG. 4 is a schematic structural diagram of a terminal device 2000 provided by an embodiment of the present application. The terminal device 2000 can be applied to the system shown in FIG. 1 to perform the functions of the terminal device in the foregoing method embodiment. As shown in FIG. 4, the terminal device 2000 includes a processor 2010 and a transceiver 2020. Optionally, the terminal device 2000 further includes a memory 2030. Among them, the processor 2010, the transceiver 2002, and the memory 2030 can communicate with each other through internal connection paths to transfer control and/or data signals. The memory 2030 is used for storing computer programs, and the processor 2010 is used for downloading from the memory 2030. Call and run the computer program to control the transceiver 2020 to send and receive signals. Optionally, the terminal device 2000 may further include an antenna 2040 for transmitting the uplink data or uplink control signaling output by the transceiver 2020 through a wireless signal.
上述处理器2010可以和存储器2030可以合成一个处理装置,处理器2010用于执行存储器2030中存储的程序代码来实现上述功能。具体实现时,该存储器2030也可以集成在处理器2010中,或者独立于处理器2010。该处理器2010可以与图3中的处理单元对应。The aforementioned processor 2010 and the memory 2030 can be combined into a processing device, and the processor 2010 is configured to execute the program code stored in the memory 2030 to implement the aforementioned functions. During specific implementation, the memory 2030 may also be integrated in the processor 2010 or independent of the processor 2010. The processor 2010 may correspond to the processing unit in FIG. 3.
上述收发器2020可以与图3中的收发单元对应,也可以称为收发单元。收发器2020可以包括接收器(或称接收机、接收电路)和发射器(或称发射机、发射电路)。其中,接收器用于接收信号,发射器用于发射信号。The aforementioned transceiver 2020 may correspond to the transceiver unit in FIG. 3, and may also be referred to as a transceiver unit. The transceiver 2020 may include a receiver (or called receiver, receiving circuit) and a transmitter (or called transmitter, transmitting circuit). Among them, the receiver is used to receive signals, and the transmitter is used to transmit signals.
应理解,图4所示的终端设备2000能够实现图2所示方法实施例中涉及终端设备的各个过程。终端设备2000中的各个模块的操作和/或功能,分别为了实现上述方法实施例中的相应流程。具体可参见上述方法实施例中的描述,为避免重复,此处适当省略详细描述。It should be understood that the terminal device 2000 shown in FIG. 4 can implement various processes involving the terminal device in the method embodiment shown in FIG. 2. The operations and/or functions of each module in the terminal device 2000 are respectively for implementing the corresponding processes in the foregoing method embodiments. For details, please refer to the descriptions in the foregoing method embodiments. To avoid repetition, detailed descriptions are appropriately omitted here.
上述处理器2010可以用于执行前面方法实施例中描述的由终端设备内部实现的动作,而收发器2020可以用于执行前面方法实施例中描述的终端设备向网络设备发送或从网络设备接收的动作。具体请见前面方法实施例中的描述,此处不再赘述。The above-mentioned processor 2010 can be used to execute the actions described in the previous method embodiments implemented by the terminal device, and the transceiver 2020 can be used to execute the terminal device described in the previous method embodiments to send or receive from the network device action. For details, please refer to the description in the previous method embodiment, which will not be repeated here.
可选地,上述终端设备2000还可以包括电源2050,用于给终端设备中的各种器件或电路提供电源。Optionally, the aforementioned terminal device 2000 may further include a power supply 2050 for providing power to various devices or circuits in the terminal device.
除此之外,为了使得终端设备的功能更加完善,该终端设备2000还可以包括输入单元2060、显示单元2070、音频电路2080、摄像头2090和传感器2100等中的一个或多个,所述音频电路还可以包括扬声器2082、麦克风2084等。In addition, in order to make the function of the terminal device more complete, the terminal device 2000 may also include one or more of an input unit 2060, a display unit 2070, an audio circuit 2080, a camera 2090, and a sensor 2100. The audio circuit A speaker 2082, a microphone 2084, etc. may also be included.
图5是本申请实施例提供的网络设备的结构示意图,例如可以为基站的结构示意图。该基站3000可应用于如图1所示的系统中,执行上述方法实施例中网络设备的功能。如图5所示,该基站3000可以包括一个或多个射频单元,如远端射频单元(remote radio unit,RRU)3100和一个或多个基带单元(BBU)(也可称为分布式单元(DU))3200。所述RRU 3100可以称为收发单元,与图3中的收发单元1100对应。可选地,该收发单元3100还可以称为收发机、收发电路、或者收发器等等,其可以包括至少一个天线3101和射频单元3102。可选地,收发单元3100可以包括接收单元和发送单元,接收单元可以对应于接收器(或称接收机、接收电路),发送单元可以对应于发射器(或称发射机、发射电路)。所述RRU 3100部分主要用于射频信号的收发以及射频信号与基带信号的转换,例如用于向终端设备发送指示信息。所述BBU 3200部分主要用于进行基带处理,对基站进行控制等。所述RRU 3100与BBU 3200可以是物理上设置在一起,也可以物理上分离设置的,即分布式基站。FIG. 5 is a schematic structural diagram of a network device provided by an embodiment of the present application, for example, may be a schematic structural diagram of a base station. The base station 3000 can be applied to the system shown in FIG. 1 to perform the functions of the network device in the foregoing method embodiment. As shown in FIG. 5, the base station 3000 may include one or more radio frequency units, such as a remote radio unit (RRU) 3100 and one or more baseband units (BBU) (also known as distributed units ( DU)) 3200. The RRU 3100 may be referred to as a transceiver unit, which corresponds to the transceiver unit 1100 in FIG. 3. Optionally, the transceiver unit 3100 may also be called a transceiver, a transceiver circuit, or a transceiver, etc., and it may include at least one antenna 3101 and a radio frequency unit 3102. Optionally, the transceiver unit 3100 may include a receiving unit and a transmitting unit, the receiving unit may correspond to a receiver (or receiver, receiving circuit), and the transmitting unit may correspond to a transmitter (or transmitter or transmitting circuit). The RRU 3100 part is mainly used for sending and receiving of radio frequency signals and conversion of radio frequency signals and baseband signals, for example, for sending instruction information to terminal equipment. The 3200 part of the BBU is mainly used for baseband processing and control of the base station. The RRU 3100 and the BBU 3200 may be physically set together, or may be physically separated, that is, a distributed base station.
所述BBU 3200为基站的控制中心,也可以称为处理单元,可以与图3中的处理单元1200对应,主要用于完成基带处理功能,如信道编码,复用,调制,扩频等等。例如所述BBU(处理单元)可以用于控制基站执行上述方法实施例中关于网络设备的操作流程,例如,生成上述指示信息等。The BBU 3200 is the control center of the base station, and may also be called a processing unit, which may correspond to the processing unit 1200 in FIG. 3, and is mainly used to complete baseband processing functions, such as channel coding, multiplexing, modulation, and spreading. For example, the BBU (processing unit) may be used to control the base station to execute the operation procedure of the network device in the foregoing method embodiment, for example, to generate the foregoing indication information.
在一个示例中,所述BBU 3200可以由一个或多个单板构成,多个单板可以共同支持单一接入制式的无线接入网(如LTE网),也可以分别支持不同接入制式的无线接入网(如LTE网,5G网或其他网)。所述BBU 3200还包括存储器3201和处理器3202。所述存储器3201用以存储必要的指令和数据。所述处理器3202用于控制基站进行必要的动作,例如用于控制基站执行上述方法实施例中关于网络设备的操作流程。所述存储器3201和处理器3202可以服务于一个或多个单板。也就是说,可以每个单板上单独设置存储器和处理器。也可以是多个单板共用相同的存储器和处理器。此外每个单板上还可以设置有必要的电路。In an example, the BBU 3200 may be composed of one or more single boards, and multiple single boards may jointly support a radio access network with a single access standard (such as an LTE network), or support different access standards. Wireless access network (such as LTE network, 5G network or other networks). The BBU 3200 also includes a memory 3201 and a processor 3202. The memory 3201 is used to store necessary instructions and data. The processor 3202 is configured to control the base station to perform necessary actions, for example, to control the base station to execute the operation procedure of the network device in the foregoing method embodiment. The memory 3201 and the processor 3202 may serve one or more single boards. In other words, the memory and the processor can be set separately on each board. It can also be that multiple boards share the same memory and processor. In addition, necessary circuits can be provided on each board.
应理解,图5所示的基站3000能够实现图2所示方法实施例中涉及网络设备的各个过程。基站3000中的各个模块的操作和/或功能,分别为了实现上述方法实施例中的相应流程。具体可参见上述方法实施例中的描述,为避免重复,此处适当省略详细描述。It should be understood that the base station 3000 shown in FIG. 5 can implement various processes involving network devices in the method embodiment shown in FIG. 2. The operations and/or functions of the various modules in the base station 3000 are used to implement the corresponding processes in the foregoing method embodiments. For details, please refer to the descriptions in the foregoing method embodiments. To avoid repetition, detailed descriptions are appropriately omitted here.
上述BBU 3200可以用于执行前面方法实施例中描述的由网络设备内部实现的动作,而RRU 3100可以用于执行前面方法实施例中描述的网络设备向终端设备发送或从终端设备接收的动作。具体请见前面方法实施例中的描述,此处不再赘述。The above-mentioned BBU 3200 can be used to perform the actions described in the previous method embodiments implemented by the network device, and the RRU 3100 can be used to perform the actions described in the previous method embodiments that the network device sends to or receives from the terminal device. For details, please refer to the description in the previous method embodiment, which will not be repeated here.
应理解,图5所示出的基站3000仅为网络设备的一种可能的架构,而不应对本申请构成任何限定。本申请所提供的方法可适用于其他架构的网络设备。例如,包含CU、DU和AAU的网络设备等。本申请对于网络设备的具体架构不作限定。It should be understood that the base station 3000 shown in FIG. 5 is only a possible architecture of the network device, and should not constitute any limitation in this application. The method provided in this application can be applied to network devices of other architectures. For example, network equipment including CU, DU, and AAU. This application does not limit the specific architecture of the network device.
本申请实施例还提供了一种处理装置,包括处理器和接口;所述处理器用于执行上述方法实施例中的方法。An embodiment of the present application also provides a processing device, including a processor and an interface; the processor is configured to execute the method in the foregoing method embodiment.
应理解,上述处理装置可以是一个或多个芯片。例如,该处理装置可以是现场可编程门阵列(field programmable gate array,FPGA),可以是专用集成芯片(application specific integrated circuit,ASIC),还可以是系统芯片(system on chip,SoC),还可以是中央处理器(central processor unit,CPU),还可以是网络处理器(network processor,NP),还 可以是数字信号处理电路(digital signal processor,DSP),还可以是微控制器(micro controller unit,MCU),还可以是可编程控制器(programmable logic device,PLD)或其他集成芯片。It should be understood that the aforementioned processing device may be one or more chips. For example, the processing device may be a field programmable gate array (FPGA), an application specific integrated circuit (ASIC), or a system on chip (SoC), or It is a central processor unit (CPU), it can also be a network processor (NP), it can also be a digital signal processing circuit (digital signal processor, DSP), or it can be a microcontroller (microcontroller unit). , MCU), it can also be a programmable logic device (PLD) or other integrated chips.
在实现过程中,上述方法的各步骤可以通过处理器中的硬件的集成逻辑电路或者软件形式的指令完成。结合本申请实施例所公开的方法的步骤可以直接体现为硬件处理器执行完成,或者用处理器中的硬件及软件模块组合执行完成。软件模块可以位于随机存储器,闪存、只读存储器,可编程只读存储器或者电可擦写可编程存储器、寄存器等本领域成熟的存储介质中。该存储介质位于存储器,处理器读取存储器中的信息,结合其硬件完成上述方法的步骤。为避免重复,这里不再详细描述。In the implementation process, the steps of the above method can be completed by hardware integrated logic circuits in the processor or instructions in the form of software. The steps of the method disclosed in the embodiments of the present application may be directly embodied as being executed and completed by a hardware processor, or executed and completed by a combination of hardware and software modules in the processor. The software module can be located in a mature storage medium in the field such as random access memory, flash memory, read-only memory, programmable read-only memory, or electrically erasable programmable memory, registers. The storage medium is located in the memory, and the processor reads the information in the memory and completes the steps of the above method in combination with its hardware. To avoid repetition, it will not be described in detail here.
应注意,本申请实施例中的处理器可以是一种集成电路芯片,具有信号的处理能力。在实现过程中,上述方法实施例的各步骤可以通过处理器中的硬件的集成逻辑电路或者软件形式的指令完成。上述的处理器可以是通用处理器、数字信号处理器(DSP)、专用集成电路(ASIC)、现场可编程门阵列(FPGA)或者其他可编程逻辑器件、分立门或者晶体管逻辑器件、分立硬件组件。可以实现或者执行本申请实施例中的公开的各方法、步骤及逻辑框图。通用处理器可以是微处理器或者该处理器也可以是任何常规的处理器等。结合本申请实施例所公开的方法的步骤可以直接体现为硬件译码处理器执行完成,或者用译码处理器中的硬件及软件模块组合执行完成。软件模块可以位于随机存储器,闪存、只读存储器,可编程只读存储器或者电可擦写可编程存储器、寄存器等本领域成熟的存储介质中。该存储介质位于存储器,处理器读取存储器中的信息,结合其硬件完成上述方法的步骤。It should be noted that the processor in the embodiment of the present application may be an integrated circuit chip with signal processing capability. In the implementation process, the steps of the foregoing method embodiments can be completed by hardware integrated logic circuits in the processor or instructions in the form of software. The above-mentioned processor may be a general-purpose processor, a digital signal processor (DSP), an application specific integrated circuit (ASIC), a field programmable gate array (FPGA) or other programmable logic devices, discrete gates or transistor logic devices, discrete hardware components . The methods, steps, and logical block diagrams disclosed in the embodiments of the present application can be implemented or executed. The general-purpose processor may be a microprocessor or the processor may also be any conventional processor or the like. The steps of the method disclosed in the embodiments of the present application may be directly embodied as being executed and completed by a hardware decoding processor, or executed and completed by a combination of hardware and software modules in the decoding processor. The software module can be located in a mature storage medium in the field such as random access memory, flash memory, read-only memory, programmable read-only memory, or electrically erasable programmable memory, registers. The storage medium is located in the memory, and the processor reads the information in the memory and completes the steps of the above method in combination with its hardware.
可以理解,本申请实施例中的存储器可以是易失性存储器或非易失性存储器,或可包括易失性和非易失性存储器两者。其中,非易失性存储器可以是只读存储器(read-only memory,ROM)、可编程只读存储器(programmable ROM,PROM)、可擦除可编程只读存储器(erasable PROM,EPROM)、电可擦除可编程只读存储器(electrically EPROM,EEPROM)或闪存。易失性存储器可以是随机存取存储器(random access memory,RAM),其用作外部高速缓存。通过示例性但不是限制性说明,许多形式的RAM可用,例如静态随机存取存储器(static RAM,SRAM)、动态随机存取存储器(dynamic RAM,DRAM)、同步动态随机存取存储器(synchronous DRAM,SDRAM)、双倍数据速率同步动态随机存取存储器(double data rate SDRAM,DDR SDRAM)、增强型同步动态随机存取存储器(enhanced SDRAM,ESDRAM)、同步连接动态随机存取存储器(synchlink DRAM,SLDRAM)和直接内存总线随机存取存储器(direct rambus RAM,DR RAM)。应注意,本文描述的系统和方法的存储器旨在包括但不限于这些和任意其它适合类型的存储器。It can be understood that the memory in the embodiments of the present application may be volatile memory or non-volatile memory, or may include both volatile and non-volatile memory. Among them, the non-volatile memory can be read-only memory (ROM), programmable read-only memory (programmable ROM, PROM), erasable programmable read-only memory (erasable PROM, EPROM), and electronic Erase programmable read-only memory (electrically EPROM, EEPROM) or flash memory. The volatile memory may be random access memory (RAM), which is used as an external cache. By way of exemplary but not restrictive description, many forms of RAM are available, such as static random access memory (static RAM, SRAM), dynamic random access memory (dynamic RAM, DRAM), synchronous dynamic random access memory (synchronous DRAM, SDRAM), double data rate synchronous dynamic random access memory (double data rate SDRAM, DDR SDRAM), enhanced synchronous dynamic random access memory (enhanced SDRAM, ESDRAM), synchronous connection dynamic random access memory (synchlink DRAM, SLDRAM) ) And direct memory bus random access memory (direct rambus RAM, DR RAM). It should be noted that the memories of the systems and methods described herein are intended to include, but are not limited to, these and any other suitable types of memories.
根据本申请实施例提供的方法,本申请还提供一种计算机程序产品,该计算机程序产品包括:计算机程序代码,当该计算机程序代码在计算机上运行时,使得该计算机执行图2所示实施例中的方法。According to the method provided in the embodiments of the present application, the present application also provides a computer program product, the computer program product includes: computer program code, when the computer program code runs on a computer, the computer executes the embodiment shown in FIG. 2 Method in.
根据本申请实施例提供的方法,本申请还提供一种计算机可读介质,该计算机可读介质存储有程序代码,当该程序代码在计算机上运行时,使得该计算机执行图2所示实施例中的方法。According to the method provided by the embodiment of the present application, the present application also provides a computer-readable medium storing program code, which when the program code runs on a computer, causes the computer to execute the embodiment shown in FIG. 2 Method in.
根据本申请实施例提供的方法,本申请还提供一种系统,其包括前述的一个或多个终 端设备以及一个或多个网络设备。According to the method provided in the embodiments of this application, this application also provides a system, which includes the aforementioned one or more terminal devices and one or more network devices.
上述各个装置实施例中网络设备与终端设备和方法实施例中的网络设备或终端设备完全对应,由相应的模块或单元执行相应的步骤,例如通信单元(收发器)执行方法实施例中接收或发送的步骤,除发送、接收外的其它步骤可以由处理单元(处理器)执行。具体单元的功能可以参考相应的方法实施例。其中,处理器可以为一个或多个。The network equipment in the above-mentioned device embodiments completely corresponds to the network equipment or terminal equipment in the terminal equipment and method embodiments, and the corresponding modules or units execute the corresponding steps. For example, the communication unit (transceiver) performs the receiving or In the sending step, other steps except sending and receiving can be executed by the processing unit (processor). For the functions of specific units, refer to the corresponding method embodiments. There may be one or more processors.
在本说明书中使用的术语“部件”、“模块”、“系统”等用于表示计算机相关的实体、硬件、固件、硬件和软件的组合、软件、或执行中的软件。例如,部件可以是但不限于,在处理器上运行的进程、处理器、对象、可执行文件、执行线程、程序和/或计算机。通过图示,在计算设备上运行的应用和计算设备都可以是部件。一个或多个部件可驻留在进程和/或执行线程中,部件可位于一个计算机上和/或分布在2个或更多个计算机之间。此外,这些部件可从在上面存储有各种数据结构的各种计算机可读介质执行。部件可例如根据具有一个或多个数据分组(例如来自与本地系统、分布式系统和/或网络间的另一部件交互的二个部件的数据,例如通过信号与其它系统交互的互联网)的信号通过本地和/或远程进程来通信。The terms "component", "module", "system", etc. used in this specification are used to denote computer-related entities, hardware, firmware, a combination of hardware and software, software, or software in execution. For example, the component may be, but is not limited to, a process, a processor, an object, an executable file, an execution thread, a program, and/or a computer running on a processor. Through the illustration, both the application running on the computing device and the computing device can be components. One or more components may reside in processes and/or threads of execution, and components may be located on one computer and/or distributed among two or more computers. In addition, these components can be executed from various computer readable media having various data structures stored thereon. The component may be based on, for example, a signal having one or more data packets (such as data from two components interacting with another component in a local system, a distributed system, and/or a network, such as the Internet that interacts with other systems through signals) Communicate through local and/or remote processes.
本领域普通技术人员可以意识到,结合本文中所公开的实施例描述的各种说明性逻辑块(illustrative logical block)和步骤(step),能够以电子硬件、或者计算机软件和电子硬件的结合来实现。这些功能究竟以硬件还是软件方式来执行,取决于技术方案的特定应用和设计约束条件。专业技术人员可以对每个特定的应用来使用不同方法来实现所描述的功能,但是这种实现不应认为超出本申请的范围。Those of ordinary skill in the art may realize that the various illustrative logical blocks and steps described in the embodiments disclosed herein can be implemented by electronic hardware, or a combination of computer software and electronic hardware. achieve. Whether these functions are executed by hardware or software depends on the specific application and design constraint conditions of the technical solution. Professionals and technicians can use different methods for each specific application to implement the described functions, but such implementation should not be considered beyond the scope of this application.
所属领域的技术人员可以清楚地了解到,为描述的方便和简洁,上述描述的系统、装置和单元的具体工作过程,可以参考前述方法实施例中的对应过程,在此不再赘述。Those skilled in the art can clearly understand that, for the convenience and conciseness of description, the specific working process of the above-described system, device, and unit can refer to the corresponding process in the foregoing method embodiment, which will not be repeated here.
在本申请所提供的几个实施例中,应该理解到,所揭露的系统、装置和方法,可以通过其它的方式实现。例如,以上所描述的装置实施例仅仅是示意性的,例如,所述单元的划分,仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分,实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式,例如多个单元或组件可以结合或者可以集成到另一个系统,或一些特征可以忽略,或不执行。另一点,所显示或讨论的相互之间的耦合或直接耦合或通信连接可以是通过一些接口,装置或单元的间接耦合或通信连接,可以是电性,机械或其它的形式。In the several embodiments provided in this application, it should be understood that the disclosed system, device, and method may be implemented in other ways. For example, the device embodiments described above are only illustrative. For example, the division of the units is only a logical function division, and there may be other divisions in actual implementation, for example, multiple units or components can be combined or It can be integrated into another system, or some features can be ignored or not implemented. In addition, the displayed or discussed mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection may be indirect coupling or communication connection through some interfaces, devices or units, and may be in electrical, mechanical or other forms.
所述作为分离部件说明的单元可以是或者也可以不是物理上分开的,作为单元显示的部件可以是或者也可以不是物理单元,即可以位于一个地方,或者也可以分布到多个网络单元上。可以根据实际的需要选择其中的部分或者全部单元来实现本实施例方案的目的。The units described as separate components may or may not be physically separated, and the components displayed as units may or may not be physical units, that is, they may be located in one place, or they may be distributed on multiple network units. Some or all of the units may be selected according to actual needs to achieve the objectives of the solutions of the embodiments.
另外,在本申请各个实施例中的各功能单元可以集成在一个处理单元中,也可以是各个单元单独物理存在,也可以两个或两个以上单元集成在一个单元中。In addition, the functional units in each embodiment of the present application may be integrated into one processing unit, or each unit may exist alone physically, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit.
在上述实施例中,各功能单元的功能可以全部或部分地通过软件、硬件、固件或者其任意组合来实现。当使用软件实现时,可以全部或部分地以计算机程序产品的形式实现。所述计算机程序产品包括一个或多个计算机指令(程序)。在计算机上加载和执行所述计算机程序指令(程序)时,全部或部分地产生按照本申请实施例所述的流程或功能。所述计算机可以是通用计算机、专用计算机、计算机网络、或者其他可编程装置。所述计算机指令可以存储在计算机可读存储介质中,或者从一个计算机可读存储介质向另一个计算机可读存储介质传输,例如,所述计算机指令可以从一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据 中心通过有线(例如同轴电缆、光纤、数字用户线(digital subscriber line,DSL))或无线(例如红外、无线、微波等)方式向另一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心进行传输。所述计算机可读存储介质可以是计算机能够存取的任何可用介质或者是包含一个或多个可用介质集成的服务器、数据中心等数据存储设备。所述可用介质可以是磁性介质,(例如,软盘、硬盘、磁带)、光介质(例如,高密度数字视频光盘(digital video disc,DVD))、或者半导体介质(例如固态硬盘(solid state disk,SSD))等。In the foregoing embodiments, the functions of each functional unit may be implemented in whole or in part by software, hardware, firmware, or any combination thereof. When implemented by software, it can be implemented in the form of a computer program product in whole or in part. The computer program product includes one or more computer instructions (programs). When the computer program instructions (programs) are loaded and executed on the computer, the processes or functions described in the embodiments of the present application are generated in whole or in part. The computer may be a general-purpose computer, a special-purpose computer, a computer network, or other programmable devices. The computer instructions may be stored in a computer-readable storage medium or transmitted from one computer-readable storage medium to another computer-readable storage medium. For example, the computer instructions may be transmitted from a website, computer, server, or data center. Transmission to another website, computer, server or data center via wired (such as coaxial cable, optical fiber, digital subscriber line (DSL)) or wireless (such as infrared, wireless, microwave, etc.). The computer-readable storage medium may be any available medium that can be accessed by a computer or a data storage device such as a server or data center integrated with one or more available media. The usable medium may be a magnetic medium (for example, a floppy disk, a hard disk, and a magnetic tape), an optical medium (for example, a high-density digital video disc (digital video disc, DVD)), or a semiconductor medium (for example, a solid state disk, SSD)) etc.
所述功能如果以软件功能单元的形式实现并作为独立的产品销售或使用时,可以存储在一个计算机可读取存储介质中。基于这样的理解,本申请的技术方案本质上或者说对现有技术做出贡献的部分或者该技术方案的部分可以以软件产品的形式体现出来,该计算机软件产品存储在一个存储介质中,包括若干指令用以使得一台计算机设备(可以是个人计算机,服务器,或者网络设备等)执行本申请各个实施例所述方法的全部或部分步骤。而前述的存储介质包括:U盘、移动硬盘、只读存储器(read-only memory,ROM)、随机存取存储器(random access memory,RAM)、磁碟或者光盘等各种可以存储程序代码的介质。If the function is implemented in the form of a software functional unit and sold or used as an independent product, it can be stored in a computer readable storage medium. Based on this understanding, the technical solution of this application essentially or the part that contributes to the existing technology or the part of the technical solution can be embodied in the form of a software product, and the computer software product is stored in a storage medium, including Several instructions are used to make a computer device (which may be a personal computer, a server, or a network device, etc.) execute all or part of the steps of the method described in each embodiment of the present application. The aforementioned storage media include: U disk, mobile hard disk, read-only memory (read-only memory, ROM), random access memory (random access memory, RAM), magnetic disk or optical disk and other media that can store program code .
以上所述,仅为本申请的具体实施方式,但本申请的保护范围并不局限于此,任何熟悉本技术领域的技术人员在本申请揭露的技术范围内,可轻易想到变化或替换,都应涵盖在本申请的保护范围之内。因此,本申请的保护范围应以所述权利要求的保护范围为准。The above are only specific implementations of this application, but the protection scope of this application is not limited to this. Any person skilled in the art can easily think of changes or substitutions within the technical scope disclosed in this application. Should be covered within the scope of protection of this application. Therefore, the protection scope of this application should be subject to the protection scope of the claims.

Claims (76)

  1. 一种用于构建预编码矩阵的系数指示方法,其特征在于,包括:A coefficient indication method for constructing a precoding matrix, characterized in that it comprises:
    终端设备生成信道状态信息CSI报告,所述CSI报告包括K 1个加权系数的量化信息和第一指示信息;其中,所述K 1个加权系数为幅度非零的加权系数,所述K 1个加权系数用于构建与一个或多个频域单元对应的预编码矩阵;所述第一指示信息用于指示所述K 1个加权系数是否为所述终端设备基于预配置的加权系数上报个数K 0所确定的所有幅度非零的加权系数,所述终端设备基于K 0所确定的所有幅度非零的加权系数的个数为K 2,K 1≤K 2≤K 0,K 0、K 1和K 2均为正整数; The terminal device generates a channel state information CSI report, the CSI report includes quantization information of K 1 weighting coefficients and first indication information; wherein, the K 1 weighting coefficients are weighting coefficients with a non-zero amplitude, and the K 1 The weighting coefficient is used to construct a precoding matrix corresponding to one or more frequency domain units; the first indication information is used to indicate whether the K 1 weighting coefficients are the number reported by the terminal device based on the pre-configured weighting coefficients K 0 for all non-zero amplitude of the determined weighting coefficients, the terminal device based on the amplitude of non-zero number of all the weighting coefficients K 0 is determined as K 2, K 1 ≤K 2 ≤K 0, K 0, K 1 and K 2 are both positive integers;
    所述终端设备发送所述CSI报告。The terminal device sends the CSI report.
  2. 如权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method of claim 1, wherein the method further comprises:
    所述终端设备接收第二指示信息,所述第二指示信息用于指示为所述终端设备配置的加权系数上报个数K 0The terminal device receives second indication information, where the second indication information is used to indicate the number K 0 of weighting coefficients configured for the terminal device to be reported.
  3. 如权利要求1或2所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一指示信息包括K 1的指示和K 2的指示。 The method of claim 1 or claim 2, wherein the first indication comprises information indicating K 1 and K 2 indicates.
  4. 如权利要求3所述的方法,其特征在于,所述K 2的指示携带在所述CSI报告的第一部分中,所述K 1的指示携带在所述CSI报告的第二部分中。 The method according to claim 3, wherein the indication of K 2 is carried in the first part of the CSI report, and the indication of K 1 is carried in the second part of the CSI report.
  5. 如权利要求1或2所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一指示信息包括第一指示比特,所述第一指示比特用于指示所述K 1个加权系数是否为所述终端设备基于预配置的加权系数上报个数K 0所确定的所有幅度非零的加权系数。 The method according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the first indication information comprises a first indication bit, and the first indication bit is used to indicate whether the K 1 weighting coefficients are based on the terminal equipment The pre-configured weighting coefficients report all weighting coefficients with a non-zero amplitude determined by the number K 0 .
  6. 如权利要求5所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一指示比特携带在所述CSI报告的第二部分中。The method of claim 5, wherein the first indicator bit is carried in the second part of the CSI report.
  7. 如权利要求1或2所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一指示信息包括第二指示比特,所述第二指示比特指示K 2个加权系数中未通过所述CSI报告上报的加权系数的个数。 The method according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the first indication information comprises a second indication bit, and the second indication bit indicates a weighting coefficient among K 2 weighting coefficients that is not reported by the CSI report The number of.
  8. 如权利要求7所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第二指示比特的开销为
    Figure PCTCN2020086593-appb-100001
    比特,以与K 0-K 1+1种可选的取值对应;其中,K 0为预配置的加权系数上报个数,K 0为正整数;所述K 0-K 1+1种可选的取值包括未通过所述CSI报告上报的加权系数的个数的K 0-K 1+1种可能的取值。
    The method according to claim 7, wherein the overhead of the second indicator bit is
    Figure PCTCN2020086593-appb-100001
    Bits, corresponding to K 0 -K 1 +1 optional values; among them, K 0 is the number of pre-configured weighting coefficients reported, K 0 is a positive integer; the K 0 -K 1 +1 can be The selected value includes K 0 -K 1 +1 possible values of the number of weighting coefficients not reported through the CSI report.
  9. 如权利要求7或8所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第二指示比特携带在所述CSI报告的第二部分中。The method according to claim 7 or 8, wherein the second indicator bit is carried in the second part of the CSI report.
  10. 如权利要求5至9中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述CSI报告的第一部分包括K 1的指示。 The method according to claim 9 as claimed in claim, wherein a first portion of the reported CSI comprises an indication of K 1.
  11. 如权利要求1至10中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,若基于K 2个加权系数确定的CSI报告的第二部分所需的比特数Q大于预先分配的比特数X 2,所述CSI报告的第二部分的开销为X 2比特;或者 The method according to any one of claims 1 to 10, wherein if the number of bits Q required for the second part of the CSI report determined based on K 2 weighting coefficients is greater than the number of pre-allocated bits X 2 , The overhead of the second part of the CSI report is X 2 bits; or
    若基于所述K 2个加权系数确定的CSI报告的第二部分所需的比特数Q小于或等于预先分配的比特数X 2,所述CSI报告的第二部分的开销为Q比特; If the number of bits Q required for the second part of the CSI report determined based on the K 2 weighting coefficients is less than or equal to the pre-allocated number of bits X 2 , the overhead of the second part of the CSI report is Q bits;
    其中,X 2=X 0-X 1,X 0为预先分配的用于传输CSI报告的比特数,X 1为用于传输CSI 报告的第一部分的比特数;X 0>X 1,Q、X 1、X 2和X 0均为正整数。 Among them, X 2 =X 0 -X 1 , X 0 is the number of bits allocated in advance for transmitting the CSI report, X 1 is the number of bits used for transmitting the first part of the CSI report; X 0 >X 1 , Q, X 1 , X 2 and X 0 are all positive integers.
  12. 一种用于构建预编码矩阵的系数指示方法,其特征在于,包括:A coefficient indication method for constructing a precoding matrix, characterized in that it comprises:
    网络设备接收信道状态信息CSI报告,所述CSI报告包括K 1个加权系数的量化信息和第一指示信息;其中,所述K 1个加权系数为幅度非零的加权系数,所述K 1个加权系数用于构建与一个或多个频域单元对应的预编码矩阵;所述第一指示信息用于指示所述K 1个加权系数是否为终端设备基于预配置的加权系数上报个数K 0所确定的所有幅度非零的加权系数,所述终端设备基于K 0所确定的所有幅度非零的加权系数的个数为K 2,K 1≤K 2≤K 0,K 0、K 1和K 2均为正整数; The network device receives the channel state information CSI report, the CSI report includes quantization information of K 1 weighting coefficients and first indication information; wherein, the K 1 weighting coefficients are weighting coefficients with a non-zero amplitude, and the K 1 The weighting coefficient is used to construct a precoding matrix corresponding to one or more frequency domain units; the first indication information is used to indicate whether the K 1 weighting coefficients are the number K 0 reported by the terminal device based on the pre-configured weighting coefficients. All non-zero amplitude weighting coefficients determined by the terminal device based on the number of non-zero weighting coefficients of all the determined amplitude as K 0 K 2, K 1 ≤K 2 ≤K 0, K 0, K 1 , and K 2 is a positive integer;
    所述网络设备根据所述CSI报告确定所述K 1个加权系数以及所述K 1个加权系数是否为所述终端设备基于预配置的加权系数上报个数K 0所确定的所有幅度非零的加权系数。 The network device determines, according to the CSI report, whether the K 1 weighting coefficients and the K 1 weighting coefficients are all non-zero amplitudes determined by the terminal device based on the number of weighting coefficients reported by the terminal K 0 Weighting factor.
  13. 如权利要求12所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method of claim 12, wherein the method further comprises:
    所述网络设备发送第二指示信息,所述第二指示信息用于指示为所述终端设备配置的加权系数上报个数K 0The network device sends second indication information, where the second indication information is used to indicate the number K 0 of weighting coefficients configured for the terminal device to be reported.
  14. 如权利要求12或13所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一指示信息包括K 1的指示和K 2的指示。 The method of claim 12 or claim 13, wherein the indication information includes first indication of K 1 and K 2 indicates.
  15. 如权利要求14所述的方法,其特征在于,所述K 2的指示携带在所述CSI报告的第一部分中,所述K 1的指示携带在所述CSI报告的第二部分中。 The method according to claim 14, wherein the indication of K 2 is carried in the first part of the CSI report, and the indication of K 1 is carried in the second part of the CSI report.
  16. 如权利要求12或13所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一指示信息包括第一指示比特,所述第一指示比特用于指示所述K 1个加权系数是否为所述终端设备基于预配置的加权系数上报个数K 0所确定的所有幅度非零的加权系数。 The method according to claim 12 or 13, wherein the first indication information comprises a first indication bit, and the first indication bit is used to indicate whether the K 1 weighting coefficients are based on the terminal device The pre-configured weighting coefficients report all weighting coefficients with a non-zero amplitude determined by the number K 0 .
  17. 如权利要求16所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一指示比特携带在所述CSI报告的第二部分中。The method of claim 16, wherein the first indicator bit is carried in the second part of the CSI report.
  18. 如权利要求12或13所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一指示信息包括第二指示比特,所述第二指示比特指示K 2个加权系数中未通过所述CSI报告上报的加权系数的个数。 The method according to claim 12 or 13, wherein the first indication information comprises a second indication bit, and the second indication bit indicates a weighting coefficient among K 2 weighting coefficients that is not reported by the CSI report The number of.
  19. 如权利要求18所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第二指示比特的开销为
    Figure PCTCN2020086593-appb-100002
    比特,以与K 0-K 1+1种可选的取值对应;其中,K 0为预配置的加权系数上报个数,K 0为正整数;所述K 0-K 1+1种可选的取值包括未通过所述CSI报告上报的加权系数的个数的K 0-K 1+1种可能的取值。
    The method according to claim 18, wherein the overhead of the second indicator bit is
    Figure PCTCN2020086593-appb-100002
    Bits, corresponding to K 0 -K 1 +1 optional values; among them, K 0 is the number of pre-configured weighting coefficients reported, K 0 is a positive integer; the K 0 -K 1 +1 can be The selected value includes K 0 -K 1 +1 possible values of the number of weighting coefficients not reported through the CSI report.
  20. 如权利要求18或19所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第二指示比特携带在所述CSI报告的第二部分中。The method according to claim 18 or 19, wherein the second indicator bit is carried in the second part of the CSI report.
  21. 如权利要求16至20中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述CSI报告的第一部分包括K 1的指示。 16. A method according to claim 20 as claimed in claim, wherein a first portion of the reported CSI comprises an indication of K 1.
  22. 如权利要求12至21中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,若基于K 2个加权系数确定的CSI报告的第二部分所需的比特数Q大于预先分配的比特数X 2,所述CSI报告的第二部分的开销为X 2比特;或者 The method according to any one of claims 12 to 21, wherein if the number of bits Q required for the second part of the CSI report determined based on K 2 weighting coefficients is greater than the number of pre-allocated bits X 2 , The overhead of the second part of the CSI report is X 2 bits; or
    若基于所述K 2个加权系数确定的CSI报告的第二部分所需的比特数Q小于或等于预先分配的比特数X 2,所述CSI报告的第二部分的开销为Q比特; If the number of bits Q required for the second part of the CSI report determined based on the K 2 weighting coefficients is less than or equal to the pre-allocated number of bits X 2 , the overhead of the second part of the CSI report is Q bits;
    其中,X 2=X 0-X 1,X 0为预先分配的用于传输CSI报告的比特数,X 1为用于传输CSI 报告的第一部分的比特数;X 0>X 1,Q、X 1、X 2和X 0均为正整数。 Among them, X 2 =X 0 -X 1 , X 0 is the number of bits allocated in advance for transmitting the CSI report, X 1 is the number of bits used for transmitting the first part of the CSI report; X 0 >X 1 , Q, X 1 , X 2 and X 0 are all positive integers.
  23. 一种通信装置,其特征在于,包括:A communication device, characterized by comprising:
    处理单元,用于生成信道状态信息CSI报告,所述CSI报告包括K 1个加权系数的量化信息和第一指示信息;其中,所述K 1个加权系数为幅度非零的加权系数,所述K 1个加权系数用于构建与一个或多个频域单元对应的预编码矩阵;所述第一指示信息用于指示所述K 1个加权系数是否为所述装置基于预配置的加权系数上报个数K 0所确定的所有幅度非零的加权系数,所述装置基于K 0所确定的所有幅度非零的加权系数的个数为K 2,K 1≤K 2≤K 0,K 0、K 1和K 2均为正整数; The processing unit is configured to generate a channel state information CSI report, the CSI report including quantization information of K 1 weighting coefficients and first indication information; wherein, the K 1 weighting coefficients are weighting coefficients with a non-zero amplitude, and K 1 weighting coefficients are used to construct a precoding matrix corresponding to one or more frequency domain units; the first indication information is used to indicate whether the K 1 weighting coefficients are reported by the device based on pre-configured weighting coefficients the number K 0 of the determined magnitude of all non-zero weighting factor, said weighting means based on the number of nonzero coefficients of all the determined amplitude as K 0 K 2, K 1 ≤K 2 ≤K 0, K 0, Both K 1 and K 2 are positive integers;
    收发单元,用于发送所述CSI报告。The transceiver unit is configured to send the CSI report.
  24. 如权利要求23所述的装置,其特征在于,所述收发单元还用于接收第二指示信息,所述第二指示信息用于指示为所述装置配置的加权系数上报个数K 0The apparatus according to claim 23, wherein the transceiver unit is further configured to receive second indication information, and the second indication information is used to indicate the number of weighting coefficients configured for the apparatus to report K 0 .
  25. 如权利要求23或24所述的装置,其特征在于,所述第一指示信息包括K 1的指示和K 2的指示。 Means 23 or claim 24, wherein the indication information includes first indication of K 1 and K 2 indicates.
  26. 如权利要求25所述的装置,其特征在于,所述K 2的指示携带在所述CSI报告的第一部分中,所述K 1的指示携带在所述CSI报告的第二部分中。 The apparatus according to claim 25, wherein the indication of K 2 is carried in the first part of the CSI report, and the indication of K 1 is carried in the second part of the CSI report.
  27. 如权利要求23或24所述的装置,其特征在于,所述第一指示信息包括第一指示比特,所述第一指示比特用于指示所述K 1个加权系数是否为所述装置基于预配置的加权系数上报个数K 0所确定的所有幅度非零的加权系数。 The device according to claim 23 or 24, wherein the first indication information comprises a first indication bit, and the first indication bit is used to indicate whether the K 1 weighting coefficients are based on the preset value of the device. The configured weighting coefficients report all weighting coefficients with a non-zero amplitude determined by the number K 0 .
  28. 如权利要求27所述的装置,其特征在于,所述第一指示比特携带在所述CSI报告的第二部分中。The apparatus of claim 27, wherein the first indicator bit is carried in the second part of the CSI report.
  29. 如权利要求23或24所述的装置,其特征在于,所述第一指示信息包括第二指示比特,所述第二指示比特指示K 2个加权系数中未通过所述CSI报告上报的加权系数的个数。 The apparatus according to claim 23 or 24, wherein the first indication information comprises a second indication bit, and the second indication bit indicates a weighting coefficient among K 2 weighting coefficients that is not reported by the CSI report The number of.
  30. 如权利要求29所述的装置,其特征在于,所述第二指示比特的开销为
    Figure PCTCN2020086593-appb-100003
    比特,以与K 0-K 1+1种可选的取值对应;其中,K 0为预配置的加权系数上报个数,K 0为正整数;所述K 0-K 1+1种可选的取值包括未通过所述CSI报告上报的加权系数的个数的K 0-K 1+1种可能的取值。
    The apparatus according to claim 29, wherein the overhead of the second indicator bit is
    Figure PCTCN2020086593-appb-100003
    Bits, corresponding to K 0 -K 1 +1 optional values; among them, K 0 is the number of pre-configured weighting coefficients reported, K 0 is a positive integer; the K 0 -K 1 +1 can be The selected value includes K 0 -K 1 +1 possible values of the number of weighting coefficients not reported through the CSI report.
  31. 如权利要求29或30所述的装置,其特征在于,所述第二指示比特携带在所述CSI报告的第二部分中。The apparatus according to claim 29 or 30, wherein the second indicator bit is carried in the second part of the CSI report.
  32. 如权利要求27至31中任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,所述CSI报告的第一部分包括K 1的指示。 Apparatus of one of claims 27 to 31 as claimed in any one of claims, wherein a first portion of the reported CSI comprises an indication of K 1.
  33. 如权利要求23至32中任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,若基于K 2个加权系数确定的CSI报告的第二部分所需的比特数Q大于预先分配的比特数X 2,所述CSI报告的第二部分的开销为X 2比特;或者 The apparatus according to any one of claims 23 to 32, wherein if the number of bits Q required for the second part of the CSI report determined based on K 2 weighting coefficients is greater than the number of pre-allocated bits X 2 , The overhead of the second part of the CSI report is X 2 bits; or
    若基于所述K 2个加权系数确定的CSI报告的第二部分所需的比特数Q小于或等于预先分配的比特数X 2,所述CSI报告的第二部分的开销为Q比特; If the number of bits Q required for the second part of the CSI report determined based on the K 2 weighting coefficients is less than or equal to the pre-allocated number of bits X 2 , the overhead of the second part of the CSI report is Q bits;
    其中,X 2=X 0-X 1,X 0为预先分配的用于传输CSI报告的比特数,X 1为用于传输CSI报告的第一部分的比特数;X 0>X 1,Q、X 1、X 2和X 0均为正整数。 Among them, X 2 =X 0 -X 1 , X 0 is the number of bits allocated in advance for transmitting the CSI report, X 1 is the number of bits used to transmit the first part of the CSI report; X 0 >X 1 , Q, X 1 , X 2 and X 0 are all positive integers.
  34. 一种通信装置,其特征在于,包括:A communication device, characterized by comprising:
    收发单元,用于接收信道状态信息CSI报告,所述CSI报告包括K 1个加权系数的量化信息和第一指示信息;其中,所述K 1个加权系数为幅度非零的加权系数,所述K 1个加权系数用于构建与一个或多个频域单元对应的预编码矩阵;所述第一指示信息用于指示所述K 1个加权系数是否为终端设备基于预配置的加权系数上报个数K 0所确定的所有幅度非零的加权系数,所述终端设备基于K 0所确定的所有幅度非零的加权系数的个数为K 2,K 1≤K 2≤K 0,K 0、K 1和K 2均为正整数; The transceiver unit is configured to receive a channel state information CSI report, the CSI report including quantization information of K 1 weighting coefficients and first indication information; wherein, the K 1 weighting coefficients are weighting coefficients with a non-zero amplitude, and K 1 weighting coefficients are used to construct a precoding matrix corresponding to one or more frequency domain units; the first indication information is used to indicate whether the K 1 weighting coefficients are reported by the terminal device based on the pre-configured weighting coefficients. number K of all non-zero amplitude weighting coefficients determined 0, the terminal device based on the number of non-zero weighting coefficients of all ranges determined for K 0 K 2, K 1 ≤K 2 ≤K 0, K 0, Both K 1 and K 2 are positive integers;
    处理单元,用于根据所述CSI报告确定所述K 1个加权系数以及所述K 1个加权系数是否为所述终端设备基于预配置的加权系数上报个数K 0所确定的所有幅度非零的加权系数。 A processing unit, configured to determine, according to the CSI report, whether the K 1 weighting coefficients and whether the K 1 weighting coefficients are all non-zero amplitudes determined by the terminal device based on the number of weighting coefficients reported by the terminal K 0 The weighting factor.
  35. 如权利要求34所述的装置,其特征在于,所述收发单元还用于发送第二指示信息,所述第二指示信息用于指示为所述终端设备配置的加权系数上报个数K 0The apparatus according to claim 34, wherein the transceiver unit is further configured to send second indication information, and the second indication information is used to indicate the number of weighting coefficients configured for the terminal device to report K 0 .
  36. 如权利要求34或35所述的装置,其特征在于,所述第一指示信息包括K 1的指示和K 2的指示。 34 or 35 as claimed in claim, wherein the indication information includes first indication of K 1 and K 2 indicates.
  37. 如权利要求36所述的装置,其特征在于,所述K 2的指示携带在所述CSI报告的第一部分中,所述K 1的指示携带在所述CSI报告的第二部分中。 The apparatus according to claim 36, wherein the indication of K 2 is carried in the first part of the CSI report, and the indication of K 1 is carried in the second part of the CSI report.
  38. 如权利要求34或35所述的装置,其特征在于,所述第一指示信息包括第一指示比特,所述第一指示比特用于指示所述K 1个加权系数是否为所述终端设备基于预配置的加权系数上报个数K 0所确定的所有幅度非零的加权系数。 The apparatus according to claim 34 or 35, wherein the first indication information comprises a first indication bit, and the first indication bit is used to indicate whether the K 1 weighting coefficients are based on the terminal equipment The pre-configured weighting coefficients report all weighting coefficients with a non-zero amplitude determined by the number K 0 .
  39. 如权利要求38所述的装置,其特征在于,所述第一指示比特携带在所述CSI报告的第二部分中。The apparatus of claim 38, wherein the first indicator bit is carried in the second part of the CSI report.
  40. 如权利要求34或35所述的装置,其特征在于,所述第一指示信息包括第二指示比特,所述第二指示比特指示K 2个加权系数中未通过所述CSI报告上报的加权系数的个数。 The apparatus according to claim 34 or 35, wherein the first indication information comprises a second indication bit, and the second indication bit indicates a weighting coefficient among K 2 weighting coefficients that is not reported by the CSI report The number of.
  41. 如权利要求40所述的装置,其特征在于,所述第二指示比特的开销为
    Figure PCTCN2020086593-appb-100004
    比特,以与K 0-K 1+1种可选的取值对应;其中,K 0为预配置的加权系数上报个数,K 0为正整数;所述K 0-K 1+1种可选的取值包括未通过所述CSI报告上报的加权系数的个数的K 0-K 1+1种可能的取值。
    The apparatus of claim 40, wherein the overhead of the second indicator bit is
    Figure PCTCN2020086593-appb-100004
    Bits, corresponding to K 0 -K 1 +1 optional values; among them, K 0 is the number of pre-configured weighting coefficients reported, K 0 is a positive integer; the K 0 -K 1 +1 can be The selected value includes K 0 -K 1 +1 possible values of the number of weighting coefficients not reported through the CSI report.
  42. 如权利要求40或41所述的装置,其特征在于,所述第二指示比特的开销为
    Figure PCTCN2020086593-appb-100005
    比特,以与K 0-K 1+1种可选的取值对应;其中,K 0为预配置的加权系数上报个数,K 0为正整数;所述K 0-K 1+1种可选的取值包括未通过所述CSI报告上报的加权系数的个数的K 0-K 1+1种可能的取值。
    The apparatus according to claim 40 or 41, wherein the overhead of the second indicator bit is
    Figure PCTCN2020086593-appb-100005
    Bits, corresponding to K 0 -K 1 +1 optional values; among them, K 0 is the number of pre-configured weighting coefficients reported, K 0 is a positive integer; the K 0 -K 1 +1 can be The selected value includes K 0 -K 1 +1 possible values of the number of weighting coefficients not reported through the CSI report.
  43. 如权利要求38至42中任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,所述CSI报告的第一部分包括K 1的指示。 38 to 42 as claimed in any one of claims, wherein the first portion includes an indication of the CSI reported in K 1.
  44. 如权利要求34至43中任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,若基于K 2个加权系数确定的CSI报告的第二部分所需的比特数Q大于预先分配的比特数X 2,所述CSI报告的第二部分的开销为X 2比特;或者 The apparatus according to any one of claims 34 to 43, wherein if the number of bits Q required for the second part of the CSI report determined based on K 2 weighting coefficients is greater than the number of pre-allocated bits X 2 , The overhead of the second part of the CSI report is X 2 bits; or
    若基于所述K 2个加权系数确定的CSI报告的第二部分所需的比特数Q小于或等于预先分配的比特数X 2,所述CSI报告的第二部分的开销为Q比特; If the number of bits Q required for the second part of the CSI report determined based on the K 2 weighting coefficients is less than or equal to the pre-allocated number of bits X 2 , the overhead of the second part of the CSI report is Q bits;
    其中,X 2=X 0-X 1,X 0为预先分配的用于传输CSI报告的比特数,X 1为用于传输CSI 报告的第一部分的比特数;X 0>X 1,Q、X 1、X 2和X 0均为正整数。 Among them, X 2 =X 0 -X 1 , X 0 is the number of bits allocated in advance for transmitting the CSI report, X 1 is the number of bits used for transmitting the first part of the CSI report; X 0 >X 1 , Q, X 1 , X 2 and X 0 are all positive integers.
  45. 一种通信装置,其特征在于,包括:A communication device, characterized by comprising:
    处理器,用于生成信道状态信息CSI报告,所述CSI报告包括K 1个加权系数的量化信息和第一指示信息;其中,所述K 1个加权系数为幅度非零的加权系数,所述K 1个加权系数用于构建与一个或多个频域单元对应的预编码矩阵;所述第一指示信息用于指示所述K 1个加权系数是否为所述装置基于预配置的加权系数上报个数K 0所确定的所有幅度非零的加权系数,所述装置基于K 0所确定的所有幅度非零的加权系数的个数为K 2,K 1≤K 2≤K 0,K 0、K 1和K 2均为正整数; The processor is configured to generate a channel state information CSI report, the CSI report including quantization information of K 1 weighting coefficients and first indication information; wherein, the K 1 weighting coefficients are weighting coefficients with a non-zero amplitude, and K 1 weighting coefficients are used to construct a precoding matrix corresponding to one or more frequency domain units; the first indication information is used to indicate whether the K 1 weighting coefficients are reported by the device based on pre-configured weighting coefficients the number K 0 of the determined magnitude of all non-zero weighting factor, said weighting means based on the number of nonzero coefficients of all the determined amplitude as K 0 K 2, K 1 ≤K 2 ≤K 0, K 0, Both K 1 and K 2 are positive integers;
    收发器,用于发送所述CSI报告。The transceiver is used to send the CSI report.
  46. 如权利要求45所述的装置,其特征在于,所述收发器还用于接收第二指示信息,所述第二指示信息用于指示为所述装置配置的加权系数上报个数K 0The apparatus according to claim 45, wherein the transceiver is further configured to receive second indication information, and the second indication information is used to indicate the number of weighting coefficients configured for the apparatus to report K 0 .
  47. 如权利要求45或46所述的装置,其特征在于,所述第一指示信息包括K 1的指示和K 2的指示。 Means 45 or claim 46, wherein the indication information includes first indication of K 1 and K 2 indicates.
  48. 如权利要求47所述的装置,其特征在于,所述K 2的指示携带在所述CSI报告的第一部分中,所述K 1的指示携带在所述CSI报告的第二部分中。 The apparatus according to claim 47, wherein the indication of K 2 is carried in the first part of the CSI report, and the indication of K 1 is carried in the second part of the CSI report.
  49. 如权利要求45或46所述的装置,其特征在于,所述第一指示信息包括第一指示比特,所述第一指示比特用于指示所述K 1个加权系数是否为所述装置基于预配置的加权系数上报个数K 0所确定的所有幅度非零的加权系数。 The apparatus according to claim 45 or 46, wherein the first indication information comprises a first indication bit, and the first indication bit is used to indicate whether the K 1 weighting coefficient is based on the preset The configured weighting coefficient reports all weighting coefficients with non-zero amplitudes determined by the number K 0 .
  50. 如权利要求49所述的装置,其特征在于,所述第一指示比特携带在所述CSI报告的第二部分中。The apparatus of claim 49, wherein the first indicator bit is carried in the second part of the CSI report.
  51. 如权利要求45或46所述的装置,其特征在于,所述第一指示信息包括第二指示比特,所述第二指示比特指示K 2个加权系数中未通过所述CSI报告上报的加权系数的个数。 The apparatus according to claim 45 or 46, wherein the first indication information comprises a second indication bit, and the second indication bit indicates a weighting coefficient among K 2 weighting coefficients that is not reported by the CSI report The number of.
  52. 如权利要求51所述的装置,其特征在于,所述第二指示比特的开销为
    Figure PCTCN2020086593-appb-100006
    比特,以与K 0-K 1+1种可选的取值对应;其中,K 0为预配置的加权系数上报个数,K 0为正整数;所述K 0-K 1+1种可选的取值包括未通过所述CSI报告上报的加权系数的个数的K 0-K 1+1种可能的取值。
    The apparatus of claim 51, wherein the overhead of the second indicator bit is
    Figure PCTCN2020086593-appb-100006
    Bits, corresponding to K 0 -K 1 +1 optional values; among them, K 0 is the number of pre-configured weighting coefficients reported, K 0 is a positive integer; the K 0 -K 1 +1 can be The selected value includes K 0 -K 1 +1 possible values of the number of weighting coefficients not reported through the CSI report.
  53. 如权利要求50或51所述的装置,其特征在于,所述第二指示比特携带在所述CSI报告的第二部分中。The apparatus according to claim 50 or 51, wherein the second indicator bit is carried in the second part of the CSI report.
  54. 如权利要求49至53中任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,所述CSI报告的第一部分包括K 1的指示。 The device according 49 to any one of claims 53, wherein a first portion of the reported CSI comprises an indication of K 1.
  55. 如权利要求45至54中任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,若基于K 2个加权系数确定的CSI报告的第二部分所需的比特数Q大于预先分配的比特数X 2,所述CSI报告的第二部分的开销为X 2比特;或者 The apparatus according to any one of claims 45 to 54, wherein if the number of bits Q required for the second part of the CSI report determined based on K 2 weighting coefficients is greater than the number of pre-allocated bits X 2 , The overhead of the second part of the CSI report is X 2 bits; or
    若基于所述K 2个加权系数确定的CSI报告的第二部分所需的比特数Q小于或等于预先分配的比特数X 2,所述CSI报告的第二部分的开销为Q比特; If the number of bits Q required for the second part of the CSI report determined based on the K 2 weighting coefficients is less than or equal to the pre-allocated number of bits X 2 , the overhead of the second part of the CSI report is Q bits;
    其中,X 2=X 0-X 1,X 0为预先分配的用于传输CSI报告的比特数,X 1为用于传输CSI报告的第一部分的比特数;X 0>X 1,Q、X 1、X 2和X 0均为正整数。 Among them, X 2 =X 0 -X 1 , X 0 is the number of bits allocated in advance for transmitting the CSI report, X 1 is the number of bits used to transmit the first part of the CSI report; X 0 >X 1 , Q, X 1 , X 2 and X 0 are all positive integers.
  56. 一种通信装置,其特征在于,包括:A communication device, characterized by comprising:
    收发器,用于接收信道状态信息CSI报告,所述CSI报告包括K 1个加权系数的量化信息和第一指示信息;其中,所述K 1个加权系数为幅度非零的加权系数,所述K 1个加权系数用于构建与一个或多个频域单元对应的预编码矩阵;所述第一指示信息用于指示所述K 1个加权系数是否为终端设备基于预配置的加权系数上报个数K 0所确定的所有幅度非零的加权系数,所述终端设备基于K 0所确定的所有幅度非零的加权系数的个数为K 2,K 1≤K 2≤K 0,K 0、K 1和K 2均为正整数; The transceiver is configured to receive a channel state information CSI report, the CSI report including quantization information of K 1 weighting coefficients and first indication information; wherein, the K 1 weighting coefficients are weighting coefficients with a non-zero amplitude, and K 1 weighting coefficients are used to construct a precoding matrix corresponding to one or more frequency domain units; the first indication information is used to indicate whether the K 1 weighting coefficients are reported by the terminal device based on the pre-configured weighting coefficients. number K of all non-zero amplitude weighting coefficients determined 0, the terminal device based on the number of non-zero weighting coefficients of all ranges determined for K 0 K 2, K 1 ≤K 2 ≤K 0, K 0, Both K 1 and K 2 are positive integers;
    处理器,用于根据所述CSI报告确定所述K 1个加权系数以及所述K 1个加权系数是否为所述终端设备基于预配置的加权系数上报个数K 0所确定的所有幅度非零的加权系数。 The processor is configured to determine, according to the CSI report, whether the K 1 weighting coefficients and the K 1 weighting coefficients are all non-zero amplitudes determined by the terminal device based on the number K 0 of weighting coefficients reported by the terminal device. The weighting factor.
  57. 如权利要求56所述的装置,其特征在于,所述收发器还用于发送第二指示信息,所述第二指示信息用于指示为所述终端设备配置的加权系数上报个数K 0The apparatus according to claim 56, wherein the transceiver is further configured to send second indication information, and the second indication information is used to indicate the number K 0 of weighting coefficients configured for the terminal device to be reported.
  58. 如权利要求56或57所述的装置,其特征在于,所述第一指示信息包括K 1的指示和K 2的指示。 Means 56 or claim 57, wherein the indication information includes first indication of K 1 and K 2 indicates.
  59. 如权利要求58所述的装置,其特征在于,所述K 2的指示携带在所述CSI报告的第一部分中,所述K 1的指示携带在所述CSI报告的第二部分中。 The apparatus according to claim 58, wherein the indication of K 2 is carried in the first part of the CSI report, and the indication of K 1 is carried in the second part of the CSI report.
  60. 如权利要求56或57所述的装置,其特征在于,所述第一指示信息包括第一指示比特,所述第一指示比特用于指示所述K 1个加权系数是否为所述终端设备基于预配置的加权系数上报个数K 0所确定的所有幅度非零的加权系数。 The apparatus according to claim 56 or 57, wherein the first indication information comprises a first indication bit, and the first indication bit is used to indicate whether the K 1 weighting coefficients are based on the terminal equipment The pre-configured weighting coefficients report all weighting coefficients with a non-zero amplitude determined by the number K 0 .
  61. 如权利要求60所述的装置,其特征在于,所述第一指示比特携带在所述CSI报告的第二部分中。The apparatus of claim 60, wherein the first indicator bit is carried in the second part of the CSI report.
  62. 如权利要求56或57所述的装置,其特征在于,所述第一指示信息包括第二指示比特,所述第二指示比特指示K 2个加权系数中未通过所述CSI报告上报的加权系数的个数。 The apparatus according to claim 56 or 57, wherein the first indication information comprises a second indication bit, and the second indication bit indicates a weighting coefficient among K 2 weighting coefficients that is not reported by the CSI report The number of.
  63. 如权利要求62所述的装置,其特征在于,所述第二指示比特的开销为
    Figure PCTCN2020086593-appb-100007
    比特,以与K 0-K 1+1种可选的取值对应;其中,K 0为预配置的加权系数上报个数,K 0为正整数;所述K 0-K 1+1种可选的取值包括未通过所述CSI报告上报的加权系数的个数的K 0-K 1+1种可能的取值。
    The apparatus of claim 62, wherein the overhead of the second indicator bit is
    Figure PCTCN2020086593-appb-100007
    Bits, corresponding to K 0 -K 1 +1 optional values; among them, K 0 is the number of pre-configured weighting coefficients reported, K 0 is a positive integer; the K 0 -K 1 +1 can be The selected value includes K 0 -K 1 +1 possible values of the number of weighting coefficients not reported through the CSI report.
  64. 如权利要求62或63所述的装置,其特征在于,所述第二指示比特的开销为
    Figure PCTCN2020086593-appb-100008
    比特,以与K 0-K 1+1种可选的取值对应;其中,K 0为预配置的加权系数上报个数,K 0为正整数;所述K 0-K 1+1种可选的取值包括未通过所述CSI报告上报的加权系数的个数的K 0-K 1+1种可能的取值。
    The apparatus according to claim 62 or 63, wherein the overhead of the second indicator bit is
    Figure PCTCN2020086593-appb-100008
    Bits, corresponding to K 0 -K 1 +1 optional values; among them, K 0 is the number of pre-configured weighting coefficients reported, K 0 is a positive integer; the K 0 -K 1 +1 can be The selected value includes K 0 -K 1 +1 possible values of the number of weighting coefficients not reported through the CSI report.
  65. 如权利要求60至64中任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,所述CSI报告的第一部分包括K 1的指示。 The device according to any of 60 to 64 as claimed in claim, wherein the first portion includes an indication of the CSI reported the K 1.
  66. 如权利要求56至65中任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,若基于K 2个加权系数确定的CSI报告的第二部分所需的比特数Q大于预先分配的比特数X 2,所述CSI报告的第二部分的开销为X 2比特;或者 The apparatus according to any one of claims 56 to 65, wherein if the number of bits Q required for the second part of the CSI report determined based on K 2 weighting coefficients is greater than the number of pre-allocated bits X 2 , The overhead of the second part of the CSI report is X 2 bits; or
    若基于所述K 2个加权系数确定的CSI报告的第二部分所需的比特数Q小于或等于预先分配的比特数X 2,所述CSI报告的第二部分的开销为Q比特; If the number of bits Q required for the second part of the CSI report determined based on the K 2 weighting coefficients is less than or equal to the pre-allocated number of bits X 2 , the overhead of the second part of the CSI report is Q bits;
    其中,X 2=X 0-X 1,X 0为预先分配的用于传输CSI报告的比特数,X 1为用于传输CSI报告的第一部分的比特数;X 0>X 1,Q、X 1、X 2和X 0均为正整数。 Among them, X 2 =X 0 -X 1 , X 0 is the number of bits allocated in advance for transmitting the CSI report, X 1 is the number of bits used to transmit the first part of the CSI report; X 0 >X 1 , Q, X 1 , X 2 and X 0 are all positive integers.
  67. 一种通信装置,其特征在于,包括至少一个处理器,所述至少一个处理器用于执行存储器中存储的计算机程序,以使得所述装置实现如权利要求1至11中任一项所述的方法。A communication device, characterized by comprising at least one processor configured to execute a computer program stored in a memory, so that the device implements the method according to any one of claims 1 to 11 .
  68. 一种通信装置,其特征在于,包括至少一个处理器,所述至少一个处理器用于执行存储器中存储的计算机程序,以使得所述装置实现如权利要求12至22中任一项所述的方法。A communication device, characterized by comprising at least one processor configured to execute a computer program stored in a memory, so that the device implements the method according to any one of claims 12 to 22 .
  69. 一种处理装置,其特征在于,包括:A processing device, characterized in that it comprises:
    通信接口,用于输入和/或输出信息;Communication interface, used to input and/or output information;
    处理器,用于执行计算机程序,以使得所述装置实现如权利要求1至11中任一项所述的方法。The processor is configured to execute a computer program, so that the device implements the method according to any one of claims 1 to 11.
  70. 一种处理装置,其特征在于,包括:A processing device, characterized in that it comprises:
    通信接口,用于输入和/或输出信息;Communication interface, used to input and/or output information;
    处理器,用于执行计算机程序,以使得所述装置实现如权利要求12至22中任一项所述的方法。The processor is configured to execute a computer program, so that the device implements the method according to any one of claims 12 to 22.
  71. 一种处理装置,其特征在于,包括:A processing device, characterized in that it comprises:
    存储器,用于存储计算机程序;Memory, used to store computer programs;
    处理器,用于从所述存储器调用并运行所述计算机程序,以使得所述装置实现如权利要求1至11中任一项所述的方法。The processor is configured to call and run the computer program from the memory, so that the device implements the method according to any one of claims 1 to 11.
  72. 一种处理装置,其特征在于,包括:A processing device, characterized in that it comprises:
    存储器,用于存储计算机程序;Memory, used to store computer programs;
    处理器,用于从所述存储器调用并运行所述计算机程序,以使得所述装置实现如权利要求12至22中任一项所述的方法。The processor is configured to call and run the computer program from the memory, so that the device implements the method according to any one of claims 12 to 22.
  73. 一种计算机可读存储介质,其特征在于,包括计算机程序,当所述计算机程序在计算机上运行时,使得所述计算机执行如权利要求1至11中任一项所述的方法。A computer-readable storage medium, characterized by comprising a computer program, which when the computer program runs on a computer, causes the computer to execute the method according to any one of claims 1 to 11.
  74. 一种计算机可读存储介质,其特征在于,包括计算机程序,当所述计算机程序在计算机上运行时,使得所述计算机执行如权利要求12至22中任一项所述的方法。A computer-readable storage medium, characterized by comprising a computer program, which when the computer program runs on a computer, causes the computer to execute the method according to any one of claims 12 to 22.
  75. 一种计算机程序产品,所述计算机程序产品包括计算机程序,当所述计算机程序在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行如权利要求1至11中任一项所述的方法。A computer program product, the computer program product comprising a computer program, when the computer program is run on a computer, the computer is caused to execute the method according to any one of claims 1 to 11.
  76. 一种计算机程序产品,所述计算机程序产品包括计算机程序,当所述计算机程序在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行如权利要求12至22中任一项所述的方法。A computer program product, the computer program product includes a computer program, when the computer program is run on a computer, the computer is caused to execute the method according to any one of claims 12 to 22.
PCT/CN2020/086593 2019-04-30 2020-04-24 Coefficient indication method for constructing precoding matrix, and communication apparatus WO2020221117A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN201910365436.3 2019-04-30
CN201910365436.3A CN111865372B (en) 2019-04-30 2019-04-30 Coefficient indication method and communication device for constructing precoding matrix

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2020221117A1 true WO2020221117A1 (en) 2020-11-05

Family

ID=72965833

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2020/086593 WO2020221117A1 (en) 2019-04-30 2020-04-24 Coefficient indication method for constructing precoding matrix, and communication apparatus

Country Status (2)

Country Link
CN (2) CN113452419A (en)
WO (1) WO2020221117A1 (en)

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN116962299A (en) * 2023-09-21 2023-10-27 广东云下汇金科技有限公司 Data center calculation force scheduling method, system, equipment and readable storage medium

Families Citing this family (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20240030988A1 (en) * 2020-12-29 2024-01-25 Ntt Docomo, Inc. Terminal and base station

Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20180248716A1 (en) * 2017-02-24 2018-08-30 Chunghwa Telecom Co., Ltd. Reduced-overhead channel estimation method and system thereof for massive mimo systems

Family Cites Families (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US9986474B2 (en) * 2014-10-14 2018-05-29 Nokia Solutions And Networks Oy Interference and load aware dynamic point selection
US10659118B2 (en) * 2016-04-19 2020-05-19 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Method and apparatus for explicit CSI reporting in advanced wireless communication systems
CN114285447B (en) * 2017-01-09 2022-11-08 中兴通讯股份有限公司 Method and device for feeding back and determining channel state information
CN108390704B (en) * 2017-02-03 2021-06-25 上海诺基亚贝尔股份有限公司 Method and apparatus for MIMO communication
CN108696304A (en) * 2017-04-06 2018-10-23 索尼公司 Wireless communications method and wireless communication device
CN114050854A (en) * 2017-06-16 2022-02-15 中兴通讯股份有限公司 Wireless communication method and device

Patent Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20180248716A1 (en) * 2017-02-24 2018-08-30 Chunghwa Telecom Co., Ltd. Reduced-overhead channel estimation method and system thereof for massive mimo systems

Non-Patent Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
ANONYMOUS: "3rd Generation Partnership Project; Technical Specification Group Radio Access Network; NR; Physical layer procedures for data (Release 15)", 3GPP STANDARD; TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION; 3GPP TS 38.214, no. V15.5.0, 31 March 2019 (2019-03-31), pages 1 - 103, XP051722951 *
HUAWEI; HISILICON: "Discussion on CSI Enhancement", 3GPP DRAFT; R1-1903969, 12 April 2019 (2019-04-12), Xi'an China, pages 1 - 19, XP051691191 *
VIVO: "Further Discussion on Type II CSI Compression and Feedback for High Rank Extension", 3GPP DRAFT; R1-1904095, vol. RAN WG1, 12 April 2019 (2019-04-12), Xi'an China, pages 1 - 6, XP051691282 *
ZTE: "CSI Enhancement for MU-MIMO Support", 3GPP DRAFT; R1-1903343, 1 March 2019 (2019-03-01), Athens Greece, pages 1 - 15, XP051601020 *

Cited By (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN116962299A (en) * 2023-09-21 2023-10-27 广东云下汇金科技有限公司 Data center calculation force scheduling method, system, equipment and readable storage medium
CN116962299B (en) * 2023-09-21 2024-01-19 广东云下汇金科技有限公司 Data center calculation force scheduling method, system, equipment and readable storage medium

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN111865372B (en) 2021-06-08
CN113452419A (en) 2021-09-28
CN111865372A (en) 2020-10-30

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
WO2020125510A1 (en) Channel measurement method and communication device
CN111342873B (en) Channel measurement method and communication device
WO2020221118A1 (en) Method for indicating precoding matrix, method for determining precoding matrix, and communication device
WO2021083068A1 (en) Method for reporting channel state information and communication apparatus
WO2020143577A1 (en) Parameter configuration method and communication apparatus
WO2020125511A1 (en) Channel measurement method, and communications device
WO2020083057A1 (en) Method for indicating and determining pre-coding vector, and communication apparatus
WO2020143580A1 (en) Vector indication method for constructing precoding vector, and communication apparatus
CN111757382B (en) Method for indicating channel state information and communication device
WO2020221117A1 (en) Coefficient indication method for constructing precoding matrix, and communication apparatus
US11362707B2 (en) Precoding vector indicating and determining method and communications apparatus
WO2020244496A1 (en) Channel measurement method and communication apparatus
WO2020211681A1 (en) Channel measurement method and communication apparatus
US11863262B2 (en) Method for indicating vectors used to construct precoding vector and communications apparatus
CN111756422B (en) Method for indicating channel state information and communication device
CN113557684B (en) Vector indication method for constructing precoding vector and communication device
WO2020073788A1 (en) Precoding vector indication and determination method and communication device
CN110875767A (en) Method and communication device for indicating and determining precoding vector
WO2020164387A1 (en) Method for indicating and determining precoding vector, and communication device

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 20798368

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 20798368

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1